TPU2000/2000R DNP 3.0 AUTOMATION TECHNICAL GUIDE

Transcription

1 TPU2000/2000R DNP 3.0 AUTOMATION TECHNICAL GUIDE TG Version /01 i

2 Contents Section 1 Introduction Introduction... 1 Section 2 Communication Card Identification and Physical Port Characteristics Communication Card Identification and Physical Port Characteristics... 4 Communication Card Part Number Options... 6 Unit Communication Card Verification Section 3 TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Connectivity TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Connectivity RS232 Interface Connectivity Port Isolation RS232 Handshaking Defined RS232 Cable Connectivity RS485 Device Connectivity with the TPU2000 and TPU2000R Section 4 TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Parameterization TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Parameterization COM 0 Port (Front Port Configuration) COM Port 1 Option Settings (TPU2000R Only) [Catalog 588XXX00-XXX0 or 588XXX50-XXX0] COM Port 2 Option Settings (TPU2000R Only) [Catalog 588XXXX0-XXX0 or 588XXXX6-XXX4] COM Port 3 and AUX COM Configuration DNP 3.0 Configuration of COM 3 and AUX COM Port Section 5 DNP 3.0 Profile Description DNP 3.0 Profile Description DNP V3.0 Implementation Table Cold and Warm Restart Capabilities Internal Indication (IIN) Field Data Returns Binary Input Points (129 Indices Defined) DNP Control Explained Control Functions and Objects Defined Single Control Point Configuration Control Code Configuration Paired Point Operation Physical Output Test Control (Index 0 Through 9) Trip Operate Control (Index 10-11) Reset Element Control (Index 12 Through 13) ULO Soft Point Control (Index 14 Through 22) Force Logical Input Configuration Point Forcing Control Functionality (Index 32 Through 127) Counter Access (6 Elements Defined) Analog Input Index Designation (168 Elements Defined) Metering Data (Index 0 Through 118, 351 Through 354 and 319 Through 350) Demand Data (Index 119 Through 130) Fault Records (Differential Fault Index 131 Through 202, Through 240) and Operation Record (Index 316 Through 318) Retrieval User Definable Registers (Indices 319 Through 350) Analog Data Index Definition Class Data Parameterization Class 3 Data Masking DNP Event Masking Worksheet (sample) DNP Event Masking Worksheet ii

3 Time Synchronization Rapid Analog Reporting Register Scaling and Re-Mapping and User Definable Register (UDR) Configuration Process TPU2000 and TPU2000R Internal Operation ABB Data Type Definitions Register Scaling Investigated Scaling Option and Destination Register Length Options Explained Destination Register Length Justification Options Explained Source Register Address and Source Register Type Explained Source Scale Range and Source Scale Type Selections Explained TPU2000 and 2000R User Definable Register Defaults Section 6 DNP 3.0 Communication Troubleshooting DNP 3.0 Communication Troubleshooting Appendix A - Revision History Appendix B TPU Standard 10 Byte Protocol Document Appendix C - Revision History Appendix D - Modem Connectivity Appendix E - Telebyte Converter Appendix F - B&B Converter The following are trademarks of AEG Schneider Automation Inc. Modbus, Modbus Plus, Modicon IBM, OS 2, and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. The following are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation: Windows NT Windows 3.1 Windows 95 Windows 98 Hyperterminal MS-DOS Microsoft USDATA is a registered trademark of the USDATA Corporation. INCOM and Standard Ten Byte Protocol are registered trademarks of Asea Brown Boveri Incorporated. iii

4 Tables Section 1 Introduction Table 1-1. Protocol Capabilities Listed by Product Type... 2 Section 2 Communication Card Identification and Physical Port Characteristics Table 2-1. TPU2000 Communication Options... 7 Table 2-2. TPU2000 Communication Card Matrix for Unit 488 M R X D C Z SSSQ... 8 Table 2-3. TPU2000R Communication Options... 8 Table 2-4. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit X X X Y Z X X X X Q... 9 Table 2-5. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit 588 X X X Y Z X X X X Q... 9 Section 3 TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Connectivity Table 3-1. Physical Interface Options Section 4 TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Parameterization Table 4-1. TPU2000 and TPU2000R COM Port 0 Front Panel Interface Parameters Table 4-2. WinECP Communication Port Settings Table 4-3. COM Port 1 and COM Port 2 WinECP Port Settings Table 4-4. Valid Parameter Selection for Standard Ten Byte and DNP 3.0 Protocols Table 4-5. Class Masking Table for DNP Section 5 DNP 3.0 Profile Description Table 5-1. DNP 3.0 Object/Variations Supported for the TPU2000/2000R Table 5-2. Trouble Bit 6 Instance Occurrence Definitions Table 5-3. Binary Input Index Definition Table Table 5-4. Binary Output Control Indices Table 5-5. Counter Index Assignment Table 5-6. Event Record Definition Type Table 5-7. Analog Data Index Definition Table 5-8. Class 3 Event Masking Settings Table 5-9. Register Scaling Queries Table Min/Max Ranges for Scaled Numbers Depending Upon Scale Option and Bit Length Selected Table Register Scaling and Remapping Quantities and Associated Indexes Table Default Scaling and Remapping Register Assignments iv

5 Figures Section 1 Introduction Figure 1-1. Transformer Protection Unit Product Family... 2 Section 2 Communication Card Identification and Physical Port Characteristics Figure 2-1. COM 0 Port Location... 4 Figure 2-2. Physical Optional Communication Card Port Locations... 4 Figure 2-3. TPU2000 and TPU2000R Communication Cards... 5 Figure 2-4. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU Figure 2-5. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU2000R... 6 Section 3 DPU2000, DPU1500R and DPU2000R Device Connectivity Figure 3-1. Point to Point Architecture Using RS Figure 3-2. Multi-Drop Topology Using RS Figure 3-3. DPU2000(R), TPU2000(R), or GPU2000(R) to PC Cable 9 Pin to 9 Pin-out Figure 3-4. Connection of a DB 25 Connector to a TPU2000 or TPU2000R Figure 3-5. RS485 2 Wire Connection Diagram Figure 3-6. RS485 Terminator Resistor Diagram Figure 3-7. Location of RS485 Resistor Configuration Jumpers in the TPU2000R Section 4 TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Parameterization Figure 4-1. Initial WinECP Communication Configuration Screen Figure 4-2. Communication Port Setup Screen Figure 4-3. COM Port 1 WinECP Setting Screen Figure 4-4. WinECP COM Port 2 Communication Screen Figure 4-5. TPU2000R Communication Capability Chart Figure 4-6. TPU2000 Communication Capability Chart Section 5 DNP 3.0 Profile Description Figure 5-1. DNP 3.0 Device IIN Bit Definition Assignment Figure 5-2. DNP Control Field Bit Designation Figure 5-3. WinECP Forced Logical Input Mapping Screen Figure 5-4. Differential and Event Record Layout Figure 5-5. Through Fault and Harmonic Restraint Fault Layout Figure 5-6. Parameter 5 DNP 3.0 Group Mask Figure 5-7. Parameter 6 Group Mask Figure 5-8. Parameter 7 Group Mask Figure 5-9. Parameter 8 Group Mask Figure Settings Menu Access Screen for the TPU2000/2000R Figure Settings Screen Figure Miscellaneous Settings Submenu Screen Figure Parameter Configuration Screen Figure Time Synchronization Parameterization Requirements Figure 5-14A. Miscellaneous Settings Screen Figure 5-14B. Miscellaneous Parameter Configuration Subscreens Figure 5-14C. Miscellaneous Parameter 17 Setting Figure 5-14D. Miscellaneous Parameter 18 Setting Figure Register Scaling Methodology Figure Change Configuration Settings Menu Illustrating CT and VT Configuration Figure User DefinableRegister Configuration Screen Figure Popup Menu Configuration Screen for Data Type Register Selections Figure Relationship Between Scaled and Unscaled Formats for Offset Bipolar, Bipolar, Unipolar and Negative Unipolar Scaling Selection in the TPU2000 and 2000R Figure Bit Justification Notation Figure Register Scaling Default Example Figure Scaling Example for Voltage Mapped Registers v

6 vi

7 Section 1 - Introduction With the introduction of a microprocessor based protective relay, today s relay protection engineer must be familiar with topics outside of traditional relaying schemes. It is intended that the production of this manual will enable the relay engineer to understand the principles of a microprocessor-based relay s inclusion in a substation automation project. Substation automation is heavily dependent upon integration of the appropriate components to allow reporting of metering and event data. The foundation of a successful automation solution is thorough engineering of a communication system. The Transmission Protection Unit (TPU) is the culmination of intensive design efforts and relaying experience, which combine protective relaying and communication capabilities at an economical price. Through the evolution of protective relays, it was decided that a special manual needed to serve today s power automation specialist. This manual is intended to give the reader an in-depth explanation of the communication interfaces available with the Transmission Protection Unit. Successful integration of microprocessor based relays like the TPU depends on not just understanding the bits and bytes of a particular protocol. It is the inherent understanding and application of such esoteric topics as physical interfaces, real time control, manufacturer independent device integration, throughput vs. speed of communication, which influences the success of an automation project. In many cases the individual performing the SCADA integration is not a relay protection engineer. This manual departs from the standard type of relay manual in that each data type is explained and each bit, byte and word meaning is explained. Several application examples are given within each section. A description of each protocol command is illustrated for the benefit of the user. Appendices are included detailing application notes, which augment the text. An explanation of the product s physical interfaces and the connectivity required is explored in depth. Explanations of register s uses to increase overall throughput are also explored. Throughput is always an issue when the system is commissioned. Understanding ways to improve the system data update is explained. Several steps are required to permit successful communication between devices: 1. Identification of the hardware components (Section 2) 2. Correct physical connection between devices (Section 3). 3. Correct device configuration of port protocol and operation parameters (Section 4). 4. Generation and interpretation of the protocol command strings (Section 5). The following sections shall explore the following procedures in depth when establishing a communication automation system, utilizing the TPU2000 and TPU2000R. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R all have networking capabilities. Figure 1-1 shows the general look of the units as viewed from the front. 1

8 DPU 2000 C E STATUS TARGETS STATUS XXXXX XX XXXX X XX XXXX X XXXXX TARGETS XX XXXXX XX X XX XXXX X XX X X XX XXXX X XX X XXXXX A B C N RST XX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXX X XXXXXXX C E XXXXX XX XXXX X XX XXXX X XXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXX XX XXXX XXX XXXXX X XX XXXX XXX XXXX X XXXXX TPU 2000R TPU 2000 Figure 1 1. Transformer Protection Unit Product Family The products differentiate themselves as listed in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 lists the available protocols within the relays. Standard Ten Byte is an ABB protocol which is within each of the protective relays. Standard Ten Byte is an asynchronous byte oriented protocol. The programming software (ECP [DOS External Communication Program] and WIN ECP [Windows External Communication Program]) allows configuration of the relay through a port on the units. Standard Ten Byte is available through an RS232 or RS485 port on the DPU. INCOM is an ABB protocol, which is a derivative of Standard Ten Byte. It is a modulated synchronous bit stream using the same commands as in the Standard Ten Byte protocol. INCOM is available on each of the protective relays as indicated within Table 1-1. Its physical interface is proprietary in that a modulated signal is expected by the TPU node. Modbus is an industrial de-facto standard protocol which has been widely embraced by the utility industry. Modbus has two emulation s, RTU, which is a synchronous protocol and ASCII which is an asynchronous protocol. Modbus uses only one command set, but two emulation s. Modbus strengths are that it uses a standard RS232 or RS485 interface to interconnect nodes on a network. Modbus Plus is a hybrid protocol refinement of Modbus. Modbus Plus has a proprietary physical interface which is available to device manufacturers through a connectivity program with Groupe Schneider. The interface offers greater speed and communication features than Modbus. DNP 3.0 is a protocol, which has its roots deep in the utility industry. It is an asynchronous protocol that allows connectivity through a standard RS232 or RS485 port. It includes such defined capabilities as file transfer, and timestamping as part of the protocol, which makes it desirable for a utility implementation. Table 1 1. Protocol Capabilities Listed by Product Type PRODUCT PROTOCOL NOTES TPU2000 Standard Ten Byte Addressable Front Com, Com 1 and Aux Com INCOM 2 Wire (AND SHIELD) Current Injection Physical Interface Modbus RS232 or RS485 DNP 3.0 RS232 or RS485 TPU2000R Standard Ten Byte RS232 or RS485 INCOM 2 Wire (AND SHIELD) Current Injection Physical Interface Modbus RS232 or RS485 Modbus Plus Proprietary Current Injection Physical Interface DNP 3.0 RS232 or RS485 2

9 Within this document, only DNP 3.0 protocol shall be covered in depth. Standard 10 Byte, INCOM Modbus, and Modbus Plus shall be explained superficially. If one would need to reference the specific details of Standard Ten Byte or INCOM protocols, please reference the engineering specifications concerning these topics in Appendix B of this document. 3

10 Section 2 - Communication Card Identification and Physical Port Characteristics The communication connector at the front of the unit (near the target LED s) communicates to the ECP or WIN ECP configuration program. This communication port is referred to as COM 0 and is common to both the TPU2000 and TPU2000R.The protocol emulated through this front port is an addressable emulation of STANDARD 10 BYTE PROTOCOL. With the addition of a communication card option, the unit emulates the protocols described in Table 1-1. The inclusion of optional communication boards enables the rear ports (as shown in Figure 2-2) of their respective units. DPU 2000 COM PORT 0 - STANDARD 10 BYTE C E STATUS XXXXX XX XXXX X XX XXXX X XXXXX TARGETS XX XXXXX XX X XX XXXX X XX XXXX X XX X X XX X XXXXX XXXXX XX XXXX X XX XXXX X XXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXX XX XXXX XXX XXXXX X XX XXXX XXX XXXX X XXXXX TPU 2000 STATUS TARGETS A XX XXXXX XX B XX XX XXXXX C XXXXXX N XXXX XXXX RST X XXXXXXX TPU 2000R Product Identification Label C E Figure 2-1. COM 0 Port Location AUX COM TPU 2000 Chassis (Rear View) Horizontal Mounting RS 232C Model xxxx ct xx pt xx Unit Identification Label Unit Identification Label Com 1 Com 2 Com 3 AUX COM Model xxxx ct xx pt xx TPU 2000R Chassis (Rear View) Horizontal Mounting Figure 2-2. Physical Optional Communication Card Port Locations The TPU2000 and TPU2000R differ in physical appearance. The communication cards inserted within the unit also differ in form, fit and construction. A typical TPU2000 and TPU2000R s communication card is illustrated in Figure 2-3 of this document. As shown, the TPU2000R has two physical interface connectors built onto the card. The form factor of these connectors are industry common DB 9 and PHOENIX 10 POSITION connectors. The PHOENIX 10 POSITION connector has a capacity to land two 18 wire gauge conductors at each position. The TPU2000 has the communication port connectors fixed as part of the chassis. The physical card slot for housing 4

11 the communication card is marked on the chassis as COM. The communication card mates with internal connectors allowing electrical and physical connections for the communication card and chassis mounted physical connectors. AUX/COM 3.0 AUX/COM TPU 2000 R COMMUNICATION CARD (TYPICAL) TPU 2000 COMMUNICATION CARD (TYPICAL) Figure 2-3. TPU2000 and TPU2000R Communication Cards The TPU2000 Communication card is housed within a removable chassis. The communication card mates with edge card connectors located at the front and bottom of the removable chassis. Figure 2-3 illustrates the mounting location of the TPU2000 Communication card. Figure 2-4 illustrates the communication port locations of the TPU2000, which may be configured to communicate with the protocols described in section 1 of this document. The TPU2000R mates with the unit s main board to enable/disable Com Ports 1,2,3,and AUX COM. The communication cards physical interfaces protrude through the sheet metal back plate housing of the unit and allow for access to the physical connection ports. Figure 2-5 illustrates the location of the communication board assembly. STATUS XXXXX XX XXXX X XX XXXX X XXXXX TARGETS XX XXXXX XX X XX XXXX X XX X X XX XXXX X XX X XXXXX XXXXX XX XXXX X XX XXXX X XXXXX XXXX X XXXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXX C E DPU 2000 TPU 2000 COMMUNICATION CARD XX XXXX XXX XXXXX X XX XXXX XXX XXXX X XXXXX AUX/COM 3.0 TPU 2000 ( FRONT VIEW) Card Cage Cover COM I/O AUX TPU 2000 Draw Out Chassis (SIDE VIEW) Draw Out Case ( Rear View) TPU 2000 Figure 2-4. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU2000 5

12 TPU 2000R COMMUNICATION CARD AUX/COM 3.0 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION LABELS TPU 2000R TPU 2000R DRAW OUT CHASSIS SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW Figure 2-5. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU2000R CAUTION: REMOVAL OF THE DRAW OUT CHASSIS COMPONENTS WILL DE-ENERGIZE THE ELECTRONICS OF THE UNIT THEREBY PREVENTING SYSTEM PROTECTION. EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN REMOVING THE ELECTRONIC DRAWER. FROM THE CHASSIS SINCE ALL PROTECTIVE RELAY FUNCTIONALITY WILL BE TERMINATED. CAUTION: IF THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER- THE CT s ARE SHORTED INTERNALLY THROUGH THE CHASSIS INERTNAL CONNECTORS. HOWEVER, EXTREME CAUTION MUST BE EXERCIZED WHEN REMOVING THE DRAW OUT CASE FROM AN ENERGIZED UNIT. ABB TAKES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTIONS RESULTING FROM AVOIDANCE OF THIS WARNING AND CAUTION NOTICE. CAUTION: SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE TPU 2000 AND TPU 2000R UNITS. THE INDIVIDUAL REMOVING THE COMPONENT BOARDS FROM THE FIXED CHASSIS MUST BE GROUNDED TO THE SAME POTENTIAL AS THE UNIT. IF THE OPERATOR AND THE CASE ARE NOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME GROUND POTENTIAL, STATIC ELECTRICITY MAY BE CONDUCTED FROM THE OPERATOR TO THE INTERNAL COMPONENTS RESULTING IN DAMAGE TO THE UNIT. Communication Card Part Number Options The TPU2000 and TPU2000R may be ordered with a variety of communication options as listed in Table 2-1. The communication option card installed in the unit is identified by the part number located on the unit or identified through the ECP, WIN ECP or Front Panel (LCD) interfaces. The protocols available are: q q STANDARD TEN BYTE This is an ABB specific ASCII encoded (asynchronous) 10 byte communication protocol. It allows attainment of all relay parameters. It is the base unit protocol in which configuration programs such as ECP, and WinECP communicate to the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. It is the protocol standard for the COM 0 communication port of the TPU2000 and TPU2000R. Standard 10 Byte does not utilize a proprietary hardware physical interface. Appendix B includes the TPU2000 and TPU2000R Standard 10 Byte Protocol Document. INCOM This is an ABB Specific bit oriented (synchronous) protocol. INCOM uses the same commands as Standard Ten Byte, but its inherent bandwidth utilization is far greater than Standard Ten Byte is in that no data encoding is required. INCOM only defined two baud rates 9600 and INCOM is a proprietary interface in that its physical presentation to the communication medium is dependent upon the baud rate selected Baud uses current injection baseband signal presentation, whereas 9600-Baud implements a phase shift frequency in its representation of digital 1 6

13 and 0 values. Appendix B includes the TPU2000 and TPU2000R Standard Ten Byte Protocol document which describes INCOM in further detail. q q q q q DNP 3.0 This is a Utility industry standard protocol allowing communication between a host and slave devices. DNP 3.0 is a byte oriented (asynchronous) protocol which is physical interface device independent. The protocol allows for time synchronization, and unsolicited event reporting. It is a very popular protocol in utility installations. The discussion of DNP 3.0 protocol is included in this document. SPACOM This is an ABB Specific byte oriented (asynchronous) protocol common in Europe. It is a Master-Slave protocol which is implemented on a variety of physical interfaces. SPACOM protocol is not covered within this document. MODBUS This is an Industrial standard. The protocol allows a single master device to communicate with several slave devices. It has gained wide acceptance in that a great majority of utility devices incorporate Modbus protocol. Modbus Protocol is physical interface independent. Modbus Protocol has two emulation s RTU (a synchronous bit oriented emulation) and ASCII (an asynchronous byte oriented emulation). The TPU2000 and TPU2000R may be configured for both emulations. The discussion of Modbus protocol is included in this document. Please reference the TPU2000 and TPU2000R Modbus/Modbus Plus Automation Technical Guide TG for a discussion of this protocol. MODBUS PLUS This protocol is also and industrial standard. Modbus Plus allows up to 64 devices to communicate among each using token passing techniques. The Modbus Plus protocol is fast (1 megabaud) and uses several advanced techniques to maximize bandwidth. The physical interface to Modbus Plus is proprietary and regulated by Groupe Schneider. Modbus Plus is the incorporation of Modbus commands on a HDLC - like protocol using a current injection interface. The discussion of Modbus Plus protocol is not included in this document. Please reference the TPU2000 and TPU2000R Modbus/Modbus Plus Automation Technical Guide TG for a discussion of this protocol. (AVAILABLE ON THE TPU2000R ONLY). PG&E This protocol is a bit oriented asynchronous protocol allowing a Master Device to communicate with several slave devices. PG&E protocol is a Utility protocol. The protocol is not described in this document (AVAILABLE ON THE TPU2000R ONLY). The device configuration for the TPU2000 is illustrated in Tables 2-1 and 2-2 illustrating the configuration options. The generic part number for the TPU2000 is 488 M R X D C Z SSS Q Deciphering the part numbers: found on the labels of the unit or obtained through ECP or the FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE, allows easy identification of the communication options found on the unit. Table 2-1. TPU2000 Communication Options IF PART NUMBER POSITION Z IS THE TPU2000 HAS AN INSTALLED OPTION For unit 488 M R X D C Z SSS Q (COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION) 1 RS232 (COM 3) Isolated Port Enabled 2 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) and RS 232 (COM 3) Ports Enabled. 3 INCOM (AUX COM PORT). Enabled 4 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports Enabled. IF PART NUMBER POSITION Q IS THE TPU2000 HAS AN INSTALLED OPTION For unit 488 M R X D C Z SSS Q (COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION) 0 STANDARD TEN BYTE 1 DNP SPACOM 4 MODBUS 7

14 Table 2-2. TPU2000 Communication Card Matrix for Unit 488 M R X D C Z SSS Q Q Digit COM 3 AUX COM RS485 INCOM IRIG B 1 0 Standard 10 Byte RS Standard 10 Byte Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE RS Standard 10 Byte or DNP 3.0 RS232 Standard 10 Byte or DNP Standard 10 Byte SPACOM RS Standard 10 Byte or Modbus RS232 Standard 10 Byte or Modbus AVAILABLE 3 0 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE 4 0 Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE AVAILABLE 4 1 DNP 3.0 AVAILABLE 4 2 SPACOM 4 4 Modbus AVAILABLE AVAILABLE 5 0 Standard 10 Byte The device configuration for the TPU2000R is illustrated in Tables 2-3 and 2-4 illustrating the configuration options. The generic part number for the TPU2000 is 588 X X X Y Z X X X X Q. Deciphering the part numbers: found on the labels of the unit or obtained through ECP or the FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE, allows easy identification of the communication options found on the unit. Table 2-3. TPU2000R Communication Options IF PART NUMBER POSITION Y IS THE TPU2000R HAS AN INSTALLED OPTION For unit 588 X X X Y Z X X X X Q (X = Don t Care) (FRONT PANEL INTERFACE OPTION) 0 Horizontal Unit Mounting NO FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE 1 Horizontal Unit Mounting FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE IS INCLUDED 5 Vertical Unit Mounting NO FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE 6 Vertical Unit Mounting FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE IS INCLUDED IF PART NUMBER POSITION Z IS THE TPU2000R HAS AN INSTALLED OPTION For unit 588 X X X Y Z X X X X Q ( X = Don t Care) (COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION) 0 RS232 (COM 1) Non-isolated Port is active on the unit.. 1 RS232 (COM 2) Isolated Port Only is active on the unit (SEE NOTE). 2 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) and RS232 (COM 3) Ports on Option Card. 3 INCOM (AUX COM PORT) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports on Option Card. 4 INCOM (AUX COM PORT) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports on Option Card. 5 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Port On Option Card. 6 Modbus Plus Port (COM 3) on the Option Card. 7 Modbus Plus (COM 3) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) on the Option Card. 8 RS485 (COM 3) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports on the Option Card. NOTE: * = If the option denoted in part number position Y is a 0 or 5, the COM 2 port is enabled, If the option denoted in part number position Y is a 2 or 6 the COM 2 Port is disabled. IF PART NUMBER POSITION Q IS THE TPU2000R HAS AN INSTALLED OPTION For unit 588 X X X Y Z X X X X Q (X = Don t Care) (COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION) 8

15 0 STANDARD TEN BYTE 1 DNP SPACOM 3 PG&E 4 MODBUS /Modbus Plus(Depending on hardware interface selected in Position Z) Table 2-4. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit 588 X X X Y Z X X X X Q Z Q COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 AUX COM INCOM IRIG B Digit Digit RS232 RS232 RS Note 1 Standard 10 Byte 1 0 Note 1 Standard 10 Byte RS Note 1 Standard 10 Byte Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE RS Note 1 Standard 10 Byte or DNP 3.0 RS232 Standard 10 Byte or DNP Note 1 Standard 10 Byte SPACOM RS Note 1 Standard 10 Byte Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE or Modbus RS232 or Modbus 3 0 Note 1 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE 4 0 Note 1 Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE AVAILABLE 4 1 Note 1 DNP 3.0 AVAILABLE 4 2 Note 1 SPACOM 4 4 Note 1 Modbus AVAILABLE AVAILABLE 5 0 Note 1 Standard 10 Byte 6 4 Note 1 Standard Modbus Plus 10 Byte 7 4 Note 1 Modbus Plus Standard 10 Byte 8 0 Note 1 Standard 10 Byte Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE RS Note 1 Standard 10 Byte or DNP 3.0 RS485 Standard 10 Byte or DNP Note 1 Standard 10 Byte or Modbus RS 485 Standard 10 Byte or Modbus AVAILABLE NOTE 1- Available if Digit Y is 0 or 5. Front Panel Interface not included. Unavailable if Digit Y is 1 or 6. The visual identification of a TPU2000R communication card is completed through visual inspection of the card component location and of the part number of the base printed circuit board as illustrated in Table 2. Table 2-5. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit 588 X X X Y Z X X X X Q Z Raw Circuit Board Part Digit Number 1 COMM 485 PCB REV R AUX COM REV0 3 AUX COM REV0 4 AUX COM REV0 5 COMM 485 PCB REV0 Components To Look For Parts near black 9 pin 232 connector are populated Parts in middle of board are not populated -2 DC/DC Converters (U1 & U8) Only parts in middle of board - no DC/DC Converters, has Transformer T2 Parts near black 9 pin 232 connector are not populated - only 1 DC/DC Converter (U1) Parts near green connector are populated 9

16 6 MODBUS COMM PCB REV1 7 MODBUS COMM PCB REV1 8 AUX & AUX REV0 RS-485 option parts NOT populated (area inside dotted border) Fully populated Fully populated Unit Communication Card Verification There are several ways to identify the communication cards inserted in the TPU2000 or TPU2000R units. Some of the methods require the unit to be powered up. Other methods require the unit to be taken out of service. To identify the unit part number of the present TPU2000 or TPU2000R, the following steps may be executed to facilitate unit identification. 1. With the unit energized: q If the unit has a Front Panel LCD (Refer to Tables 2-1 through 2-4 inclusive for identification) Interface 1. Depress the E Key. 2. Depress the Arrow Down Key once to highlight the SETTINGS field. Depress the E Key. 3. Depress the Arrow Down Key twice to highlight the UNIT INFORMATION field. Depress the E key. 4. The Serial Number and Catalog Number shall be displayed. Fill in Table 1 with the required data. q If the Unit does not have a Front Panel LCD Interface (Refer to Tables 2-1 through 2-4 inclusive for identification) and the user has DOS ECP or if the user wishes not to use the unit s Front Panel LCD Interface. 1. Start ECP. 2. Select the appropriate communication parameters so that the personal computer attached to the TPU2000 or TPU2000(R) will communicate via the null modem cable connection. ( See Figures 4-1 and 4-2 in Section 4 ) 3. Depress enter to allow attachment of the unit. 4. The Serial Number and Catalog Number shall be displayed. Fill in Table 1 with the required data. q If the Unit does not have a Front Panel LCD (Refer to Tables 2-1 through 2-4 inclusive for identification) Interface and the user has WIN ECP or if the user wishes not to use the unit s Front Panel Interface. 1. Start WIN ECP. 2. Depress the DIRECT ACCESS selection button presented in the pop-up window. 3. Depress the CONNECT option selection presented within the pop-up window. 4. Select the HELP menu option at the top right-hand section of the menu bar. 5. Select the Drag-Down menu item UNIT INFORMATION. 6. A pop-up window shall appear with the Serial Number and Catalog Number. Fill in Table 1 with the required data. 2. At the back of the TPU2000 or the TPU2000R chassis, in the left-hand lower section of the unit, a label shall appear indicating the serial number and model number of the unit. It should match the data presented in the ECP, WIN ECP or Front Panel Interface (FPI) menus. If it does not, please contact the factory. 3. As a final check, if the TPU2000 or TPU2000R can be powered-down or if protection can be interrupted, loosen the front panel screws at the front of the unit. Remove the product component drawer from the chassis. Face the front panel interface, and rotate the board so that the semiconductor components are directly visible. On the backside of the metal panel supporting the Front Panel Interface, a label shall be 10

17 available indicating the serial number and model number. These numbers should match those obtained in steps 1 and 2. If they do not, please contact the factory. 11

18 Section 3 - TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Connectivity Communication between devices is only possible through connectivity of the units through a physical media interface. There are two physical interface types on a TPU2000R and a TPU2000. Those physical interfaces are: q q RS232 (isolated and non-isolated) RS485 (isolated). Table 3-1 lists the characteristics for each of the port types. Table 3-1. Physical Interface Options COM 0 COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 AUX COM TPU2000R TPU2000 Notes RS232 NON RS232 ISOLATED Front Port Standard 10 Byte ISOLATED RS232 NON Standard 10 Byte Only ISOLATED RS232 NON Standard 10 Byte Only ISOLATED RS232 Isolated/RS485 RS232 Isolated Isolated or Modbus Plus RS 485 (Isolated) and/or INCOM RS485 (Isolated) and/or INCOM TPU2000R Communication Option Card Determines Physical Interface Physical Interface Dependent on Communication Option Card Interface Selected RS232 Interface Connectivity RS232 is perhaps the most utilized and least understood communication interface in use. RS232 is sometimes misinterpreted to be a protocol; it is in fact a physical interface. A physical interface is the hardware and network physical media used to propagate a signal between devices. Examples of physical interfaces are RS232 serial link, printer parallel port, current loop, V. 24, IEEE Bus Examples of network media are, twisted copper pair, coaxial cable, free air RS232 gained widespread acceptance due to its ability to connect to another RS232 device or modem. A modem is a device, which takes a communication signal and modulates it into another form. Common forms of modems include telephone, fiber optic, microwave, and radio frequency. Modem connectivity allows attachment of multiple devices on a communication network or allows extension of communication distances in a network with two nodes. Physical connection of two devices or more than two devices require differing approaches. Figure 3-1 illustrates a topology using two devices (point to point topology). Figure 3-2 illustrates a multi-drop topology between many nodes. RS232 was designed to allow two devices to communicate without using intermediate devices. Port Isolation Network installation within a substation requires special considerations. A substation environment is harsh in that high levels of electromagnetic interference are present. Additional ground currents are present in such installations. RS232 is an unbalanced network in that all signals are referenced to a common ground. On longer cable runs, the potential of the signals at the sending device can be significantly lower than at the receiving end due to electrical interference and induced ground current. This increases with long runs of cable and use of unshielded cable. ABB s Substation Automation and Protection Division recommends the length of RS232 cable be less than 10 feet (3 meters) for an un-isolated port and that the cable be shielded. Internal to a typical device, the RS 232 transceivers are referenced to the electronic components internal ground. Any electrical interference could be coupled through the chip set and fed back to the device. Typical isolation ratings of a non-isolated port could be as low as 1 volt. Such a port could allow electrical feedback of noise to the electronics for any signal interference over 1 volt. 12

19 Coms 0 through 2 on DPU/TPU/GPU units are non isolated. However an RS232 implementation on Com 3 uses opto-isolation technology which increases electrical isolation from the port to the devices internal circuitry to 2.3 kv. It is highly desirable to utilize this port in connection to devices in longer cable runs and dedicated communication networks. RS232 isolated ports are limited in connection distance for a maximum of fifty feet. Point to Point Topology Personal Computer WINECP or ECP Software Com 0 EC RS 232 Handshaking Defined TPU 2000R Figure 3-1. Point to Point Architecture Using RS232 Handshaking is the ability of the device to control the flow of data between devices. There are two types of handshaking, hardware and software. Hardware handshaking involves the manipulation of the RTS (Request to Send) and CTS (Clear to Send) card control signal lines allowing data communication direction and data flow rates to be controlled by the DTE device. Also the flow is controlled by the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal which allows the DCE operation. Software handshaking involves the data flow control by sending specific characters in the data streams. To enable transmission, the XON character is transmitted. To disable reception of data, the transmitting device sends an XOFF character. If the XOFF character is imbedded within the data stream as information, the receiving node automatically turns off. This is the main weakness of software handshaking, inadvertent operation due to control characters being imbedded within data streams. Software handshaking is usually used in printer control. The DPU/TPU/GPU devices do not incorporate handshaking, therefore, the control lines may be ignored as illustrated in Figure 3-3. However, some PC software utilizes handshaking, thus the port on the personal computer may require a special hardware configuration of the cable to the port. Consult with the software vendor to determine RS232 control and buffering requirements and the need for signal jumpers required in RS232 cabling. The ports on the DPU/TPU.GPU have been tested for operation up to a speed of 19,200 baud. 19,200 baud is the typical data rate applicable for the operation of an asynchronous communication connection over RS232 without the use of additional timing lines. 13

20 Figu re 2. M u lt i-d ro p To p olog y Ho st Executing HM I So ftw ar e or ECP or WIN ECP The Cloud. TPU 2000R TPU 2000R C E C E STA TUS C E RS 232 Cable Connectivity TPU 2000 Figure 3-2. Multi-Drop Topology Using RS232 A cable diagram is illustrated in Figure 3-3 and 3-4. Figure 3-3 shows the direction of communication signal transmission and the gender of the connectors used in constructing a communication cable. Protective Relay PC 2 Receive Data 2 Transmit Data 3 Transmit Data 3 Receive Data 5 DTE Ground 5 Ground 1 Data Carrier Detect 6 Data Set Ready 4 Data Terminal Ready 7 Request To Send 8 Clear To Send -No connection 9 Ring Indicator 9 pin D shell Male Connector DTE 9 pin D shell Female Connector Figure 3-3. DPU2000(R), TPU2000(R), or GPU2000R to PC Cable 9 to 9 Pin-out A RS232 interface was designed to simplify the interconnection of devices. Definition of terms may demystify issues concerning RS232 interconnection. Two types of RS232 devices are available, DTE and DCE. DTE stands for Data Terminal Equipment whereas DCE stands for Data Communication Equipment. These definitions categorize whether the device originates/receives the data (DTE) or electrically modifies and transfers data from location to location (DCE). Personal Computers are generally DTE devices while line drivers/ modems/ converters are DCE devices. DPU/TPU/GPU devices have RS232 DTE implementation. Generally, with a few exceptions, a straight through cable (a cable with each pin being passed through the cable without jumping or modification) will allow a DTE device to communicate to a DCE device. If one wishes to install modem connectivity between a host device and a TPU2000 or TPU2000R, please consult the modem application note presented in APPENDIX F of this document. Connection of a PC to a TPU2000 or TPU2000R requires cable modification since the interconnected devices are both DTE. The same cabling would be utilized if one would connect two DCE devices. The classifications of DTE/DCE devices allow the implementers to determine which device generates the signal and which device receives the signal. Studying Figure 3-3, Pins 2 and 3 are data signals, pin 5 is ground whereas pins 1,6,7,8,9 14

21 are control signals. The arrows illustrate signal direction in a DTE device. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R series of protective devices do not incorporate hardware or software handshaking. If a host device has an RS232 physical interface with a DB 25 connector, reference Figure 3-5 for the correct wiring interconnection. Protective Relay 2 Receive Data 3 Transmit Data 3 Transmit Data 2 Receive Data 5 Ground 5 Ground 8 Data Carrier Detect 6 Data Set Ready 20 Data Terminal Ready 4 Request To Send 5 Clear To Send -No connection22 Ring Indicator PC DTE 9 pin D shell Male Connector DTE 25 pin D shell Male Connector Figure 3-4. Connection of a DB 25 Connector to a TPU2000 or TPU2000R RS485 Device Connectivity With the TPU2000 and TPU2000R RS485 is one of the more popular physical interfaces in use today. It was developed as an enhancement of the RS422 physical interface. Its inherent strength is its ability to transmit a message over a twisted pair copper medium of 3000 feet in length. An RS485 interface is able to transmit and receive a message over such a distance because it is a balanced interface. That is, it does not reference the signal to the system s electrical ground, as is the case in an RS232 interface. RS485 references the communication voltage levels to a pair of wires isolated from system ground. Depending on the manufacturer s implementation, isolation may be optical or electronic. RS485 has two variants, two wires and four wire. In the two wire format, communication occurs over one single wire pair. In four-wire format, communication occurs over two wire pairs, transmit and receive. The two-wire format is the most common in use. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R supports half duplex two-wire format only. The RS 485 port is also optically isolated to provide for 3000 V of isolation. The RS485 network supported and recommended by ABB requires the use of three conductor shielded cable. Suggested RS485 cable and the respective manufacturer s wire numbers are: ALPHA Belden 9729 Belden 9829 Carol ABB does not support deviations from the specified cables. The selected cable types listed are of the type which have the appropriate physical and electrical characteristics for installation in substation environments. A multi-drop RS 485 connection is illustrated in Figure 3-6. Three wires, Positive (Terminal 9), Negative (Terminal 8) and Ground (Terminal 10). RS485 requires a termination resistor at each end of the communication cable. The resistance shall be from 90 to 120 ohms. Additionally, depending upon the RS485 physical interface converter used, a pull-up and pull-down resistor may be added to bias the line to decrease the amount of induced noise coupled onto the line when no communications are occurring. Internal to the TPU2000 AND TPU2000R are jumpers which when inserted in the proper position (as referenced in Figure 3), bias the line by inserting the proper pull-up, pull-down, and termination resistors. To configure the Jumpers J6, J7, and J8, execute the following procedure: 15

22 Face the front of the TPU2000 and TPU2000R and loosen the two knurled screws at the front of the unit. Grasp the two handles at the front of the unit and pull it towards you. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R has make before break contacts in the CT connectors. Powering down the unit need not be done when performing this step. Refer to Figure 3-5 illustrating the placement of J6, J7 and J8. J6 inserts a 120 ohm resistor between transmit and receive lines. J7 and J8 inserts a pull-up and pull-down resistor. The IN position inserts the associated resistor in to the circuit. The OUT position removes the resistor from the circuit. Insert the TPU2000 or TPU2000R unit into the chassis. Tighten the knurled screws at the front of the unit. IT IS advisable to place a sticker on the front of TPU2000 or TPU2000R indicating that it is a terminated end of line unit. Cable B RS 485 Connection Shield is Frame Grounded at one point Shield is isolated TX + RX + TX - RX - GND *Note - Reference the Topology Drawing for Termination configuration if internal or external termination is selected. *See Note RS 485 Isolated Port 3 Shield Isolated RS 485 Isolated Port Shield is isolated RS 485 Isolated Port End Unit Inline Unit End Unit Figure 3-5. RS485 2 Wire Connection Diagram 16

23 Jumper J8 IN Jumper J6 IN Jumper J 7 IN + 5 V 470 Ohms TX/RX Ohms TX/RX Ohms * See Note A. Cable A See Attached Diagram Unicom Physical Interface Converter Switch Settings: - DTE - RS232-RS Baud - HD Three-wire cable with shield. Cable B - See Attached Diagram. * Note A - Following Cable Recommended Alpha # Belden # 9729, # 9829 Carol #58902 Jumper J8 Out TX/RX Ohms Jumper J6 IN TX/RX - Jumper J 7 Out EC EC EC EC Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 31 Unit 32 End Unit Inline Unit Jumpers J6, J7, J8 Inline Unit End Unit OUT 32 Devices and 4000 Feet Maximum loading and distance. Figure 3-6. RS485 Terminator Resistor Resistor Diagram OUT IN OUT IN J7 J6 OUT IN OUT IN J17 J16 J8 Option 4 or 8 Board J18 Option 8 Board Jumper OUT Jumper IN Top View Component Location with Unit Removed From The Case ( Top View) Figure 3 7. Location of RS485 Resistor Configuration Jumpers in the TPU2000R The following example illustrates an interconnection of the TPU2000 and TPU2000R with a host device through a UNICOM physical interface connection using a 3-wire connection method. It should be noted that the RS485 design on ABB relay products incorporates isolation. That is, the RS485 ground is electrically isolated from the internal circuitry thereby assuring minimal interference from the extreme noise environments found in a substation. Care should be used when installing an RS485 communication network. The recommended configuration must be followed as shown in Figure 3. Jumpers J6, J7, and J8 should be inserted to provide termination and pull-up at the TPU2000 and TPU2000R end. Although not shown, a 120 ohm resistor should be inserted between the TX/RX + and TX/RX- pairs to provide for termination at the transmission end. 17

24 There are many manufacturers of RS232 to RS485 converters. Included in Appendicies D and E YYY are additional application notes for using TELEBYTE and B& B physical interface converters with ABB protective relays. Although many 232/485 converter devices operate well using DNP 3.0 and ABB relays, the appended application notes are intended to convey to the reader that knowledge of interconnecting devices is important when implementing various vendors equipment. The TPU2000R Type 8 card allows for an RS 485 connection on COM 3. ABB offers an accessory affording easy connection to a TPU2000R for an inline connection on an RS 485 network. The connector when attached to a COM 3 port on an TYPE 8 card converts the DB 9 female connector to a 9 conductor PHOENIX connector allowing easy connection to inline multidrop RS 485 nodes. Please contact your local ABB Distributor or Representative for additional product and pricing information. 18

25 Section 4 - TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Parameterization Establishing TPU2000 and TPU2000R communication depends upon correct parameterization of the communication menus within the unit. Parameterization may occur via the unit s front panel interface of through ECP (External Communication Program) or WIN ECP (WINdows External Communication Program). Modbus, Modbus Plus and DNP require certain parameterizations. Even COM 0 requires certain parameterization to communication with the configuration program. COM 0 Port (Front Port Configuration) In order to attach a configuration program to the TPU2000 or TPU2000R, the correct parameters must be set up within the unit. The supported parameters are listed in Table 4-1 below. The protocol for the unit is addressable Standard 10 Byte. To view the communication port parameters it is advised that they should be veiwed via the unit s front panel interface. If the TPU2000 or TPU2000R does not have a front panel interface, the parameters should be marked on the front panel sticker with the port s parameters. The keystrokes required for visualizing the communication port parameters from the metering display are: 1. Depress the E pushbutton. 2. Depress the key once to select the SETTINGS menu and then depress the E pushbutton. 3. Depress the E pushbutton to select the SHOW SETTINGS menu selection. 4. Depress the key six times to select the COMMUNICATIONS menu and then depress the E pushbutton. 5. Under the SHOW COM SETTINGS MENU, the following shall be displayed for the Front Panel RS232 port (FP). q q q Unit Node Address (Address displayed in HEX) FP RS232 Baud FP RS232 Frame Other parameters shall be shown. The parameters listed shall vary in accordance with the communication card inserted within the unit. However, the FP displayed parameters must match with the parameters configured in the Standard Ten Byte section of the ECP package. One may change parameters via the front panel interface. The selections for each parameter required in Front Panel Port configuration is shown in Table 4-1. Table 4-1. TPU2000 and TPU2000R Com Port 0 Front Panel Interface Parameters Option Selection Notes Unit Node Address 1 to FFF ( 1 = default setting) 1 to 2048 decimal node address FP RS232 Baud Selectable Baud Rates for the Standard Ten Byte Front Panel Port (default setting) FP RS232 Frame N 8 1 (default setting) No Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit N 8 2 No Parity 8 Data Bits 2 Stop Bits Modification of the Front Panel Parameter settings is accomplished via the following keystrokes: 1. From the metering menu depress the E key. 2. Depress the key once to select the SETTINGS menu and then depress the E pushbutton. 3. Depress the key once to select the SHOW SETTINGS menu selection. Depress the E pushbutton. 19

26 4. Depress the key seven times to select the COMMUNICATIONS menu and then depress the E pushbutton. 5. Enter the unit s password, one digit at a time. The default password is four spaces. Depress the E pushbutton once. 6. The CHANGE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS menu shall be displayed. With the cursor at the Unit Address field, depress E. The unit address can be modified. The address selected in this field will configure the address for the entire node. Use the and arrow keys to select the password digit entry. Use the and keys to select the digit to configure. Depress E to save the digits. Depress C to return to the root menu. 7. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the FRONT RS232 BAUD RATE menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the and keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 8. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the FRONT RS232 FRAME menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the and keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 9. To Save the selections configured in the previous steps depress the C pushbutton. A query will be presented to the operator Enter YES to save settings <NO>. Use the and keys to select the option YES and depress E to save the settings. If the unit does not have a front panel interface, it is advisable that the communication port parameters be marked on the front of the unit. If the parameters are not known, please contact ABB Technical Support to obtain the procedure to determine the parameters or take the unit out of service and reset the port parameters. Figure 4-1 illustrates the parameterization screen in WIN ECP which must be parameterized allowing communication between the configuration unit and the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. Figure 4-1. Initial WIN ECP Communication Configuration Screen A direct connect is selected in this instance allowing retrieval and configuration of the relay parameters. Once the OK button is depressed, the screen shown in Figure 4-1 is presented to the operator. 20

27 Figure 4-2. Communication Port Setup Screen The selections in WIN ECP are illustrated in Table 4-2. The settings must agree with those configured in the TPU2000 and TPU2000R. Table 4-2. WIN ECP Communication Port Settings COM PORT COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 COM 4 BAUD RATE 300 Personal Computer Port Selection for WINECP or ECP to TPU2000 and TPU2000R connection. Baud Rates Offered for TPU2000/2000R connection to the WIN ECP RS232 port connection (default setting) Frame None 8 1 (default setting) No Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit None 8 2 No Parity 8 Data Bits 2 Stop Bits Even 8 1 Even Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit Odd 8-1 Odd Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit Even 7-1 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit None 7 2 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 2 Stop Bits Odd 7-1 Odd Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit Unit Address 1 FFF ( 1 = Default) Unit Address in HEX NOTE : Bold indicates Selections Supported by WIN ECP and TPU2000/TPU2000R COM PORT 1 Option Settings (TPU2000R ONLY) [Catalog 588 XXX00-XXX0 or 588 XXX50-XXX0] If the unit does not have a front panel interface, the rear port is on the TPU2000R is active. The Configuration screens through WIN ECP are shown in Figure 4-3 for reference. The communication options may not be configured via the front panel interface since this port is only active if the unit does not have a front panel communication port interface (see Section 3 of this document for further information). The communication protocol supported on this port is Standard Ten Byte Only. Table 4-3 illustrates the port configuration options available for this COM PORT 1. Figure 4-3 illustrates the WIN ECP screen used to configure Communication Port 1 in the TPU2000R. 21

28 Table 4-3. COM PORT 1 and COM PORT 2 WIN ECP Port Settings Option Selection Notes BAUD RATE (default setting) Com Port Baud Rate Selections Via WIN ECP Frame None 8 1 (default setting) No Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit None 8 2 No Parity 8 Data Bits 2 Stop Bits Even 8 1 Even Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit Odd 8-1 Odd Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit Even 7-1 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit None 7 2 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 2 Stop Bits Odd 7-1 Odd Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit Figure 4-3. COM PORT 1 WIN ECP Setting Screen COM PORT 2 Option Settings (TPU2000R ONLY) Catalog 588 XXXX0-XXX0 or 588 XXXX6-XXX4] There are two option boards, which enable communication port 2 for the TPU2000R. Figure 4-4 illustrates the configuration screen for the COM PORT 2 options when viewed on WIN ECP. 22

29 COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 AUX. PORTS Figure 4-4. WIN ECP Com Port 2 Communication Screen The options for configuration are listed in Table 4-3. Com Port 3 and AUX COM Configuration The TPU2000 and TPU2000R share the same commonality in that two rear ports may be available depending upon the hardware inserted in the units. The configuration techniques vary in that the configuration depends upon the protocol included on the board itself. Figure 4-5 lists the combinations for the TPU2000R. Figure 4-6 lists the communication option combinations for the TPU2000. Some boards have the capability of IRIG B and or INCOM. The configuration of these options shall be covered in the following sections. REAR PORT ASSIGNMENTS 63 Catalog Number Select Option NON ISOLATED RS-232 NON ISOLATED RS-232 ISOLATED RS-232 unless noted RS-485 ISOLATED INCOM ISOLATED 64 IRI G- B With 587R041[ ] [ ] Display Without Display* 0 0 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte 1 0 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte 2 0 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte IRIG-B 2 1 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte DNP 3.0 DNP 3.0 ABB Ten Byte 2 4 ABB Ten Byte Modbus or ABB Ten Byte Modbus or ABB Ten Byte See Note # See Note # IRIG-B 3 0 ABB Ten Byte INCOM IRIG-B 4 0 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte INCOM IRIG-B 4 1 ABB Ten Byte DNP 3.0 INCOM 4 4 ABB Ten Byte Modbus INCOM IRIG-B 5 0 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte 6 4 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte Modbus Plus TM 7 4 ABB Ten Byte Modbus Plus TM ABB Ten Byte 8 0 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte (RS 485) ABB Ten Byte IRIG-B 8 1 ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte (RS 485) DNP 3.0 (RS 485) DNP 3.0 (RS 485) ABB Ten Byte (RS 485) 8 4 ABB Ten Byte Modbus or ABB Ten Byte Modbus or ABB Ten Byte (RS-485) See Note # See Note # IRIG-B Figure 4-5. TPU 2000R Communication Capability Chart. 23

30 487V Modbus or Standard RS 485 Modbus or Standard IRIG B Figure 4-6. TPU 2000 Communication Capability Chart DNP 3.0 Configuration of COM 3 and AUX COM PORT The TPU2000R and TPU2000 allow one of the available communication ports to be configured as DNP 3.0. If the unit has more than one port, it is configured as Standard Ten Byte. The configuration parameters supported for Baud Rate and Frame configuration as listed in Table 4-6. Table 4-4. Valid Parameter Selections for Standard Ten Byte and DNP 3.0 Protocols PROTOCOL BAUD RATE SELECTIONS FRAME SELECTIONS SELECTED DNP ,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, Even Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits No Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bit Odd Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits No Parity, 8 Data Bits, Two Stop Bit Standard Ten Byte 300,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, Odd Parity, 7 Data Bits, One Stop Bit Odd Parity, 7 Data Bits, Two Stop Bits Even Parity, 7 Data Bits, One Stop Bit Even Parity, 7 Data Bits, Two Stop Bits Even Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits No Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bit Odd Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits No Parity, 8 Data Bits, Two Stop Bit TPU2000 and TPU2000R Parameters and Mode Parameters must be configured correctly to allow communication with a host unit connected with it. The host parameters must match with the DNP 3.0 parameters configured in the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. Failure to do so will result in erratic or no communication between the host device and the attached nodes. The definition of the parameters follows: Parameter 1" is the inter-character gap timeout in milli-seconds. Must be greater than 0 and less than 255 milliseconds. If the default value of zero is specified for this parameter, then a value of 10 milli-seconds is used. If an inter-character gap timeout occurs during a frame read, then the frame will be deemed corrupted, and discarded. This timeout value must be large enough to accommodate the maximum expected inter-character delays generated by the host computer, yet as small as possible to maximize throughput. "Parameter 2" is the data link layer primary timeout in deci-seconds (tenth s of seconds). This timeout is activated whenever the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is acting as a DLC primary, i.e. when the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is transmitting a data frame with a DLC confirm or the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is transmitting a reset link frame. The timeout is not used for unconfirmed data frames or when the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is acting as secondary and transmitting ACK, NACK, or other secondary frames. If this parameter is set to the default value of zero, then 24

31 a timeout value of 100 (1 second) is used. This parameter is also used to set the upper limit of the delay used for collision recovery. If a collision is detected, i.e. data is received from the RS485 line at the time the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is prepared to transmit, then the TPU2000 or TPU2000R will delay for some random period of time less than or equal to the primary timeout value specified by this parameter. The seed of the random number generator used to randomize the collision delay is set to the unit address, so that probability of collisions with other TPU2000 or TPU2000R s on the same RS485 line will be reduced. "Parameter 3" is the number of data link layer primary retries. Can range from 0 through 255. Default is zero which eliminates retries, regardless of the setting of "Parameter 2". "Parameter 4" is the minimum delay in milli-seconds after frame receive before a data link level frame can be transmitted. If this parameter is set to the default value of zero then a delay of 30 milli-seconds is used. This value must be increased to at least 200 milli-seconds when the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is being used with the Applied Systems Engineering DNP test set on the IBM PC. Failure to increase this timeout will cause the DNP test set to ignore part or all of transmissions from the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. "Parameter 5, 6, 7, and 8" specify which points are to be included in a class scans. The full set of points is divided into several groups and the operator can specify from the front panel which of the groups are to be activated so that they will be returned when the host asks for a class data scan. The default values, zero for all of these parameter bytes, causes only group zero to be returned for all class scans. To force all scan groups to be returned parameters 5, 6, 7, and 8 should be set to 254, and 255 respectively. These parameters disable data return only for class scans (any class, 0 or integrity, 1, 2, or 3). All of the defined points are accessible via a read command without regard to the settings of parameter bytes 5, 6, 7, and 8. Reference Section 5 for examples for parameterizing the GROUPS for Class scans. "Parameter 9 has a default value of zero. This parameter can be used to specify the frequency in minutes (0 to 255) that the relay will set the time synchronization required from master bit. Normally, (with the default value) this occurs every 60 minutes after a time synch is received from the master. This bit is initially set one minute after a System Reset. NOTE THAT in order for the Time Synchronization feature to operate, the IRIB B selection illustrated in Figures 4-3 or 4-4, or configurable via the Front Panel Interface must be set to a value of ENABLED CC or ENABLED MMM. Please reference the Time Synchronization section in Section 5 of this document. "Parameter 10" is presently reserved for use by ABB and should be left at the default value of 0. The group designation for binary inputs, counters, and analog inputs is given in the point list below and listed under the column heading Scan Type. Use the designated Parameter Value to disable group zero output, or enable output of any of the other groups for a class scan. Since the front panel operator interface takes the input in decimal, add the parameter values together to enable multiple groups in one parameter byte. The mapping of the parameter bytes is as follows: Table 4-5. Class Masking Table for DNP 3.0 Group Number (Scan Type) Parameter Byte Parameter Value (Except for group 0, set to enable) (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)

32 "Mode Parameter 1" indicates data link layer confirms. If value is not zero then confirmation at the data link layer is enabled. This means that "User Data With Confirm" and ACK will be used for all user data transmissions from the TPU2000 or TPU2000R to the host. If this parameter is set to the default value of disabled then "Unconfirmed User Data" frames will be used for all user data transmissions to the host. "Mode Parameter 2" indicates application level confirms. If the value is not zero then confirmation at the application layer is enabled. This means that the "CON" confirmation bit will be set in the application control byte of all response headers sent by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R to the host. The host is expected to respond with application level confirmation messages. Application level retries by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R are not supported and no retry attempts will be made if the host does not respond with a confirmation frame. If the host does not respond with a confirmation frame as expected, no special action is taken, i.e., the lack of a user level confirmation is ignored by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. Note that this also means the event is not cleared from TPU storage, and will be transmitted again upon receipt of another event scan or read operation. If this parameter is set to the default value of disabled, then the "CON" confirmation bit will not be set in the application control byte of response headers sent by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R to the host and no confirmation frames will be expected from the host. In this case, events are cleared from TPU storage upon transmission, and may potentially be lost due to transmission errors. "Mode Parameter 3" indicates protocol selection for the serial ports. If the value is zero or disabled then the RS232 port uses the INCOM 10 byte ASCII protocol and the RS485 port uses DNP 3.0 protocol. If the mode parameter 3 value is one or enabled then the protocol selections for each port are swapped are reversed. Mode Parameter 4" indicates RTS/CTS handshaking for the RS232 serial port. This parameter is ignored unless protocol the relay contains a communications card with both RS232 and RS485 ports. If disabled this parameter causes the RS232 port to be set for constant carrier. Enabling this parameter enables RST/CTS handshaking. Presently handskaking via leased line modems is only supported by the DNP 3.0 protocol. "Mode Parameter 5 enables/disables automatic resetting of sealed-in binary points, once their corresponding DNP events have been reported. The default value of Disable prevents them from being reset, until explicitly requested via either a control request from the DNP Binary Control point 26, or the ECP program, or a System Reset. Mode Parameter 6 enables/disables the analog CLASS 3 data transfer mechanism in the TPU. This feature allows the User Definable Register information, on a register by register reporting basis to be returned on a times 26

33 interval via an Object 60 request. This allows for improved throughput. Please reference Section 5 for complete configuration information. Mode Parameters 7 and 8" are presently reserved for use by ABB and should be left at their default values of Disable. The communication ports for DNP 3.0 may be configured via WIN ECP. The configuration screens appear the same as shown in Figure 4-7 above. The DNP 3.0 configuration procedure if one is to perform the steps through the Front Panel Interface is listed as such: Modification of the Front Panel Parameter settings is accomplished via the following keystrokes: 1. From the metering screen depress the E key. 2. Depress the key once to select the SETTINGS menu and then depress the E pushbutton. 3. Depress the key once to select the CHANGE SETTINGS menu selection. Depress the E pushbutton. 4. Depress the key seven times to select the COMMUNICATIONS menu and then depress the E pushbutton. 5. Enter the unit s password, one digit at a time. The default password is four spaces. Depress the E pushbutton once. 6. The CHANGE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS menu shall be displayed. With the cursor at the Unit Address field, depress E. The unit address can be modified. The address selected in this field will configure the address for the entire node. Use the and arrow keys to select the password digit entry. Use the and keys to select the digit to configure. Depress E to save the digits. Depress C to return to the root menu. 7. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key four times to select the RP RS232 BAUD RATE (SEE NOTE 1) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the and keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 8. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the RP RS232 FRAME (SEE NOTE 2) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the and keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 9. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the RP RS485 BAUD RATE (SEE NOTE 3) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the and keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 10. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the RP RS485 FRAME (SEE NOTE 4) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the and keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 11. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the RP IRIG B selection. IRIG B is not supported via DNP 3.0. If this selection is enabled, the unit shall allow time synchronization via the DNP 3.0 Network. Please refer to Section 5 to review TIME SYNCHRONIZATION procedures via DNP Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 1 (Inter Character Gap Timeout) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 1 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 13. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 2 (Data Link Layer Timeout) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 2 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 14. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 3 (Data Link Primary Retries) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 3 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 15. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 4 (Transmit Delay) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the 27

34 and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 4 as described above.. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 16. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 5 (CLASS SCAN MASK) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 5 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 17. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 6 (CLASS SCAN MASK) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 6 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 18. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 7 (CLASS SCAN MASK) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 7 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 19. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 8 (CLASS SCAN MASK) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 8 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 20. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the PARAMETER 9 (Time Synchronization Frequency Request) menu and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 9 as described above.. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 21. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key one time to select the MODE PARAMETER 1 menu item (DATA LINK LAYER CONFIRM WITH ACK) and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field are enable and disable.. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 1 as described above.. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 22. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 2 (APPLICATION LAYER LEVEL WITH ACK CONFIRM) menu item and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field are enable and disable. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 2 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 23. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 3 (SET RS232 PORT TO DNP 3.0) menu item and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field are enable and disable. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 3 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 24. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 4 (ENABLE RTS/CTS HANDSHAKING) menu item and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field are enable and disable. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 4 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 25. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 5 (AUTO RESET OF SEALED POINTS ON A READ) menu item and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field are enable and disable. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 5 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. 26. Once returned to the main menu, depress the key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 6 (CLASS 3 TIMED ANALOG UPDATE MECHANISM) menu item and then depress the E pushbutton. The selections for this field are enable and disable. Use the and keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 6 as described above. Depress E to select the entry. Depress C to return to the root menu. Reference Section 5 for complete Communication Setting Miscellaneous Setting information to completely configure this feature. The Miscellaneous settings cannot be set via the Front Panel Interface and must be accomplished via WIN ECP. 27. To Save the selections configured in the previous steps depress the C pushbutton. A query will be presented to the operator Enter YES to save settings <NO>. Use the and keys to select the option YES and depress E to save the settings. NOTE 1: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified as: RS485 1 Baud. If the hardware does not support COM 3, this query shall be omitted. 28

35 NOTE 2: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified as RS485 1 Frame. If the hardware does not support COM 3, this query shall be omitted NOTE 3: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified to RS485-2 Baud. NOTE 4: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified to RS485 2 Frame. 29

36 Section 5 - DNP 3.0 Profile Description The TPU2000 and TPU2000R has been one of the first IED s incorporating DNP 3.0 in their protective relay. Although the DNP implementation is not specifically Level II, it incorporates LEVEL I, LEVEL II, and LEVEL III commands. DNP 3.0 in the TPU2000 and TPU2000R is a robust implementation allowing the following capabilities: q Acquisition of Metering Data q Contact Test Functionality q Forcing Capabilities q Status Reporting of Point Force/Unforce Status q Function Status Reporting q Counter Acquisition q Fault Record Reporting q Operation(Event) Record Reporting q Alarm Reporting q User Register Group Reporting q Class Data Reporting q Class Point Masking q Function Enabled Status Reporting q Time Synchronization Through DNP 3.0 The TPU2000 and TPU2000R does not support Unsolicited Response (or Report By Exception as referred to by some). This new DNP 3.0 Profile document lists the supported commands in a format more conducive to that specified in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. It is recommended that the reader consult the text titled: GE HARRIS DISTRIBUTED NETWORK PROTOCOL DNP 3.0 BASIC 4 DOCUMENT SET Part Number dated July 30, 1995 REV. 3 The device protocol tables follow: Table 5-1 provides a Device Profile Information in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. The table, in combination with the Implementation Table (Table 5-2) provided and the Point Lists provided in this user document should provide complete application implementation details for the TPU2000R/TPU2000 DNP environment. 30

37 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5, beginning on page 33.) Vendor Name: ABB Inc. Distribution Relay Division Device Name: Transformer Protection Unit (TPU2000/2000R) Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: For Requests: Level 2 (Since the as Slave implementation preceded the level definitions as of now the implementation lacks certain level 2 functionalities as noted below) For Responses: Level 2 (See the note above) Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static data requests, in addition to qualifier code 06 (no range), qualifier codes 00 and 01 (startstop), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported. For requests made with qualifiers 17 and 28, responses will also include qualifier codes 17 or bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported. Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers NOT supported that are required for LEVEL 2 DNP Levels For Binary Input Change requests, (Object 2), Analog Change Event request (Object 32) and Class Data Scans (Object 60) qualifier codes 07 and 08 (limited quantity) are not supported. The event reporting is sorted by points and then with in each point sorted chronologically. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Received 292 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Transmitted: 2048 Received 2048 Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: Configurable from 0 to 255 (Using Parameter 3) None Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Never Always Sometimes Configurable (Using Mode Parameter) Enable/Disable Data Link Layer Confirmation as Always or Never Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only) When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only) Sometimes Configurable (Using Mode Parameter) Enable/Disable Application Layer Confirmation as Always or Never 31

38 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5, beginning on page 33.) Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: None Fixed at Variable Configurable. Using Parameter Complete Appl. Fragment: None Fixed at Variable Configurable Application Confirm: None Fixed at Variable Configurable Complete Appl. Response: None Fixed at Variable Configurable Others: Inter-character Delay, Minimum turn around time for responses configurable. Request for Write Time - Interval configurable. Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable Execution of Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, and Latch Off depend upon the data point being operated upon. Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change specific variation requested: Events when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged %QPHKIWTCDNGVQUGPFDQVJQPGQTVJG other (attach explanation) Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Default Counter Object/Variation: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) Default Object 20 Default Variation: 2 Point-by-point list attached Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable (attach explanation) Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never When Device Restarts 9JGP5VCVWU(NCIU%JCPIG No other options are permitted. Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value: 9999 Point-by-point list attached 32

39 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5, beginning on page 33.) Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No DNP V3.0 Implementation Table Table 5-1 identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers the TPU2000/2000R supports in both request messages and in response messages. Note that while the TPU2000/2000R may parse many object variations, it will respond to the request variations identified below with entries in the response column. The shaded areas represent functionality beyond that required by a DNP Level 2 device. Also note that the unit does not respond to qualifier codes 07 and 08 for all the objects with the exception of object 50. Table 5-1. DNP 3.0 Object/Variations Supported for the TPU2000/2000R Object Number OBJECT Variation Number Description 1 0 Binary Input Any Variation REQUEST (TPU2000R will parse) Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Codes (hex) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 2 (default) Binary Input with Status 2 0 Binary Input Change Any Variation 2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 2 2 Binary Input (default) Change with Time 10 0 Binary Output Status Any Variation 10 2 (default) Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 06(no range) RESPONSE (TPU2000R will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 129 (response) 129 (response) 1 (read) 06(no range) 129 (response) 1 (read) 06(no range) 129 (response) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 129 (response) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 17, 28(index) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 33

40 Object Number OBJECT Variation Number Description 12 1 Control Relay Output Block 20 0 Binary Counter - Any Variation 20 2 (default) 16-Bit Binary Counter Bit Binary Counter without Flag 21 0 Frozen Counter - Any Variation Bit Frozen Counter 21 6 (default) 16-Bit Frozen Counter with time of freeze Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 30 0 Analog Input Any Variation REQUEST (TPU2000R will parse) Function Codes (dec) 3 (select) 4(operate) 5(direct op) 6(dir. op, noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8(freeze noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8(freeze noack) 1 (read) 7 (freeze) 8(freeze noack) Qualifier Codes (hex) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop) 06 (no range) 17, 28 (index) Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop) 06 (no range) 17, 28 (index) 30 2 (default) Bit Analog Input without Flag Bit Analog Input without Flag 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) 1 (read) 00, 01(startstop) 06(no range) 17, 28(index) RESPONSE (TPU2000R will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 129 (response) 129 (response) 129 (response) 129 (response) 129 (response) 129 (response) Qualifier Codes (hex) echo of request 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 129 (response) 00, 01(start-stop) 17, 28 (index) 129 (response) 129 (response) 129 (response) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 34

41 Object Number OBJECT Variation Number Description 32 0 Analog Change Event Any Variation Bit Analog Change Event with Time 32 4 (default) 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time REQUEST (TPU2000R will parse) Function Codes (dec) 50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 2 (write) 50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) (default) 2 (write) Qualifier Codes (hex) 1 (read) 06(no range) RESPONSE (TPU2000R will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) 06(no range) 129 (response) 130(unsol. resp) 1 (read) 06(no range) 129 (response) 130(unsol. resp) 06(no range) 07(no range) 06(no range) 07(no range) 129 (response) 52 1 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 1 (read) 06(no range) Data 60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06(no range) 60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06(no range) 60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 06(no range) 60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 06(no range) 80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00(start-stop) (index must =7) No Object (function code only) 13(cold restart) No Object (function code only) 14(warm restart) No Object (function code only) 23(delay meas) (Default variations are responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.) Cold And Warm Restart Capabilities Qualifier Codes (hex) 17, 28(index) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) 00, 01(startstop) 17, 28(index) The DNP 3.0 implementation to the WARM and COLD restart (Application Control Function Codes 13 and 14) will generate a time delay object (object 52 variant 1). The response also requests an application level confirm. When this confirm is received from the host, then the TPU will halt all communication activity. This in turn will cause the watch dog time to time out and reset the TPU. Five seconds after the watch dog timer is reset, the TPU will again respond to DNP requests from the host. Internal Indication (IIN) Field Data Returns DNP 3.0, is a protocol which includes status bytes within a data transfer frame. The decode of the defined bits within the protocol are defined in Figure 5-1. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R support all the bits as defined in the protocol. However the definition of when the defined bits are given as a reference to the operator. 35

42 The IIN field is useful to determine if Class Data is available, or if commands have been accepted or if diagnostics and the device are operational. First byte, Bit 4 - Time-synchronization required, set at power up, cleared by host. First byte, Bit 5 - Outputs offline - always zero. Second byte, Bit 5 - Configuration corrupt - always zero. First byte, Bit 6 - Device Trouble - set if any of the following binary inputs are true. Table 5-2. Trouble Bit 6 Instance Occurrence Definitions Description Self Test Status DSP ROM Failure DSP Internal RAM Failure DSP External RAM Failure DSP +/-5V Failure DSP +/-15V Failure DSP +5V Failure DSP Comm. Failure ADC Failure CPU RAM Failure CPU EPROM Failure CPU NVRAM Failure CPU EEPROM Failure IIN CODE FORMAT Bit 0 = All Stations Message Bit 1 = Class 1 Data Bit 2 = Class 2 Data Bit 3 = Class 3 Data Bit 4 = Time Synch Required from Master Bit 5 = Digital Output Point(s) in LOCAL Bit 6 = Device Trouble Bit 7 = Device Restart Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 OCTET 1 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 = RESERVED Bit 1 = Requested Object(s) Unknown Bit 2 = Qualifier, Range, or Data Invalid Bit 3 = Event Buffers Overflowed Bit 4 = Request Understood/Command Processing Bit 5 = Current Configuration Corrupt Bit 6 = RESERVED (Always 0) Bit 7 = RESERVED (Always 0) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 OCTET 2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Figure 5-1. DNP 3.0 Device IIN Bit Definition Assignment 36

43 Binary Input Points (129 Indices Defined) Binary Input Points are reported a variety of ways using Object 1 (Single Bit Binary Data with or without status reporting) or Object 2 (Single Bit Binary Input Change with or without status/time reporting). Table 5-3. Binary Input Index Definition Table Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input without status) Note: For Static points the response for variation 0 is configurable Point I.D. Name/Description Default 1 Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) Scan Group NOTE GROUP 0 Contact Input Status Changed (obj 1 only) 0 1 Local Settings Change (obj 1 only) 0 2 Remote Edit Disabled (obj 1 only) 5 3 Alternate Settings Group 1 Enabled (obj 1 only) 0 4 Alternate Setting Group 2 Enabled (obj 1 only) 0 5 Fault Record Logged (obj 1 only) 0 6 Power was Cycled (obj 1 only) 0 7 One/More Unreported Operations (obj 1 only) 0 8 Local Operator Interface Action (obj 1 only) T - Percentage Diff. Trip Enabled H - Instantaneous Diff. Trip Enabled P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Time O/C Trip Enabled P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Time O/C Trip Enabled N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Time O/C Trip Enabled G-2 (51N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Time O/C P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Enabled G-2 (50N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C Trip P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Enabled G-2 (150N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C Ti E- Wdg1 bl d(3 Negative i di Seq. ) Trip Enabled Wdg1 Negative Seq. Trip Enabled ALT1 - Alternate 1 settings Enabled ALT2 - Alternate 2 settings Enabled ECI1 - Event Capture 1 Initiated ECI2 - Event Capture 2 Initiated WCI - Waveform Capture Initiated TRIP - Diff Trip Output Contact Enabled

44 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input without status) Note: For Static points the response for variation 0 is configurable Point I.D. Name/Description Default 1 Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) Scan Group NOTE GROUP 31 SPR - Sudden Pressure Input Enabled TCM - Trip Coil Monitor Enabled CRI - Clear Counters Input Enabled ULI1 - User Logical Input 1 Enabled ULI2 - User Logical Input 2 Enabled ULI3 - User Logical Input 3 Enabled ULI4 - User Logical Input 4 Enabled ULI5 - User Logical Input 5 Enabled ULI6 - User Logical Input 6 Enabled ULI7 - User Logical Input 7 Enabled ULI8 - User Logical Input 8 Enabled ULI9 - User Logical Input 9 Enabled DIFF - Diff Trip Energized ALARM - Self Check Alarm Energized T - Percentage Diff Trip Alm Energized 3 (L) H - Inst Diff Trip Alm Energized 3 (L) HROA - 2nd Harm Restraint Alm Energized 3 (L) HROA - 5rd Harm Restraint Alm Energized 3 (L) 5 49 AHROA - All Harm Restraint Alm Energized 3 (L) 5 50 TCFA - Trip Circuit Failure Alm Energized TFA - Trip Failure Alm Energized P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Time O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Time O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) N-1 Wdg1 Neut Time O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) G-2 (51N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Time O/C 3 (L) N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Energized 3 (L) G-2 (50N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C Trip 3 (L) G-2 (150N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C 3 (L) Wdg1 Negative Seq Trip Energized 3 (L) Wdg2 Negative Seq Trip Energized 3 (L) T-D Percentage Diff Trip Disabled H-D Inst Diff Trip Disabled P-1D - Wdg1 PHS Time O/C Trip Disabled

45 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input without status) Note: For Static points the response for variation 0 is configurable Point I.D. Name/Description Default 1 Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) Scan Group NOTE GROUP 69 51P-2D - Wdg2 PHS Time O/C Trip Disabled N-1D - Wdg1 Neut Time O/C Trip Disabled G-2D (51N-2D) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Time O/C P-1D - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Disabled P-2D - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Disabled N-1D - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Disabled G-2D (50N-2D) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C P-1D - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Disabled P-2D - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Disabled N-1D - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Disabled G-2D (150N-2D) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst D - Wdg1 Negative Seq Trip Disabled D - Wdg2 Negative Seq Trip Disabled PATA - Phase A Target Alarm PBTA - Phase B Target Alarm PCTA - Phase C Target Alarm PUA - Pick Up Alarm Sudden Pressure Alarm 3 (L) THRUFA - Through Fault Alarm TFCA - Through Fault Counter Alarm TFKA - Through Fault kamp Summation Alarm TFSCA - Through Fault Cycle Sum. Alarm DTC - Differential Trip Counter Alarm OCTC - Overcurrent Trip Counter Alarm PDA - Phase Demand Current Alarm NDA - Neutral Demand Current Alarm PRIM - Primary Settings Enabled ALT1 - Alternate 1 Settings Enabled ALT2 - Alternate 2 Settings Enabled STCA - Settings Table Change Alarm LOADA - Load Current Alarm OCA-1 - Overcurrent Alarm Wdg OCA-2 - Overcurrent Alarm Wdg HLDA-1 - High Level Detector Alarm Wdg LLDA-1 - Low Level Detector Alarm Wdg HLDA-2 - High Level Detector Alarm Wdg LLDA-2 - Low Level Detector Alarm Wdg HPFA - High Power Factor Alarm

46 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input without status) Note: For Static points the response for variation 0 is configurable Point I.D. Name/Description Default 1 Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) Scan Group NOTE GROUP 107 LPFA - Low Power Factor Alarm VarDA - 3 Phase kvar Demand Alarm PVArA - Positive 3 Phase kvar Alarm NVArA - Negative 3 Phase kvar Alarm PWatt1 - Positive Watt Alarm Wdg PWatt2 - Positive Watt Alarm Wdg ULO1 - User Logical Output 1 Energized ULO2 - User Logical Output 2 Energized ULO3 - User Logical Output 3 Energized ULO4 - User Logical Output 4 Energized ULO5 - User Logical Output 5 Energized ULO6 - User Logical Output 6 Energized ULO7 - User Logical Output 7 Energized ULO8 - User Logical Output 8 Energized ULO9 - User Logical Output 9 Energized Input 1 Input closed Input 2 Input closed Input 3 Input closed Input 4 Input closed Input 5 Input closed Input 6 Input closed Input 7 Input closed Input 8 Input closed Input 9 Input closed UDI - User Definable Interface (logical input) LOCAL (logical input) P-3 (logical input) 3 (T) N-3 (logical input) 3 (T) P-3 (logical input) 3 (T) N-3 (logical input) 3 (T) P-3 (logical input) 3 (T) N-3 (logical input) 3 (T) (logical input) 3 (T) G (logical input) 3 (T) G (logical input) 3 (T) G (logical input) 3 (T) P-3D (logical output) 3 (T) P-3D (logical output) 3 (T) 9 40

47 Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status) Change Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input without status) Note: For Static points the response for variation 0 is configurable Point I.D. Name/Description Default 1 Change Event Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) Scan Group NOTE GROUP P-3D (logical output) 3 (T) N-3D (logical output) 3 (T) N-3D (logical output) 3 (T) N-3D (logical output) 3 (T) D (logical output) 3 (T) GD (logical output) 3 (T) GD (logical output) 3 (T) GD (logical output) 3 (T) P-3 (logical output) 3 (T) P-3 (logical output) 3 (T) P-3 (logical output) 3 (T) N-3 (logical output) 3 (T) N-3 (logical output) 3 (T) N-3 (logical output) 3 (T) (logical output) 3 (T) G (logical output) 3 (T) G (logical output) 3 (T) G (logical output) 3 (T) TFKA-3 (logical output) 3 (T) HLDA-3 (logical output) 3 (T) LLDA-3 (logical output) 3 (T) OCA-3 (logical output) 3 (T) Pwatt3 (logical output) 3 (T) OCA Gnd (logical output) 3 (T) 9 = Static Object Reporting Supported Only (Object 1) (L) = Latched or Seal In Status Point (T) = TPU2000R Three Winding Unit Only (W) = TPU2000R Two Winding Unit Only (P) = Available in the TPU 2000 Unit Only. ** = Version 3.4 DNP and Version 2.04 or later Flash Executive Required DNP Control Explained The explanation of DNP 3.0 control theory in relation to a ASE Test Set simulator follows. The discussion is not to be host device centric but to be protocol centric. The commands discussed relate to the parameterization of the ASE Test Set. 41

48 The ASE DOS Test Set has a standard list of DNP 3.0 commands. DNP 3.0 is an object based protocol upon which different functions are defined. The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined by GE Harris and a protocol document Titled Distributed Network Protocol DNP 3.0 Basic 2 Document Set Part Number Revision 03 described the command set. Control Functions and Objects Defined DNP 3.0 defines two objects for discrete point data access/control. The defined Objects are: Object 10 - Binary Output Status Supporting Control Operation READ (Function 01) Object 12- Binary Output Control. Supporting Control Operations SELECT (Function 03) OPERATE (Function 04) DIRECT OPERATE (Function 05) DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK (Function 06) It should be noted that the standard ASE Object Command SBO Relay OUT uses functions 03 and 04 to complete the control functionality. It should also be noted that the standard ASE Default List of DNP 3.0 commands uses 8 bit (single octet) range identifiers as a default. Thus Object 12 Variant 1 is intended to use a range qualifier of 17x when performing control functionality. The use of Binary Output Control (Object 12) shall be explained within this application note. To perform the desired control functions with the ASE Test Set, the following information is required for initiation of communications to a TPU2000/TPU2000R. ASE uses the description SBO Relay Out to denote control functionality. Source 100 Destination 1 Object 12 Variant 1 (Required for Object 12 Control) Qualifier 17x (HEX) (Single Byte Range Argument) Range 1 (Single Control Type) Single Control Point Configuration The ASE Test Set offers additional parameters that must be specified for control operation. Although multiple functions may be controlled via a DNP 3.0 command, this application note shall only deal with single point control. Depressing the Range button on the ASE Test Set and selecting the Single Point Control, a window shall be displayed requesting: Index (Refer to Table 5 for the desired function) Control Code Configuration The second set of parameters which must be specified for control are particular to the control object 12. The specified control arguments required for in the Relay parameters field of the test set is: Control Code Count (Number of Times Control operation is to be executed) Length of Pulse ON (in ms) (Length of Pulse Control ON) Length of Pulse OFF (in ms) (Length of Pulse Control OFF) Status (TPU2000/TPU2000R this argument is always = 0) 42

49 The Pulse Control OFF argument is useful when the count is greater than 1. The Pulse ON and Pulse OFF time creates a pulse train duration useful for execution of specific consecutive timed events. The control codes are defined in DNP 3.0 as per the bit pattern as outlined in Figure 5-2. The following permutations are as such: 00 (hex) NULL Control (Cancels the Control Operation Depending on the Control function) 01 (hex) Momentary Pulse ON (Duration = Pulse ON Value Field) 02 (hex) Momentary Pulse OFF (Duration = Pulse OFF Value Field) 03 (hex) Latch ON (Set Control Value to ON until reset or Latch OFF) 04 (hex) Latch OFF (Set Control Value to OFF until reset of Latch ON) 81 (hex) Trip Designation with Momentary On (Paired Point Operation) 41 (hex) Close Designation with Momentary Off (Paired Point Operation) Each of the above control functions included in Table 5-1 shall be explained using single point control are reviewed in the following sections. It is noted that the NULL CONTROL CODE is not supported and sending such a control code shall generate a returned message that the request is not accepted. This does not affect the operation of the relay. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Trip = 01 Close = 10 For Control Code Bits The control code for Trip would be 41x (hex) The control code for Close would be 81x (hex) 0000 = Null Operation 0001 = Pulse On (for the specific On Time) 0010 = Pulse Off (for the specific Off Time) 0011 = Latch On 0100 = Latch Off Figure 5-2. DNP Control Field Bit Designation The following sections explain the control operations for each of the aforementioned grouping of points. The supported objects and variants for each of the TPU2000/TPU2000R control types are listed in TPU2000/TPU2000R Implementation of the DNP 3.0 User Guide Revision 3.0. Paired Point Operation Several indices are configured as paired points. Paired point operation, as per the DNP 3.0 definition operates with the TRIP (81x) and CLOSE (41x) commands. Paired Point implementation occurs with the following groups. Physical Output Test Control Trip Operate Control Reset Element Control User Logical Control Several Groups of data have a PAIRED POINT operation implementation with respect to control codes TRIP 81x and CLOSE 41x. Although the TPU 2000/2000R supports the DNP close command, command execution of the physical breaker (close), only follows the defined index. Each point in a PAIRED POINT IMPLEMENTATION group operates as such: 43

50 EVEN POINT NUMBER: If a TRIP Command is sent to this point the corresponding function is energized (for example, trip physical output [index 0], Output 1 [index 2], or ULO 1 [index 14]). If a CLOSE command is sent to an even index, the next corresponding function [odd paired index] is energized (for example, spare [index 1], Output 2 [index 3] or ULO 2 [index 15]). The groups described as being paired points shall have the odd index- even index point pairing. ODD POINT NUMBER: If a CLOSE Command (41x) is sent to an ODD index, the defined operation shall occur as the index is defined in Table 5-1. If a TRIP (81x) command is sent, the command shall be accepted but ignored. The advantage of a PAIRED POINT implementation is that some legacy host devices perform trip and close on the same point index. The PAIRED POINT implementation allows ABB protective relays to provide superior automation control via DNP 3.0 with a wide variety of host implementations. PAIRED POINT index implementation is not configurable from the operator or from the host device. Physical Output Test Control (Index 0 Through 9) Physical Output Control is provided for TPU2000R test. ABB DNP 3.0 implementation allows for pulsing of the output contacts for test. The output may be pulsed on for a duration of 300 ms. Control Index points 0 through 9 allow for a single pulse of the selected point. The supported control operations are as follows for the aforementioned points. PAIRED POINT operation is implemented. Even Numbered Control Points (0,2,4,6,8) Control Code Count Length of Pulse ON Length of Pulse OFF Status 01 (Momentary On) 03 (Latch On) 81 (Trip) 41 (Close) All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results. All counts other than 1 execute the command once. A number 1 or greater pulses the output for 300 ms Field Value is ignored. Field Value is ignored. Odd Numbered Control Points ( 1,3,5,7,9) Control Code Count Length of Pulse ON Length of Pulse OFF Status 01 (Momentary On) 03 (Latch On) 41 (Close) All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results. All counts other than 1 execute the command once. A number 1 or greater pulses the output for 300 ms Field Value is ignored Field Value is Ignored Trip Operate Control (INDEX 10-11) The Trip Operate Control index operates only with the trip control argument. Since the TPU2000R has only the ability to trip a breaker, (Closing is only possible via a manual operation via a mimic panel switch). PAIRED POINT operation is implemented. The following are accepted control codes for single point control: Control Code Count Length of Pulse ON Length of Pulse OFF 81x (Trip) 41x (Close) 03x (Latch ON) 04x (Latch OFF) Count of 1 is supported only all others execute once. The entry in this field determines the pulse duration. Field Value is ignored 44

51 Status Field Value is ignored The TPU allows paired point operation for index points 11 and 12. As illustrated above, both a trip command (81 hex) or a close command (41 hex) produces a trip operation on this singular index. Reset Element Control (Index 12 through 13) The TPU 2000R allows for resetting latched points via a DNP command (Supervisory Control). Targets, Alarms, and Demand values may also be reset. PAIRED POINT operation is implemented. The control block for the RESET ELEMENT CONTROL functions are: Even Numbered Control Points (12) Control Code 01 (Momentary On) 03 (Latch On) 04 (Latch Off) 81 (Trip) 41 (Close) All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results. Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once. Length of Pulse ON A number 1 or greater pulses the output for 300 ms Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored 0 Status Field Value is ignored 0 Odd Numbered Control Points (13) Control Code 01 (Momentary On) 03 (Latch On) 04 (Latch Off) 41 (Close) All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results. Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once. Length of Pulse ON A number 1 or greater for Code 01 is accepted otherwise the field is ignored. Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored 0 Status Field Value is ignored 0 ULO Soft Point Control (Index 14 through 22) The TPU has a variety of ULI/ULO control capabilities within the unit. ABB offers various application notes covering applications in which ULO/ULI control is desirable. The ABB TPU2000R Transformer Protection Unit 1MRA MIB (IB ) Manual (REV C) has a detailed explanation of such capabilities listed in Section 6. Soft Point Control may be linked to various TPU2000R elements, Physical Output and timer capabilities. The TPU2000R allows for the ULO (User Logical Output) elements to be controlled via DNP 3.0 PAIRED POINT operation is implemented. Valid control parameterization accepted to perform these capabilities are as follows: Even Numbered Control Points (14,16,18,20,22) Control Code 01 (Momentary On) 03 (Latch On) 04 (Latch Off) 81 (Trip) 41 (Close) All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results. Count 1 to 512 Length of Pulse ON 1 to 65,535 45

52 Length of Pulse OFF If the count is 1 this field is ignored else the number in this field, 1 to 65,535 determines the OFF time duty cycle. Status Field Value is ignored 0 Odd Numbered Control Points (15,19,21,23) Control Code 01 (Momentary On) 03 (Latch On) 04 (Latch Off) 41 (Close) All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results. Count 1 to 512 Length of Pulse ON 1 to 65,535 Length of Pulse OFF If the count is 1 this field is ignored else the number in this field, 1 to 65,535 determines the OFF time duty cycle. Status Field Value is ignored 0 Force Logical Input Configuration The TPU2000R has a default configuration of Force Logical Input bits. Forcing these bits on or off enables or disables the function associated with the function bits. The TPU ECP (External Configuration Program) allows reassignment of the default functions as listed in Table 1. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R have the capability of automation configuration to a generic Logical Input bit. These bits are generic in nature and can be mapped via ECP (External Communication Program) or WIN ECP (WINdows External Communication Program). Mapping of the values occurs as such: 1. From WIN ECP select the menu item FLI Index and User Name selection. 2. A list of default mappings are shown as in Figure 5-3 (WINECP Screen) In this case the user is viewing the screen in WINECP as shown in the SETTINGS Screen. 3. The default list corresponds to the Logical Input mapping of Logical Inputs (hereto referred as LI) as illustrated in Table If one would wish to change the relay protective function element mapped to the specific LI, depress the ENTER key. The display in Figure 5-3 shall be displayed. 5. The user would then scroll down the list and highlight the element desired to be mapped to the specific LI within the edited list. 6. Depress the ENTER key to map the selected element into the table. Figure 5-3. WINECP Forced Logical Input Mapping Screen 46

53 The usefulness of this feature cannot be understated. Each one of these functions can be forced via a network control. Programming need not be done to allow for function control via a network. If the relaying feature ALT 1 were to be enabled, the bit FLI 07 could be forced to an ON condition via the network control. If a desired control function were to be controlled via the network, then WINECP mapping would have to be configured as per Figure 5-4. Point Forcing Control Functionality (Index 32 Through 127) The TPU2000R allows forcing of the following control points: q Logical Inputs q Physical Inputs q Physical Outputs Traditionally, network or supervisory operation of control points was determined to be a special operation. As a safeguard to unintended operator control initiation ABB s implementation of forcing functionality has specifically required certain steps to be performed within the DNP 3.0 protocol for a supervisory operation to occur. Additionally, when the operator has executed a force function, a visual indication is initiated on the faceplate of the relay. When no element is forced, the NORMAL LED at the front of the relay is illuminated in a solid green color. When any element is forced within the relay, the NORMAL LED flashes at a rate of one second energized and one second extinguished. The NORMAL LED shall continue to flash until no elements are forced within the TPU2000R. Supervisory Forcing control points are implemented in a odd-even arrangement. As per TABLE 1, even points are designated as STATUS whereas odd points are designated as UNFORCE. The descriptions of their functionality is as follows: Control Code 03 (Latch On) 04 (Latch Off) All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results. Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once. Length of Pulse ON 1 Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored 0 Status Field Value is ignored 0 A write of the control code 03x LATCH ON forces the point to a state of 1. A write of the control code 04x LATCH OFF forces the point to a state of 0. A force of the point allows control by the operator or supervisory host. If the point is forced, any logic capabilities configured in the TPU2000R are overridden by the supervisory control established via DNP 3.0. The forced index control shall be forced until the point is UNFORCED. To UNFORCE a control point, the following control code parameterization is required. Control Code 01 (Momentary On) 02 (Momentary Off) 03 (Latch On) 04 (Latch Off) 81x ( Trip) 82x(Trip Off) 41x( Close) 42x(Close Off). Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once. Length of Pulse ON 1 Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored unless 02 or 82 code is used. 1 Status Field Value is ignored 0 When the code is UNFORCED control is restored to the configured logic in the TPU2000R. 47

54 Table 5-4. Binary Output Control Indices Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no acknowledge) Point Name/Description Notes Supported Control Relay Output Scan Group I.D. Block Fields 0 Trip Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 1 RESERVED 2 Output 1 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 0 3 Output 2 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 0 4 Output 3 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 1 5 Output 4 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, 1 6 Output 5 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, 1 7 Output 6 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, 1 8 Output 7 Contact operate test 1,4 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 1 9 RESERVED 10 Trip operate command 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 11 RESERVED 12 Reset Alarms/Target LEDs 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 13 Reset Peak and Minimum Demand Currents 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 14 ULO1 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 15 ULO2 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 16 ULO3 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 17 ULO4 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 18 ULO5 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 19 ULO6 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 20 ULO7 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 21 ULO8 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 22 ULO9 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 23 Reserved Reserved 24 Reserved Reserved 25 Reserved Reserved 26 Reserved Reserved 27 Reserved Reserved 28 Reserved Reserved 29 Reserved Reserved

55 Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no acknowledge) Point I.D. Name/Description Notes Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Scan Group 30 Reserved Reserved 31 Reserved Reserved 32 Forced Logical Input 0 - status 3 Latch On, Latch Off 16 (87T) 33 Forced Logical Input 0 - unforce 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 (87T) On, Latch Off 34 FLI 1 - status (87H) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 1 - unforce (87H) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 36 FLI 2 - status (51P1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 2 - unforce (51P1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 38 FLI 3 - status (51P-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 3 - unforce (51P-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 40 FLI 4 - status (51N-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 4 - unforce (51N-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 42 FLI 5 - status (51G-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 5 - unforce (51G-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 44 FLI 6 - status (50P-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 6 - unforce (50P-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 46 FLI 7 - status (50P-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 7 - unforce (50P-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 48 FLI 8 - status (50N-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 8 - unforce (50N-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 50 FLI 9 - status (50G-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 9 - unforce (50G-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 52 FLI 10 - status (150P-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 10 - unforce (150P-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 54 FLI 11 - status (150P-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 11 - unforce (150P-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 56 FLI 12 - status (150N-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 12 - unforce (150N-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 58 FLI 13 - status (150G-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 13 - unforce (150G-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 16 49

56 Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no acknowledge) Point Name/Description Notes Supported Control Relay Output I.D. Block Fields Scan Group 60 FLI 14 - status (46-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 14 - unforce (46-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 62 FLI 15 - status (46-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 15 - unforce (46-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 64 FLI 16 - status (ALT1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 16 - unforce (ALT 1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 66 FLI 17 - status (ALT2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 17 - unforce (ALT2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 68 FLI 18 - status (ECI1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 18 - unforce (ECI2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 70 FLI 19 - status (ECI2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 19 - unforce (ECI2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 72 FLI 20 - status (WCI) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 20 - unforce (WCI) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 74 FLI 21 - status (TRIP) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 21 - unforce (TRIP) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 76 FLI 22 - status (SPR) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 22 - unforce (SPR) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 78 FLI 23 - status (ULI 1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 23 - unforce (ULI 1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 80 FLI 24 - status (ULI 1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 24 - unforce (ULI 1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 82 FLI 25 - status (ULI 2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 25 - unforce (ULI 2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 84 FLI 26 - status (ULI 3) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 26 - unforce (ULI 3) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 86 FLI 27 - status (ULI 4) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 27 - unforce (ULI 4) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 88 FLI 28 - status (ULI 5) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 28 - unforce (ULI 5) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 90 FLI 29 - status (ULI 6) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 16 50

57 Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no acknowledge) Point I.D. Name/Description Notes Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Scan Group 91 FLI 29 - unforce (ULI 6) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 92 FLI 30 - status (ULI 7) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 30 - unforce (ULI 7) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 94 FLI 31 - status (ULI 8) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FLI 31 - unforce (ULI 8) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 96 Forced Phy. Input 1 - status (IN1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off Forced Phy. Input 1 - unforce 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 (IN1) On, Latch Off 98 FPI 2 - status (IN2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 2 - unforce (IN2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 100 FPI 3 - status (IN3) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 3 - unforce (IN3) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 102 FPI 4 - status (IN4) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 4 - unforce (IN4) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 104 FPI 5 - status (IN5) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 5 - unforce (IN5) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 106 FPI 6 - status (IN6) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 6 - unforce (IN6) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 108 FPI 7 - status (IN7) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 7 - unforce (IN7) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 110 FPI 8 - status (IN8) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 8 - unforce (IN8) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 112 FPI 9 - status (IN9) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPI 9 - unforce (IN9) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 114 Forced Phy. Output 1 - status 3 Latch On, Latch Off 16 (OUT1) 115 Forced Phy. Output 1 - unforce 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 (OUT1) On, Latch Off 116 FPO 2 - status (OUT2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPO 2 - unforce (OUT2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 118 FPO 3 - status (OUT3) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPO 3 - unforce (OUT3) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 120 FPO 4 - status (OUT4) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPO 4 - unforce (OUT4) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 51

58 Binary Output Status Points Object Number: 10 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no acknowledge) Point I.D. Name/Description Notes Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields On, Latch Off Scan Group 122 FPO 5 - status (OUT5) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPO 5 - unforce (OUT5) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 124 FPO 6 - status (OUT6) 3 Latch On, Latch Off FPO 6 - unforce (OUT6) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16 On, Latch Off 126 FPO 7 - status (OUT7) - future 4 Latch On, Latch Off 16 TPU2000 pt. 127 FPO 7 - unforce (OUT7) - future TPU2000 pt. 4 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off 16 Note: 1. When paired, this function operates on the next (even numbered) point in the table. When unpaired it operates on the selected point. 2. Function must be mapped to one of the output relays in order for this function to operate. 3. TPU2000R Point Only 4. TPU2000 Point Only Counter Access (6 Elements Defined) The TPU2000 and TPU2000R allow for access of several counter values including those associated with: q q q Through Faults Overcurrent Trips Differential Trips Counters may be read, written, or frozen. The frozen counter objects require an explicit freeze request from the host. Each freeze request will capture one sample of the related static counter up to a maximum of 32 samples. A DNP read request for a frozen counter will return all frozen samples for each point specified in the read request in ascending time order. Once read, further read requests for a point will not return frozen data for the previously read counter until another freeze request occurs. Table 5-7 lists the index list of the counters defined for the TPU2000/TPU2000R. Table 5-5. Counter Index Assignment Binary Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Binary Counter with Flag) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none not supported Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) 52

59 Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 6 (16-Bit Frozen Binary with Flag and Timestamp) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none not supported Point Name/Description Change Event Assigned Class Scan Groups 2 I.D. (1, 2, 3 or none) 0 Through Faults (0-9999) None 16 1 Through Fault kamp A (0-9999) None 16 2 Through Fault kamp B (0-9999) None 16 3 Through Fault kamp C (0-9999) None 16 4 Through Fault Sum Cycle (0-9999) None 16 5 Over Current Trips (0-9999) None 16 6 Differential Trips (0-9999) None 16 Analog Input Index Designation (168 Elements Defined) The TPU2000 and TPU2000R has 168 data elements assigned to Analog Input objects. The types of data retrievable via the analog input data objects are: q q q q q q q q q Metering Data Demand Data Peak Demands Minimum Demands Through Fault Data Differential Fault Data Harmonic Restraint Event Data Operation ( Relay Event Record Data) User Definable Register Data Metering Data (Index 0 through 118, 351 through 354 and 319 through 350) Metering data is retrieved in a straightforward manner. The definition of the data is given as 32 or 16 bit data types. All metering values are in primary units. If one wishes to scale and redefine the range of the returned data, User Definable Registers (Indices 319 through 350). Metering Data is static in nature and is retrieved via variants 1 through 4 depending upon the data type assigned to the value (16 or 32 bit data). Demand Data (Index 119 to 130) Peak and minimum demands are continuously monitored and any change in value or associated time mark are recorded as an event. These events are only collected/reported if the Group Number (enabled via Parameter 5,6,7, and 8 settings as explained in the port configuration sequence) is enabled. If indices 119 to 130 are accessed via static data objects (Object 30), then the current demand reading is returned. If indices 43 through 54 are accessed via event change objects (Object 32), then the data returned indicated either a minimum or peak demand reading between accesses. The host may retrieve these events via an analog events scan or class scans (as explained in Section 5). A maximum of 768 events may be stored for reporting to the host. An event, (one value with time stamp) is any change in any one of the peak or minimum values. Upon power-up, any non zero peak or minimum value will be returned to the host. Demand Values (indices 119 through 130) are calculated until reset by the host. The reset index for demand values is available through object 12 index 13 as listed in Table 5-7 above. 53

60 Fault Records (Differential Fault Index 131 Through 202, Through Fault 202 Through 240) and Operation Record (Index 316 Through 318) Retrieval As shown in Figure 5-5, the TPU2000 and TPU2000R support fault record and operation data retrieval through DNP 3.0. Three types of fault records are stored, Differential Fault [Index 131 through 202], Through Fault [Index 203 through 240], and Harmonic Restraint Faults [Index 241 through 315]. Each time a fault is recorded within the TPU2000 or TPU2000R, it is stored in an internal buffer. Up to 32 fault records may be stored in the unit s buffer. If more than 32 faults are recorded, the first fault is overwritten in the buffer (internal to the TPU2000/TPU2000R). This internal buffer is different from the DNP 3.0 storage buffer. A total of 768 events (including those of digital changes, demands, faults, and operations), may be stored in the TNP queue. If more than 768 events accumulate in the DNP 3.0 storage buffer, then the IIN buffer overflow bit shall be set. If the indices for points are read using a static object/qualifier combination, no points shall be reported and the host shall receive a flag notification that the point is offline. Fault indices 131 through 315. Operation Records also operate using the same principle as described for fault records. However, 128 operation records may be stored in the TPU2000/TPU2000R buffer. If more than 128 operation records are stored in the TPU s internal buffer, then the first record in the buffer is overwritten. The same rules regarding the DNP 3.0 buffer apply to the operation records. Each operation is recorded and stamped via a unique message number. Table 5-7 lists the unique operation number (Index 316) assigned to each operation. As with the Event Records, Operation records are only reported to the host on an event object or Class 2 Object poll. The indices for Operations Record reporting must be enabled via Parameters 5, 6, 7, and 8 as described in Section 4. Differential Fault and Event Record Layout (TPU 2000/2000R) TPU2000 DNP INDICIES DIFFERENTIAL FAULT REC C E Fault Record Data Reported On Change Event or Class 1 Data 32 Fault Record Max.. TARGETS Fault Stack DNP INDICIES OPERATION RECORDS OR C E Operation Record Data Reported on Change Event or Class 2 Data Record Stack 128 Operation Records Max. TPU2000R Figure 5-4. Differential and Event Record Layout 54

61 Through Fault and Harmonic Restraint Fault Layout (TPU 2000/2000R) TPU2000 THROUGH FAULT RECORD DNP INDICIES C E Fault Record D ata Reported On Change Event or Class 1 Data 32 Fault Record Max.. TARGETS Fault Stack DNP INDICIES HARMONIC RESTRINT FAULT RECORDS OR Operation Record Data R eported on Change Event or Class 2 Data 32 Fault Records Max. C E Record Stack TPU2000R Figure 5-5. Through Fault and Harmonic Restraint Fault Layout Table 5-6. Event Record Definition Type Operation Record Type (Index 318 code definition) Operation Number Definitions 00 87T Trip 01 87H Trip 02 51P-1 Trip 03 51N-1 Trip 04 50P-1 Trip 05 50N-1 Trip P-1 Trip N-1 Trip Trip 09 51P-2 Trip 10 51G-2 Trip 11 50P-2 Trip 12 50G-2 Trip P-2 Trip G-2 Trip Trip 16 ECI-1 17 ECI-2 18 Thru Flt 19 Harm Rest 31 Fault Clear Failed 32 Fault Cleared 33 Harmonic Restraint 34 Manual Trip 35 Manual Trip Failed 40 87T Enabled 41 87H Enabled 42 51P-1 Enabled 43 51P-2 Enabled 44 51N-1 Enabled 45 51G-2 Enabled 46 50P-1 Enabled 47 50P-2 Enabled 48 50N-1 Enabled 49 50G-2 Enabled P-1 Enabled P-2 Enabled 55

62 Operation Record Type (Index 318 code definition) N-1 Enabled G-2 Enabled Enabled Enabled 56 ALT1 Input Closed 57 ALT2 Input Closed 58 Event Cap1 Init 59 Event Cap2 Init 60 Wave Cap. Init 61 Trip Input Closed 62 SPR Input Closed 63 TCM Input Closed 64 Primary Set Active 65 Alt1 Set Active 66 Alt2 Set Active 70 Thru Flt Cntr Alm 71 Thru Flt kasum Alm 72 Thru Flt Cycle Alm 73 OC Trip Cntr Alarm 74 Diff Trip Cntr Alm 75 Phase Demand Alarm 76 Neutral Demand Alm 77 Load Current Alarm 78 Trip Coil Failure 79 High PF Alarm 80 Low PF Alarm 81 kvar Demand Alarm 82 Pos. kvar Alarm 83 Neg. kvar Alarm 84 Pos. Watt Alarm 1 85 Pos. Watt Alarm 2 90 Event Capture #1 91 Event Capture #2 92 Waveform Capture 93 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 1 94 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 1 95 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 2 96 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg ROM Failure 101 RAM Failure 102 Self Test Failed 103 EEPROM Failure 104 BATRAM Failure 105 DSP Failure 106 Control Power Fail 107 Editor Access T Disabled H Disabled P-1 Disabled P-2 Disabled N-1 Disabled G-2 Disabled P-1 Disabled P-2 Disabled N-1 Disabled G-2 Disabled P-1 Disabled P-2 Disabled 56

63 Operation Record Type (Index 318 code definition) N-1 Disabled G-2 Disabled Disabled Disabled 136 ALT1 Input Opened 137 ALT2 Input Opened 138 Event Cap1 Reset 139 Event Cap2 Reset 140 Wave Cap. Reset 141 Trip Input Opened 142 SPR Input Opened 143 TCM Input Opened 162 ULI1 Input Closed 163 ULI1 Input Opened 164 ULI2 Input Closed 165 ULI2 Input Opened 166 ULI3 Input Closed 167 ULI3 Input Opened 168 ULI4 Input Closed 169 ULI4 Input Opened 170 ULI5 Input Closed 171 ULI5 Input Opened 172 ULI6 Input Closed 173 ULI6 Input Opened 174 ULI7 Input Closed 175 ULI7 Input Opened 176 ULI8 Input Closed 177 ULI8 Input Opened 178 ULI9 Input Closed 179 ULI9 Input Opened 180 CRI Input Closed 181 CRI Input Opened Differential (Index 132) / Harmonic Restraint (Index 204) /Through Fault (Index 242) Codes for the TPU T 01 87H 02 51P N P N P N P G P G P G ECI-1 17 ECI-2 18 Thru Flt 19 Harm Rest 57

64 User Definable Registers (Indices 319 Through 350) Many DNP 3.0 hosts may follow differing levels of implementation. Some hosts may accept 16 bit objects, but they may only interpret 12 bit data types. ABB allows scaling of this data to various data lengths. The procedure to configure these User Definable Registers is detailed in Section 5 of this document. Using the register definition lists as described in the Modbus/Modbus Plus Section of this manual, data may be configured from a 32 bit format to a 16 bit or less data format. The data may also be packed to ensure that a group of data is returned upon a poll of the specific analog data types. Please refer to Section 5 of this document which describes the method to perform REGISTER SCALING AND REMAPPING. Analog Data Index Definition Table 5-7 lists the Analog data retrievable via DNP 3.0. Table 5-7. Analog Input Index Designation Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 0 IA-1 (Load Currents) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 17 1 IA-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 17 2 IB-1 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 17 3 IB-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 17 4 IC-1 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 17 5 IC-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 17 6 IN-1 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 17 7 IN-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 17 8 IA-2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 17 9 IA-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IB-2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IB-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IC-2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IC-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IG-2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IG-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IA-3 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IA-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IB-3 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IB-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IC-3 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IC-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IN-3 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IN-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I0-1 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 18 Scan Group 58

65 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 25 I0-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I1-1 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I1-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I2-1 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I2-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I0-2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I0-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I1-2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I1-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I2-2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I2-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I0-3 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I0-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I1-3 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I1-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None I2-3 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None I2-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None Iop A (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None Iop B (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None Iop C (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresA-1 (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresA-1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresB-1 (*800) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IresB-1 Angle Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IresC-1 (*800) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IresC-1 Angle Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IresA-2 (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresA-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresB-2 (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresB-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresC-2 (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresC-2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresA-3 (*800) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresA-3 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IresB-3 (*800) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IresB-3 Angle Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IresC-3 (*800) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None IresC-3 Angle Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None nd Harmonic % A-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None nd Harmonic % B-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None nd Harmonic % C-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None nd Harmonic % A-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None nd Harmonic % B-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None nd Harmonic % C-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None nd Harmonic % A-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None nd Harmonic % B-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 20 Scan Group 59

66 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 71 2nd Harmonic % C-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % A-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % B-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % C-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % A-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % B-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % C-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % A-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % B-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None th Harmonic % C-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % A-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % B-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % C-1 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % A-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % B-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % C-2 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % A-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % B-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None All Harmonics % C-3 (*2) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None KVan (Mag) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVan (Ang) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None KVbn (Mag) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVbn (Ang) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None KVcn (Mag) Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVcn (Ang) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None KWan Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KWbn Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KWcn Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KW3* Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVARan Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVARbn Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVARcn Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVAR3* Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KWHra Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KWHrb Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KWHrc Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KWHr3* Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVARHra Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVARHrb Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVARHrc Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVARHr3* Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KVA3* Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None Frequency (*100) Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None Power Factor (*100) Signed, two's comp + = Leading, = Lagging Scan Group Static 16 Bit ( Var 2 or 4) None 28 60

67 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 115 KV1 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KV1 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None KV2 Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None KV2 Angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None Demand Ia (Load Currents) See Note Demand Ib See Note Demand Ic See Note Demand In/Ig See Note Demand KWan See Note Demand KWbn See Note Demand KWcn See Note Demand KW3* See Note Demand KVARan See Note Demand KVARbn See Note Demand KVARcn See Note Demand KVAR3* See Note Fault Parameter Flag See Note Fault Type (element) See Note Setting See Note Fault Number See Note Clear Time (*1000) See Note Winding 1 Tap (*500) See Note Winding 2 Tap (*500) See Note I operate A (*800) See Note I operate B (*800) See Note I operate C (*800) See Note I restraint A-1 (*800) See Note I restraint B-1 (*800) See Note I restraint C-1 (*800) See Note I restraint A-2 (*800) See Note I restraint B-2 (*800) See Note I restraint C-2 (*800) See Note nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note Scan Group 61

68 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 161 All Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note I restraint A-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint B-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint C-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint A-2 (Ang) See Note I restraint B-2 (Ang) See Note I restraint C-2 (Ang) See Note IA-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note IB-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note IC-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note IN-1 (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) See Note IA-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note IB-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note IC-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note Scan Group 178 IG-2 (*800 / Ground Wdg2 See Note Scale) 179 IA-1 Angle See Note IB-1 Angle See Note IC-1 Angle See Note IN-1 Angle See Note IA-2 Angle See Note IB-2 Angle See Note IC-2 Angle See Note IG-2 Angle See Note I0-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note I1-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note I2-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note I0-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note I1-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note I2-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note I0-1 Angle See Note I1-1 Angle See Note I2-1 Angle See Note I0-2 Angle See Note I1-2 Angle See Note I2-2 Angle See Note Scale - Phase Wdg 1 See Note Scale - Phase Wdg 2 See Note Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 See Note Scale - Ground Wdg 2 See Note Fault Paramter Flag See Note Fault Type (element) See Note Setting See Note

69 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 206 Fault Number See Note Clear Time (*1000) See Note Relay Time (*1000) See Note IA-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note IB-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note IC-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note IN-1 (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) See Note IA-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note IB-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note IC-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note Scan Group 216 IG-2 (*800 / Ground Wdg2 See Note Scale) 217 IA-1 Angle See Note IB-1 Angle See Note IC-1 Angle See Note IN-1 Angle See Note IA-2 Angle See Note IB-2 Angle See Note IC-2 Angle See Note IG-2 Angle See Note I0-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note I1-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note I2-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note I0-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note I1-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note I2-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note I0-1 Angle See Note I1-1 Angle See Note I2-1 Angle See Note I0-2 Angle See Note I1-2 Angle See Note I2-2 Angle See Note Scale - Phase Wdg 1 See Note Scale - Phase Wdg 2 See Note Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 See Note Scale - Ground Wdg 2 See Note Fault Paramter Flag See Note Fault Type (element) See Note Setting See Note Fault Number See Note Winding 1 Tap (*10) See Note Winding 2 Tap (*10) See Note I operate A (*800) See Note I operate B (*800) See Note I operate C (*800) See Note I restraint A-1 (*800) See Note

70 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 251 I restraint B-1 (*800) See Note I restraint C-1 (*800) See Note I restraint A-2 (*800) See Note I restraint B-2 (*800) See Note I restraint C-2 (*800) See Note nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note I restraint A-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint B-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint C-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint A-2 (Ang) See Note I restraint B-2 (Ang) See Note I restraint C-2 (Ang) See Note Winding 1 Tap (*10) See Note Winding 2 Tap (*10) See Note I operate A (*800) See Note I operate B (*800) See Note I operate C (*800) See Note I restraint A-1 (*800) See Note I restraint B-1 (*800) See Note I restraint C-1 (*800) See Note I restraint A-2 (*800) See Note I restraint B-2 (*800) See Note I restraint C-2 (*800) See Note nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note Scan Group 64

71 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 297 2nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note th Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note All Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note th Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note All Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note I restraint A-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint B-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint C-1 (Ang) See Note I restraint A-2 (Ang) See Note I restraint B-2 (Ang) See Note I restraint C-2 (Ang) See Note Duration (*1000) See Note Operation message # See Note Operation Value (if any) See Note Operation Number See Note User Register 1 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 2 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 3 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 4 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 5 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 6 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 7 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 8 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 9 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 10 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 11 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 12 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 13 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 14 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 15 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 16 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 17 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 18 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 19 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 20 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 21 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 22 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 23 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 24 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 31 Scan Group 65

72 Analog Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read) Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit Analog Input) Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/o Time) Point I.D. Item Description Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 343 User Register 25 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 26 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 27 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 28 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 29 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 30 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 31 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None User Register 32 Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None IG magnitude Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) (T) None IG angle Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) (T) None Power Factor magnitude Static 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) (T) None Power Factor lead/lag status Static 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) (T) None 14 Scan Group NOTE: 1. If Static data is read (Object 30) then the current demand data is returned. If Event Read data is placed in the buffer, then the peak demand (Load) and minimum demand (Load) values are returned for class or object data. 2. Event and Fault Data Returned only on a change event detection (Object 32). No data is available as static (Object 30) Bit static information is reported to the host. Refer to Section 5 of this document for scaling capabilities contained with the TPU 2000R. 4. Added in Version 3.4 which requires flash executive 4.02 or later for feature incorporation. (T) THREE WINDING TPU ONLY Class Data Parameterization The TPU2000 and TPU2000R supports Class Data. All elements described in Tables 5-4, 5-5 and 5-8 are reported in a Class 0 scan. A Class 0 scan is sometimes referred to as an integrity scan. Figures 5-6 through 5-9 explain the method to enable Class data reporting via enabling of group information. A summary explanation of DNP 3.0 Class Reporting Data is as follows: q Class 0 All Static Data q Class 1 Fault Record Data (Digital Input Points 96, 97 and Analog Input Points 55-86) q Class 2 Operation Records (Analog Input Points 87 through 89) q Class 3 Minimum and Maximum Demand Data (Analog Input Points 43 through 54) Status Point Information (Digital Input Points 1 through 95, and 98 through 1-162) It should be noted that only Class 3 (Object 60 Variant 3) Digital Points may be masked to provide a reduced amount of data returned between integrity scans. It is a reliable method of obtaining change of state data within the TPU2000, and TPU2000R. 66

73 Parameter 5 Class Data Configuration Upper Byte Used for Class Data Masking Lower Byte Used for Class Data Selection Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 = 0 = Group 0 data reported = value = 0 Bit 1 = 1 = Group 1 data reported = value = 3 Bit 2 = 1 = Group 2 data reported = value = 5 Bit 3 = 1 = Group 3 data reported = value = 9 Parameter 5 - If Bit 0 = 1 Group 0 Disabled Bit 4 = 1 = Group 4 data reported = value = 17 Bit 5 = 1 = Group 5 data reported = value = 33 Bit 6 = 1 = Group 6 data reported = value = 65 Bit 7 = 1 = Group 7 data reported = value = 129 To enable all Groups parameter must be set to 254. Parameter 5 - If Bit 0 = 0 Group 0 Enabled Parameter 5 - If Bit 1-7 = 1 Group 1 to 7 Enabled. If 0 then corresponding group Disabled Figure 5-6. Parameter 5 DNP 3.0 Group Mask Upper Byte Used for Class Data Masking Parameter 6 Class Data Configuration Lower Byte Used for Class Data Selection Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 = 1 = Group 8 data reported = value = 1 Bit 1 = 1 = Group 9 data reported = value = 2 Bit 2 = 1 = Group 10 data reported = value = 4 Bit 3 = 1 = Group 11 data reported = value = 8 Bit 4 = 1 = Group 12 data reported = value = 16 Bit 5 = 1 = Group 13 data reported = value = 32 Bit 6 = 1 = Group 14 data reported = value = 64 Bit 7 = 1 = Group 15 data reported = value = 128 To enable all Groups parameter must be set to 255. Parameter 6 - If Bit 0-7 = 1 Group 8 to 15. If 0 then corresponding group Disabled. Figure 5-7. Parameter 6 Group Mask 67

74 Upper Byte Used for Class Data Masking Parameter 7 Class Data Configuration Lower Byte Used for Class Data Selection Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 = 1 = Group 16 data reported = value = 1 Bit 1 = 1 = Group 17 data reported = value = 2 Bit 2 = 1 = Group 18 data reported = value = 4 Bit 3 = 1 = Group 19 data reported = value = 8 Bit 4 = 1 = Group 20 data reported = value = 16 Bit 5 = 1 = Group 21 data reported = value = 32 Bit 6 = 1 = Group 22 data reported = value = 64 Bit 7 = 1 = Group 23 data reported = value = 128 To enable all Groups parameter must be set to 255. Parameter 7 - If Bit 0-7 = 1 Group 16 to 23. If 0 then corresponding group Disabled. Figure 5-8. Parameter 7 Group Mask Parameter 8 Class Data Configuration Upper Byte Used for Class Data Masking Lower Byte Used for Class Data Selection Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 = 1 = Group 24 data reported= value = 1 Bit 1 = 1 = Group 25 data reported = value = 2 Bit 2 = 1 = Group 26 data reported = value = 4 Bit 3 = 1 = Group 27 data reported = value = 8 Bit 4 = 1 = Group 28 data reported = value = 16 Bit 5 = 1 = Group 29 data reported = value = 32 Bit 6 = 1 = Group 30 data reported = value = 64 Bit 7 = 1 = Group 31 data reported = value = 128 To enable all Groups parameter must be set to 255. Parameter 8 - If Bit 0-7 = 1 Group 24 to 31. If bit is 0 then corresponding group Disabled. Figure 5-9. Parameter 8 Group Mask EXAMPLE If Groups 0, 1, 27 and 28 were to be enabled and all other points were to be disabled. What would be the calculated parameters for PARAMETERS 5, 6, 7, and 8. SOLUTION Parameter 5 = Group 0 Enabled + Group 1 Enabled + Group 2 Disabled + Group 3 Disabled + Group 4 Disabled + Group 5 Disabled + Group 6 Disabled + Group 7 Disabled Parameter 5 = Parameter 5 = 2 Parameter 6 = 0 (Nothing selected for these groups) Parameter 7 = 0 (Nothing selected for these groups) Parameter 8 = Group 24 Disabled + Group 25 Disabled + Group 26 Disabled + Group 27 Enabled + Group 28 Enabled + Group 29 Disabled + Group 30 Disabled + Group 31 Disabled Parameter 8 = Parameter 8 =

75 Thus in the setup communication parameter configuration screen Parameters 5, 6, 7, and 8 would be configured with the values 2,0,0, and 24. It must be noted that regardless of the order of points given in the group enable parameterization, class data for a given class will be returned in the order defined in the parameter byte assignment configuration table. More than one object may be contained in the response to accommodate various data types and variations required to satisfy the request. Class 3 Data Masking DNP 3.0 is a powerful protocol designed for utility applications. However, the amount of data must be efficiently managed so that fast updates to the host may occur. A common method to acquire vast amounts of data is to configure a host to perform an integrity scan initially (request Class 1, 2, 3, and 0 Data) and then perform Class 3 scans. The host shall update its database in that Class 3 data shall only return the data, which has changed from the previous, scan to the present scan. Each implementer determines the time duration between Class Scans. When a sufficient period of time elapses, the host would then execute an integrity scan. The host would then update its own database and verify the integrity of its own records. Integrity scans can occur as frequently as every 5 minutes or as infrequently as every 1 hour. Each host has its own capabilities and the designer of the automation system designs the polling interval to suit the application. ABB relays incorporate a method to decrease the amount of data reported upon a change event poll. If the group has been enabled, all points in that group are returned for a class. If the amount of data required on a Class 3 poll is less than that on a Class 0 or integrity poll, Event Masking is a method to de-select points within a Class 3 request poll. The method to perform event masking is described as such: Events generated for Binary Input points can be masked to minimize the amount of data returned on a Class 3 scan. As of release v3.2, all Binary Input points with point index 11 or greater generate change events. Point index 96 and 97 generate Class 1 events, all other binary events are Class 3 and may be masked. The masking must be set up using the ABB provided External Communications Program - ECP. The Communication Configuration Settings are accessed via the Miscellaneous Settings item on the Change Settings Menu. The Binary Input Event Masks are contained in Settings 1 to 9; by default they are all zero - enabled. This causes all events to be reported (provided their Scan Group is enabled). They can be disabled by changing all of these Communication Configuration Settings to have all bits set (65535). The procedure to access the Miscellaneous Settings Screen is as follows: Figure Settings Menu Access Screen for the TPU2000/2000R 69

76 The settings screen is visible in Figure 5-9. Select the MISCELLANEOUS tab within WINECP and the screen shown in Figure 5-10 is visible. Figure Settings Screen Figure Miscellaneous Settings Submeu Screen There are three pushbutton fields, select the Set Communication Settings Screen to display the screen to enter the 32 parameters which are used for CLASS 3 EVENT masking as described in the text that follows. Figure 5-12 illustrates the submenu screen for parameter entry. 70

77 Figure Parameter Configuration Screen The masks for individual points can be determined from the Table 5 below. The left half of the table specifies which Settings Word applies for each group of 16 points. By dividing the point index by 16 and checking the remainder in the right half of the table the mask value for each individual point index can be determined. Table 5-8. Class 3 Event Masking Settings Point Comm. Configuration Settings Point Index Setting Mask Index Range Word Value Remainder Example 1: To mask out the Binary Event for the Breaker Failure Alarm (BFA) - point index 57, perform the following steps: a. Divide 57 by 16, to get a remainder of 9. b. Look up the entries for 57 and 9 in the left and right halves of the table, respectively. c. This tells us that Communication Configuration Setting 4 should be set to 512 to mask out this event. 71

78 Example 2: To mask out multiple Binary Events, for the 50P3 and 50N3 Functions (point indexes 40 and 41) first follow the procedure from example 1, then perform the following steps: a. The steps in example 1 establish that both points are in Communication Configuration Setting 3 and that the values are 256 and 512 for point index 40 and 41, respectively. b. To mask off both points we need only to add the two values together to get 768. Users who have DNP software versions prior to v3.2 may want to limit the number of points reported via the Class 3 Binary Input changes for compatibility with those other versions. For versions v2.0 through v2.8 only point index 11 was reported as a Class 3 Binary Input event. For versions v2.9 and v3.0, the Class 3 Binary Input events were limited to point index 11 and the points marked as sealed-ins. The table below shows the Communication Configuration Settings to restrict event reporting to those points if using a relay with v3.2 or later software. Setting v2.0 - v2.8 v2.9 - v3.0 Word Value Values NOTE: In all cases, events are not reported unless the specified Scan Group (or Scan Type) is enabled. Thus, a disabled Scan Group also effectively masks all Class 3 events generated by points in that group. The Sample DNP Event Masking Worksheet (on the next page) shows how the values for masking all events that are not available on the DNP v3.0 software were determined. 72

79 DNP Event Masking Worksheet (sample) Communications Configurable Setting # Value 10 Value Hex x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 41 x x x x x x0800 x x x x x x x x x x x x x (step 2) Totals (step 3) Totals (step 4) 0xF7FF 0xFFFF 0x0003 0xFDFE 0xFBFF 0xFFBF 0xFFFF 0xC3FF 0xFFFF 0xFFFF 0xFFFF Entries in the table indicate DNP Point numbers. The Communications Configurable Setting #s in the column headings show which setting contains the masks for the indicated DNP points. The leftmost columns contain the mask value for each row of DNP points in decimal and hexidecimal. Steps: 1. Mark (with an x) each point that should have event reporting enabled. 2. Proceeding one column at a time, total the values corresponding to the marked points. 3. Calculate the mask value by subtracting the value from step 2 from The step 3 results have been converted to hexidecimal format (optional). 5. Enter the results from step 3 in the ECP program for the specified Communications Configurable Settings. 73

80 DNP Event Masking Worksheet Communications Configurable Setting # Value 10 Value Hex x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Totals Totals 0xFFFF Entries in the table indicate DNP Point numbers. The Communications Configurable Setting #s in the column headings show which setting contains the masks for the indicated DNP points.the leftmost columns contain the mask value for each row of DNP points in decimal and hexidecimal. Time Synchronization Although not required for a Level 2 implementation, the TPU2000 and TPU2000R allows for Time Synchronization via the DNP 3.0 communication network. Time Synchronization must be enabled if the value in Parameter 9 is other than 0. The procedure for Time Synchronization is covered in the DNP Texts referenced within this document. The procedure to perform time synchronization is included here for the benefit of the reader. 1. The Master station sends a Delay Measurement Response request to the relay (Object 52 Variant 1 or 2 in reference to fine or coarse time). The Master records the time of the transmission of the first bit of the first byte of the request. 2. The relay receives the first bit of the first byte of the Delay Measurement Request at the time the RTU RECEIVE TIME (the local time in the relay). 3. The relay transmits the first bit of the first byte of the response to the Delay Measurement request at time RTU SEND TIME. The response contains the fine or coarse (as defined by Variant 1 or 2 of Object 52 as defined in the DNP 3.0 specification) TIME DELAY object, with the time in his object equal to the "turn around time [time of send/receive and relay response] of the host communicating to the relay. 4. The Master Station receives the first bit of the first byte of the relay s response at the time the Master Receive Time is recorded by the host as the response input. 74

81 5. The Master Station can now calculate the one way propagation delay = (Master Send Time - Master Receive Time - "turn around time")/2 6. The master now transmits the first bit of the first byte of a WRITE COMMAND at time of send. The Write request contains the calculated value of the actual host time plus the calculated delay time. This is the time the relay will be set to including delay. The Write command shall be Object 50 variant 2 as defined by the DNP 3.0 protocol. When the relay receives the time synchronize write command, the relay is Synchronized. According to the specification of DNP 3.0, if all delay times for all devices receiving commands on the network are the same, the host may send a broadcast command which is address FFFF hexadecimal. It is exceptionally important that parameter 9 be configured for time synchronization setting iin bit reporting. Also the communication menu must be configured for IRIG B being enabled. Select the communication menu tab as illustrated in the previous figures and select the IRIG B parameterization as illustrated in Figure Rapid Analog Reporting Figure Time Synchronization Parameterization Requirements The ABB DPU 2000/2000R does not incorporate analog deadbanding. In order to improve DNP 3.0 response,an alternate method of performing rapid access of DNP 3.0 metering values has been developed. Since no metering values are returned in the CLASS 1, 2, or 3 scans, all metering data must be obtained by performing a CLASS 0, or Object 30. An alternate means has been incorporated in which up to 32 UDR (User Definable Registers) may be reported in a CLASS 3 scan on a timed basis. If the DPU has not been read by a Class 3 scan within that time interval, the analog UDR data register is overwritten and the new value is reported. FIGURE 5-9E illustrates the method to calculate the Miscellaneous Communication Parameters to enable the Rapid Analog Reporting Feature. The method to configure the TPU 2000R is as follows: 1. GROUP 31 (User Definable Registers) must be enabled via Communication Parameter 8. Reference Section 4 of this manual for an explanation of this procedure. 2. Mode Parameter 6 must be enabled to allow the DPU 2000/2000R to periodically report the User Definable Registers on a timed Basis. Section 4 of this manual describes the means to configure the communication configuration screen. 75

82 3. Select the Miscellaneous Tab in WIN ECP to access the screen to configure the UDR Analog Reporting feature. The screen is shown in Figure 5-14A. Select the submenu selection Set Communications Config to access the screen to parameterize the device. The Analog Reporting Configuration process may only be accomplished via WIN ECP. The process may not be accomplished via the FRONT PANEL INTERFACE. Parameters 17,18, and 19 are available to parameterize this feature. Access the sub window configuration screen by clicking over the field to be configured. Figure 5-14B shows the subwindow available for configuration. 4. Enable the specific UDR registers as per the prodedure illustrated in Figures 5-14 C and 5-14 D. Miscellaneous Setting parameter 17 and 18 selects the register to report to the host. It must be emphasized that if the specific bit is set to a value of 1 the specific UDR will not be reported on a timed basis. If the specific bit is set to a value of 0 then the specific UDR will be reported on a timed basis to the requesting host device. 5. The rate as to how often the UDR registers are placed in the CLASS 3 reporting buffer (thereby setting the CLASS 3 bit) is configured in the Miscellaneous Setting 19. The value written in this parameter is from 1 to and reflects the number of seconds by which UDR s are placed in the CLASS 3 data reporting mechanism. If the CLASS 3 data is not scanned within the configured time window, the values are overwritten. It should be noted that time stamping of the analog CLASS 3 data does not occur. In other words, no matter how long it takes the master station before the IED is scanned, there will only be one set of UDR registers to be reported and the time of reporting will NOT be reported as part of the CLASS 3 scan data returned to the host. 6. Refer to the next section titled REGISTER SCALING AND RE-MAPPING AND USER DEFINABLE REGISTER (UDR) CONFIGURATION PROCESS, for configuring the data format for the requested CLASS 3 reported information. Figure 5-14A. Miscellaneous Settings Screen 76

83 Figure 5-14B. Miscellaneous Parameter Configuration Subscreens Miscellaneous Communication Configurable Settings-Setting 17 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 = 0 = UDR 17 data not reported value = 1 Bit 1 = 0 = UDR 18 data not reported value = 2 Bit 2 = 0 = UDR 19 data not reported value = 4 Bit 3 = 0 = UDR 20 data not reported value = 8 Bit 4 = 0 = UDR 21 data not reported value = 16 Bit 5 = 0 = UDR 22 data not reported value = 32 Bit 6 = 0 = UDR 23 data not reported value = 64 Bit 7 = 0 = UDR 24 data not reported value = 128 Bit 8 = 0 = UDR 25 data not reported value = 256 Bit 9 = 0 = UDR 26 data not reported value = 512 Bit 10= 0 = UDR 27 data not reported value = 1,024 Bit 11= 0 = UDR 28 data not reported value = 2,048 Bit 12 = 0 = UDR 29 data not reported value = 4,096 Bit 13 = 0 = UDR 30 data not reported value = 8,192 Bit 14 = 0 = UDR 31 data not reported value = 16,384 Bit 15 = 0 = UDR 32 data not reported value = 32,768 EXAMPLE: IF UDR s 17,23 and 27 were to be included in a Class 3 scan: = Setting = Figure 5-14C. Miscellaneous Parameter 17 Setting 77

84 Miscellaneous Communication Configurable Settings-Setting 18 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 = 0 = UDR 1 data not reported value = 1 Bit 1 = 0 = UDR 2 data not reported value = 2 Bit 2 = 0 = UDR 3 data not reported value = 4 Bit 3 = 0 = UDR 4 data not reported value = 8 Bit 4 = 0 = UDR 5 data not reported value = 16 Bit 5 = 0 = UDR 6 data not reported value = 32 Bit 6 = 0 = UDR 7 data not reported value = 64 Bit 7 = 0 = UDR 8 data not reported value = 128 Bit 8 = 0 = UDR 9 data not reported value = 256 Bit 9 = 0 = UDR 10 data not reported value = 512 Bit 10= 0 = UDR11 data not reported value = 1,024 Bit 11= 0 = UDR 12 data not reported value = 2,048 Bit 12 = 0 = UDR 13 data not reported value = 4,096 Bit 13 = 0 = UDR 14 data not reported value = 8,192 Bit 14 = 0 = UDR 15 data not reported value = 16,384 Bit 15 = 0 = UDR 16 data not reported value = 32,768 EXAMPLE: IF UDR s 1 through 5 were to be included in a Class 3 scan: = Setting = Figure 5-14D. Miscellaneous Parameter 18 Setting EXAMPLE Miscellaneous Communication Parameter Setting 17 = Setting 18 = Setting 19 = 5 UDR s 1,2,3,4,5, 17,23 and 27 are reported in a CLASS 3 SCAN ( IIN BIT SET) every 5 seconds. Send UDR 1, UDR 2, UDR 3, UDR 4, UDR 5, UDR 17, UDR 23, UDR 27 wneh requested by and OBJECT 60 VARIANT 4. IIN Class 3 BIT SET EC Figure 5-14D. Example Continued Register Scaling and Re-Mapping and User Definable Register (UDR) Configuration Process In the evolution of SCADA hosts, different capabilities have been implemented in conjunction with a protocol s implementation. Some SCADA manufacturers have limited the range of numbers accepted at the host level. Other SCADA manufacturers have reserved alternate definitions of most significant bit placement. Still, other SCADA manufacturers have restricted the amount of commands, which a host may send over a network. ABB s implementation of Register Scaling and Re-Mapping is one method of dealing with certain restrictions or limitations of a SCADA host s protocol implementation. For example, if a host device only accepts numbers from a value of 0 to 4095 (12 bit unipolar) or 2047 to , how can that host device interpret the Van (Voltage a to neutral) in the TPU2000 which reports the value as a number from 0 to +4,294,967,295 (32 bit number)? The 78

85 answer is that one of the devices must take the 32 bit data and scale it into a format usable by the other device. Many hosts share this limitation and are unable to undertake the mathematical machinations to scale the data value. The ABB TPU2000 and 2000R permits scaling of its own internal data. The procedure is straightforward in that a simple configuration screen is presented to the operator and menu of choices is selected to complete the configuration procedure. Re-mapping is especially instrumental in increasing network throughput by allowing all information to be accessed via one network transaction. Within the TPU2000 and 2000R, multitudes of values are available for retrieval via a network connection. However, different protocols require that each group of information can only be accessed via a single network query. Thus if three different groups of information are required via the network, three network accesses must occur. However, if the information is re-mapped to a single memory area in the relay, only one network access need be undertaken to gather the data. Network throughput is increased. Register scaling and re-mapping is common to all ABB TPU2000 and 2000R relays. The Register Scaling and Re-Mapping procedure is the same for DNP/Modbus/Modbus Plus/Standard Ten Byte Protocols.. DNP uses this method to improve overall network throughput in reporting analog data in a CLASS 3 scan. TPU2000 and TPU2000R protective relays provide for scaling and re-mapping functionality. The TPU does not support this capability. Figure 5-6 illustrates the example of re-mapping Van to one of 32 possible Modbus register locations. The example table configuration entries are shown in the Figure. A definition of each configuration entry and mathematically derived configuration examples follow. TPU2000 and 2000R Internal Operation The TPU2000 and TPU2000R reads the raw analog values received from the CT and PT physical connections. The microprocessor-based relay then converts the analog values to a raw digital numeric value from the relay s internal Analog to Digital Converter (A/D) hardware platform. The conversion of the voltage and current readings is not complete. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R microprocessor then takes the raw converted value and performs a mathematical calculation providing a numeric value which is displayed on the relay s front panel MMI or through network accesses. A protection engineer would recognize the terms as such: PRIMARY VALUES the metering values displayed on the protective relay s front panel interface. SECONDARY VALUES the current or voltage received by the CT or PT attached to the unit. SCALED VALUES the value received by the host device (or calculated by the IED and transmitted to the host) through the communication interface. The mathematical calculations involved require the CT Phase, CT Neutral, and PT ratios in order to convert the raw A/D to an understandable value, displayed on the front panel MMI or available for access via a network connection. Thus, the information Van (Voltage A to Neutral), is displayed on the front panel MMI is in converted format (not raw A/D readings), and the data received via the Modbus/Modbus Plus Registers (40265 and 40266) is reported in Volts in a 32 bit representation. The maximum value able to be physically metered by the relay is dependent upon the TPU2000/2000R and the ratio of the PT and CT s used. The CT and PT values are entered into the TPU through ECP/WinECP in the Configuration Settings Menu illustrated in Figure However, life as we know it, is not perfect. Many SCADA hosts are unable to interpret the 32-bit value received over a network. What can be done? ABB s answer is to provide for a fill-in-the-blanks method of scaling. This method takes the interpreted value and provides for DIVISOR SCALING (taking the MMI/network register values and dividing by a constant) or a RATIO SCALING (taking the MMI values/network register values, PT Ratios, CT Ratios and Full SCALE Metered Readings) and transform it into a raw scaled value depending on the minimum/maximum value the SCADA system can interpret. The SCADA system must then receive the mathematical value and perform its own internal calculations so that the data may be displayed to the operator which mirrors that displayed on the relay s front panel. 79

86 ST ATUS NORMAL FAI L PICKUP RECLOSER OUT SYSTEM RESET TARGETS A B C N TI ME INSTANTANEOUS FREQUENCY NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TARGET RESET DPU 2000R Network Partner V1.0 C E TYPICAL SCALING EXAMPLE Change Register Configuration User Definable Register DPU2000R 32 Mappable Registers Scale 500 Source Register Address (4XXX) 265 Destination Data Type Bipolar (LSB) Destination Data Size 12 Bit Source Scale Type Voltage Source Data Type Unsigned 32 Bit High Word Van Low Word Van To Accept Changes: Press Enter No Change: Press Escape Key Return Figure Register Scaling Methodology Figure Change Configuration Settings Menu Illustrating CT and VT Configuration ABB Data Type Definitions All definitions within this manual shall be based upon bits or registers. Since the ABB concept of Register Scaling and Remapping is based upon the Modbus Protocol, it is essential to understand Modbus Protocol even when providing Register Scaling and Remapping for DNP, Modbus Plus or Standard Ten Byte Protocols. For example, Modbus requires all register values to be reported in 16 bit portions (1 word). Two registers may be combined to form numeric representations for IEEE notations, long signed (a number from 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647) or unsigned numbers( a number from 0 to +4,294,967,295). If a value is requested in the short form ( a number from 128 to +127, or 0 to 255), 16 bits will be returned as a response to the host s request, but the number will be within the range of an 8 bit integer. msb lsb msb lsb Word Data MSW Word Data LSW Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Register Offsets of Signed/Unsigned Long Word Data Byte 0 Byte 1 Register Offsets of Signed /Unsigned Integers 0 Byte Data 80

87 Byte 0 Byte 1 Register Offsets of Signed/Unsigned Short ASCII Char ASCII Char Byte 0 Byte 1 Register Offsets of ASCII Characters The TPU2000 and TPU2000R support the following data return types for 4X formats: Unsigned Short - 8 bits - 1 byte in 1 word - Range 0 to 255 Signed Short - 8 bits - 1 byte in 1 word - Range -128 to +127 Unsigned - 16 bits - 2 bytes in 1 word - Range 0 to + 65,535 Signed - 16 bits - 2 bytes in 1 word - Range -32,768 to 32,767 Unsigned Long - 32 bits - 4 bytes in 2 words - Range 0 to +4,294,967,295 Signed Long - 32 bits - 4 bytes in 2 words - Range -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 ASCII - 16 bits - 2 bytes in 1 word 2 characters per register (Reference Appendix A) The tables contained within this document reference the above definitions and give the cadence of bytes or words as: MSB Most Significant Byte LSB Least Significant Byte MSW Most Significant Word LSW Least Significant Word msb Most Significant Bit lsb Least Significant Bit Register Scaling Investigated Within ECP and WinECP, the Change Settings Mode must be entered. A selection titled Register Configuration will appear to the operator. Within ECP, a screen as depicted in Figure 8-3 appears allowing configuration of any of the 32 available registers. Figure User Definable Register Configuration Screen When using the ABB ECP Relay configuration program or the ABB WinECP Relay configuration program, the following menu items must be selected for each of the 32 mappable and scalable entries. The scaled register addresses are resident in Modbus addressing format from Register through The following fields must be configured to perform scaling correctly: 81

88 Table 5-9. Register Scaling Queries ECP QUERY SCALING METHOD DESTINATION REGISTER JUSTIFICATION (Selectable with Scaling Method) QUERY SELECTIONS UNIPOLAR NEGATIVE UNIPOLAR BIPOLAR OFFSET BIPOLAR LSB (Least Significant Bit) MSB (Most Significant Bit) DESTINATION REGISTER SIZE 16 Bits 12 Bits 8 Bits 4 Bits 1 Bit SOURCE REGISTER ADDRESS 257 XXXX which is a valid 4X register listed within this document SOURCE REGISTER TYPE 16 Bits Signed 16 Bits Unsigned 32 Bits Signed 32 Bits Unsigned SOURCE SCALE RANGE SOURCE SCALE TYPE CURRENT VOLTAGE POWER NORMAL REMAINDER Figure 5-15 illustrates the WIN ECP configuration, which appears before the operator upon configuration of each of the User Definable Registers (UDR). Using the computer s arrow keys to select the field, and depressing the space bar shall allow configuration of the fields within this popup menu screen. Figure Popup Menu Configuration Screen for Data Type Register Selections 82

89 Scaling Option and Destination Register Length Options Explained The source data may be scaled from a 32 bit or 16 bit value from the relay to a 16,12,8,4,or 1, bit scale of the value which is sent to a destination register. The scaling, minimum and maximum values sent to the destination register are listed in the table below. Table Minimum and Maximum Ranges for Scaled Numbers Depending Upon Scale Option and Bit Length Selected Scale 16 Bit Scale 12 Bit Scale 8 Bit Scale 4 Bit Scale 1 Bit Scale Option min max min max min max min max min max Offset Bipolar Bipolar Unipolar Negative Unipolar The above table lists the maximum and minimum values reported to a host in the scaled format. Figure 5 illustrates the value correlation between the scale bit minimum and maximum numbers reported to the host versus the unscaled values generated by the TPU2000 and 2000R. Within following discussions of scaling parameters, it should be remembered that the bit scale shall be referred to as the quantity N which is used extensively for the final scaled value calculation. N shall be a value of 16,12,8,4, or 2, which corresponds to the Bit Scale type referred to in Table 5-10 above. Unscaled Value In The DPU2000R + Full Scale Scaled Value ReportedTo the Host Via Network Table 2 Maximum Value Unscaled Value In The DPU2000R + Full Scale Scaled Value Reported To the Host Via Network Table 2 Maximum Value Unscaled Value In The DPU2000R Scaled Value Reported To the Host Via Network UNUSED Table 2 Minimum Value 0 Table 2 Minimum Value UNUSED - Full Scale Table 2 Minimum Value - Full Scale Table 2 Maximum Value OFFSET BIPOLAR SCALING OR BIPOLAR SCALING UNIPOLAR SCALING NEGATIVE UNIPOLAR SCALING Figure Relationship Between Scaled and Unscaled Formats for Offset Bipolar, Bipolar, Unipolar, and Negative Unipolar Scaling Selection in the TPU2000 and 2000R If one were to mathematically compute the minimum and maximum values as described above in Table 5-10 and relate the values to the unscaled full scale + and full scale values, the following equations would result from the analysis. 83

90 Data Type Definitions Value Ranges EQUATION 1: Offset Bipolar (0 to +2 N -1) where 0 = -FS, 2 N-1-1 = 0 and 2 N -1 = +FS EQUATION 2: Bipolar (-2 N-1 to + 2 N-1-1) where -2 N-1 = -FS, 0 = 0 and 2 N-1-1 = +FS EQUATION 3: Unipolar (0 to 2 N -1) where 0 = 0 and 2 N -1 = +FS EQUATION 4: Negative Unipolar (0 to 2 N -1) where 0 = 0 and 2 N -1 = -FS NOTE: for the above equations N = the amount of bits selected for scaling (i.e. 16, 12, 8, 4, 1) Destination Register Length Justification Options Explained Modbus has one definition, but its definition has been interpreted differently by various protocol implementers. This presents a special challenge to the automation engineer. For example, some host device implementations count the first address as address zero whereas other implementers count the first address as address 1 and internally shift the address to offset it by 1 to account for the baseline format. Another interpretation has been that of most significant bit and least significant bit justification. Two selections are possible for the query DESTINATION BIT JUSTIFICATION. Selections as per Table X and Figure 8-3 are MSB and LSB. Figure 8-6 illustrates the bit definition and bit padding for the DESTINATION BIT JUSTIFICATION field selection and DESTINATION REGISTER SIZE query. MSB Justification LSB Justification 16 BIT BIT BIT BIT 2 BIT NOTE : Bit designated as a 1 is the words most significant bit whereas the highest bit number is the least significant bit. 0 indicates a padded bit. Figure Bit Justification Notation An investigation of Figure X illustrates that register justification shifts the data to the left of the right of the register. If the reported data for example is to be reported as 1 after scaling, the internal Modbus presentation to the host shall be 0001 hex in 12 bit MSB justification format and 0010 in the 12 bit LSB justification format. In both cases Bit 12 is set to represent the number 1, however the reported data to the host is shifted accordingly depending upon the hosts interpretation of the Modbus data. Source Register Address and Source Register Type Explained Table 5-11 lists the source addresses of each of the TPU quantities which may be mapped to the User Definable Registers. The addresses are actually the MODBUS addresses from the TPU Modbus Address map. One may consult the TPU 2000/2000R Automation Guide for the exact addresses. For example, if one wished to map the 84

91 Voltage a to neutral value from its Modbus address at Register 40265, the entry within the SOURCE REGISTER query would be 265. The leading 40 designation (or 4X as some refer to it as) is not required. However, for ease of configuration, the pointer addresses are given to the user in Table Within this Automation Technical Guide several designations are given for the source data type. Each value reported within a 4X Register has a separate designation. Example data type designations available for scaling and re-mapping are as follows: Unsigned Short Register Current Phase A 16 Bit Register Unsigned Signed Short Register Power Factor 16 Bit Register Signed Unsigned Long Registers Voltage Phase A 32 Bit Double Register Unsigned Signed Long Registers kwatts Phase A 32 Bit Double Register Signed The query field may contain any of the above four register types for data transfer. Table Register Scaling and Remapping Quantities and Associated Indexes ECP Source Register Address Entry Item Description 158 Phase CT Ratio Unsigned 16 Bit 159 Neutral Ratio Unsigned 16 Bit 160 PT Ratio Unsigned 16 Bit 161 Power Fail Timestamp Year Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 1900<=Range<= Power Fail Timestamp Month Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 1<=Range <= Power Fail Timestamp Day Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 1<=Range<= Power Fail Timestamp Hours Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 0<=Range<= Power Fail Timestamp Minutes Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 0<=Range<= Power Fail Timestamp Seconds Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 0<=Range<= Power Fail Timestamp Hundredths of Seconds Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 0<=Range< Power Fail Timestamp Fail Type Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 1 = DC 169 Power Fail Timestamp Machine State Unsigned Integer 16 Bit 0 = Circuit Breaker Closed 1 = Picked Up 2 = Circuit Breaker Tripping 3 = Circuit Breaker Failed to Open 4 = Circuit Breaker Open 6 = Circuit Breaker Open 7 = Circuit Breaker Failed to Open 8 = Control Switch Trip Fail 170 Fast Status Bit 0-5 Division Code ( Lsb) Bit 6 RESERVED Bit 7 RESERVED Bit 8 RESERVED Bit 9 Unreported Operation Record 9 = Circuit Breaker State Unknown Unsigned 16 Bit = 07 HEX) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED 1 = Unreported Record 85

92 Bit Reserved Reserved 171 Fast Status Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Bit 0-5 RESERVED ( Lsb) RESERVED Bit 6 RESERVED RESERVED Bit 7 RESERVED RESERVED Bit 8 RESERVED RESERVED Bit 9 RESERVED RESERVED Bit Product ID (Msb) = 0E HEX left justified 172 Last Comm Port Error Unsigned Integer 0 = Modbus Plus (Type 6 or 7 Card Only TPU2000R) 1 = INCOM 2 = RS = RS Last Comm Error Command Unsigned Integer/ Word Byte Decode If Modbus or Modbus Plus, register contains Modbus Command. If INCOM or Standard Ten Byte, register contains Command + Subcommand in upper lower byte decode. 174 Last Comm Error Register Request Unsigned Integer Last Requested Address on Comm error read/write request. 175 Last Comm Error Type Unsigned Integer 1 = Invalid Password 2 = Checksum Error 3 = Block/Register Range Invalid 4 = Block/Register attempted to be accessed invalid 5 = Range of data attempted to be accessed invalid 6 = Invalid Data 7 = Settings being edited elsewhere in unit or remote edit disabled 8 = A write to one setting group attempted while actively editing another. 9 = Breaker State Invalid 10 Data entered is below minimum value 11 = Data entered is above maximum allowed 12 = Data entered is out of step 32 = Reference Type or File Number Invalid 33 = Too many registers for Modbus Protocol 34 = Invalid Function Code 35 = Invalid Record Control 176 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned Integer Control Mask 1 Write Mask ( MSW) 177 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned Integer Control Mask 1 Write Mask ( LSW) 178 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned Integer Control Mask 2 Write Mask ( MSW) 179 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned Integer Control Mask 2 Write Mask ( LSW) 257 Operate Current A Unsigned Integer Scale Factor is Operate Current B Unsigned Integer Scale Factor is Operate Current C Unsigned Integer Scale Factor is Restraint Current A Winding 1 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is Restraint Current B Winding 1 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale 16 Bit Factor is Restraint Current C Winding 1 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is Restraint Current A Winding 2 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is Restraint Current-B Winding 2 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is Restraint Current C Winding 2 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is

93 266 Restraint Current A Winding 3 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is Restraint Current B Winding 3 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is Restraint Current C Winding 3 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is Restraint Angle-A Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 270 Restraint Angle-B Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 271 Restraint Angle-C Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 272 Restraint Angle-A Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit 273 Restraint Angle-B Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit 274 Restraint Angle-C Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit 275 Restraint Angle-A Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 276 Restraint Angle-B Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 277 Restraint Angle-C Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 385 Load Current A Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 387 Load Current B Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 389 Load Current C Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 391 Load Current N Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 393 Load Current A Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 395 Load Current B Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 397 Load Current C Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 399 Load Current N Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 401 Load Current A Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 403 Load Current B Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 405 Load Current C Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 407 Load Current N Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current 409 Load Current A Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 410 Load Current B Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 411 Load Current C Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 412 Load Current N Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 413 Load Current A Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit 414 Load Current B Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit 415 Load Current C Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit 416 Load Current N Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit 417 Load Current A Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 418 Load Current B Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 419 Load Current C Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 420 Load Current N Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 421 Load Current Zero Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Positive Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Negative Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Zero Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Positive Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Negative Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Zero Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Positive Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Negative Sequence Unsigned 32 Bit Current Winding Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit 87

94 440 Load Current Positive Sequence Unsigned 16 Bit Angle Winding Load Current Negative Sequence Unsigned 16 Bit Angle Winding Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Unsigned 16 Bit Winding Load Current Positive Sequence Unsigned 16 Bit Angle Winding Load Current Negative Sequence Unsigned 16 Bit Angle Winding Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Unsigned 16 Bit Winding Load Current Positive Sequence Unsigned 16 Bit Angle Winding Load Current Negative Sequence Unsigned 16 Bit Angle Winding Ground Current Magnitude Unsigned 32 Bit Current Sensor 10 (SEE NOTE 1) 450 Ground Current Angle Sensor 10 Unsigned 16 Bit (SEE NOTE 1) 513 Voltage VA Unsigned High Order Word LSW 515 Voltage VB Unsigned High Order Word LSW 517 Voltage VC Unsigned High Order Word LSW 519 Voltage VA Angle Unsigned 16 Bit 520 Voltage VB Angle Unsigned 16 Bit 521 Voltage VC Angle Unsigned 16 Bit 522 Voltage Positive Sequence Unsigned High Order Word LSW 524 Voltage Negative Sequence Unsigned High Order Word LSW 526 Voltage Positive Sequence Angle Unsigned 16 Bit 527 Voltage Negative Sequence Angle Unsigned 16 Bit 528 KWatts A Unsigned High Order Word LSW 530 KWatts B Unsigned High Order Word LSW 532 KWatts C Unsigned High Order Word LSW 534 KVars A Unsigned High Order Word LSW 536 KVars B Unsigned High Order Word LSW 538 KVars C Unsigned High Order Word LSW 540 KWatt Hours A Unsigned High Order Word LSW 542 KWatt Hours B Unsigned High Order Word LSW 544 KWatt Hours C Unsigned High Order Word LSW 546 KVar Hours A Unsigned High Order Word LSW 548 KVar Hours B Unsigned High Order Word LSW 550 KVar Hours C Unsigned High Order Word LSW Phase KWatts Unsigned High Order Word LSW Phase KVars Unsigned High Order Word LSW Phase Kwatt Hours Unsigned High Order Word LSW Phase Kvar Hours Unsigned High Order Word LSW Phase KVA Unsigned High Order Word LSW 562 System Frequency Unsigned Byte 8 bits represented in a 16 bit format 563 Spare ( 2 Winding Unit) INTERPRETED WORD. Power Factor (3 Winding Unit) (3 Winding Unit Only) Bits 15 9 : Not Used (msw) Bit 8: Quantity Sign: 1 = Pos. 0 = Neg. Bit 7: Status: 0 = Leading 1 = Lagging Bit 0 6 : Power Factor * 100 ( lsw) 564 Power Factor (2 Winding Unit) Bits 15 9 : Not Used (msw) 88

95 Spare (3 Winding Unit) Bit 8: Quantity Sign: 1 = Pos. 0 = Neg. Bit 7: Status: 0 = Leading 1 = Lagging Bit 0 6 : Power Factor * 100 ( lsw) 565 Signed Power Factor Signed 16 Bits 566 Power Factor Status 0 = Leading 1 = Lagging 641 Demand Current Phase A Unsigned 32 Bit Current 643 Demand Current Phase B Unsigned 32 Bit Current 645 Demand Current Phase C Unsigned 32 Bit Current 647 Demand Current Neutral Unsigned 32 Bit Current 649 Demand kwatts Phase A Unsigned 32 Bit Power 651 Demand kwatts Phase B Unsigned 32 Bit Power 653 Demand kwatts Phase C Unsigned 32 Bit Power 655 Demand kvars Phase A Unsigned 32 Bit Power 657 Demand kvars Phase B Unsigned 32 Bit Power 659 Demand kvars Phase C Unsigned 32 Bit Power Phase Demand Watts Unsigned 32 Bit Power Phase Demand Vars Unsigned 32 Bit Power 1025 Unreported Differential Fault Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Record Counter 0<=Range<= Unreported Through Fault Record Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Counter 0<=Range<= Unreported Harmonic Restraint Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Record Fault Counter 0<=Range<= Unreported Operation Record Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Counter 0<=Range<= Through Fault Counter Unsigned Integer 16 Bits 1030 Through Fault KSIA Signed 32 Bit High Order Word MSW Kiloamps Symmetrical Ia Current existing when breaker opened on Phase A Through Fault KSIA Signed 32 Bit Low Order Word LSW Kiloamps Symmetrical Ia Current existing when breaker opened on Phase A Through Fault KSIB Signed 32 Bit High Order Word MSW Kiloamps Symmetrical Ib Current existing when breaker opened on Phase B Through Fault KSIB Signed 32 Bit Low Order Word LSW Kiloamps Symmetrical Ib Current existing when breaker opened on Phase B Through Fault KSIC Signed 32 Bit High Order Word MSW Kiloamps Symmetrical Ic Current existing when breaker opened on Phase C 1035 Through Fault KSIC Signed 32 Bit Low Order Word LSW Kiloamps Symmetrical Ic Current existing when breaker opened on Phase C 1036 Through Fault Cycle Summation Signed 32 Bit High Order Word MSW Counter 1037 Through Fault Cycle Summation Signed 32 Bit Low Order Word LSW Counter 1038 Overcurrent Trip Counter Unsigned 16 Bit

96 1039 Differential Trip Counter Unsigned 16 Bit Logical Output Bit 15 = DIFF Bit 14 = SELF CHECK ALARM Bit 13 = 87T Bit 12 = 87H Bit 11 =2HROA Bit 10 = 5HROA Bit 9 = AHROA Bit 8 = TCFA Bit 7 = TFA Bit 6 = 51P1 Bit 5 = 51P2 Bit 4 = 50-P1 (Note 1) Bit 3 = 150P-1 (Note 1) Bit 2 = 50-P2 (Note 1) Bit 1 = 150P-2 (Note 1) Bit 0 = 51N-1 (Note 1) (lsb) 1154 Logical Output Bit 15 = 51G-2 (Note 1) Bit 14 = 50N-1 (Note 1) Bit 13 = 150N-1 (Note 1) Bit 12 = 50G-2 (Note 1) Bit 11 =150G-2 (Note 1) Bit 10 = 46-1 (Note 1) Bit 9 = 46-2 (Note 1) Bit 8 = 87T-D (Note 1) Bit 7 = 87H-D (Note 1) Bit 6 = 51P-1D (Note 1) Bit 5 = 51P-2D (Note 1) Bit 4 = 51N-1D (Note 1) Bit 3 = 51G-2D (Notes 1,2) Bit 2 = 50P-1D (Note 1) Bit 1 = 50P-2D (Note 1) Bit 0 = 50N-1D (Note 1) 1155 Logical Output Bit 15 = 50G-2D (Note 1,2) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Differential Trip Alarm (msb leftmost bit) 0 = Fault 1 = Normal Diagnostic Alarm Harmonic Restrained % Differential Trip Alarm Unrestrained High Set Instantaneous Differential Trip Alarm 2 nd Harmonic Restraint Alarm 5 th Harmonic Restraint Alarm All Harmonics Restraint Alarm Trip Coil Failure Alarm (Trip Circuit Open =1) Trip Failure Alarm (Trip Not Cleared within Trip Fail Dropout Set) Winding 1 Phase Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm Winding 2 Phase Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm 1 st Winding Phase 1 Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm 2 nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm 1 st Winding Phase 2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm 2 nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm Winding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits 1 st Winding 2 Ground Time Trip Alarm (msb leftmost bit) 1 st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Trip Alarm 2 nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm 1 st Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous Trip Alarm 2 nd Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm Winding 1 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm Winding 2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm Percentage Differential Function Disabled Alarm High Set Instantaneous Function Disabled Alarm Winding 1 Phase Time Overcurrect Function Disabled Alarm Winding 1 Phase Time Overcurrect Function Disabled Alarm Winding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm Winding 2 Ground Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 1 st Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 1 st Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 1 st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Winding 2 Ground Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm (msb leftmost bit) 90

97 Bit 14 = 150P-1D Bit 13 =150P-2D Bit 12 =150N-1D Bit 11 =150G-2D (Notes 1,2) Bit 10 = 46-1D Bit 9 =4 6-2D Bit 8 = PATA Bit 7 = PBTA Bit 6 = PCTA Bit 5 = PUA Bit 4 = 63 Bit 3 =THRUFA Bit 2 = TFCA (Note 1) Bit 1 = TFKA (Note 1) Bit 0 =TFSCA (Note 1) 1156 Logical Output Bit 15 = DTC (Note 1) Bit 14 = OCTC Bit 13 = PDA Bit 12 = NDA Bit 11 = PRIM Bit 10 = ALT1 Bit 9 = ALT2 Bit 8 = STCA (L) Bit 7 = 87T (L) Bit 6 = 87H (L) Bit 5 = 2HROA (L) Bit 4 = 5HROA (L) Bit 3 = AHROA (L) Bit 2 = 50P-1D (L) Bit 1 = 50P-2D (L) Bit 0 = 50N-1D (L) 1157 Logical Output Bit 15 = 150P-1 (L) Bit 14 = 50-P2 (L) Bit 13 = 150P-2 (L) Bit 12 = 51N-1 (L) Bit 11 = 51N-2 (L) (Note 3) Bit 10 = 50N-1 (L) Bit 9 =150N-1 (L) Bit 8 = 50N-2 (L) (Note 3) 2 nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 2 nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 2 nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 2 nd Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm Winding 1 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm Winding 2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm Phase A Target Alarm Phase B Target Alarm Phase C Target Alarm Pick Up Alarm Sudden Pressure Alarm Through Fault Alarm Through Fault Counter Alarm Through Fault Counter Alarm Through Fault Cycle Summation Alarm (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Differential Trip Counter Alarm (msb leftmost bit) Overcurrent Trip Counter Alarm Phase Demand Counter Alarm Neutral Demand Current Alarm Primary Settings Enabled Alarm Alternate 1 Settings Enabled Alarm Alternate 2 Setting Enabled Alarm Settings Table Changed Alarm LATCHED Harmonic Restrained % Differential Trip Alarm LATCHED Unrestrained High Set Instantaneous Differential Trip Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Harmonic Restraint Alarm LATCHED 5 th Harmonic Restraint Alarm LATCHED All Harmonics Restraint Alarm LATCHED 1 st Winding Phase 1 Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm LATCHED 1 st Winding Phase 2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm LATCHED (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bit (msb leftmost bit) 2 nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm LATCHED 1 st Winding Phase 2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Trip Alarm LATCHED Winding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm LATCHED Winding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent Seal In Alarm LATCHED 1 st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Seal In Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Seal In Alarm LATCHED 91

98 Bit 7 = 150N-2 (L) (Note 3) Bit 6 = 46-1 (L) Bit 5 = 46-2 (L) Bit 4 = 63 (L) Bit 3 = ULO 1 Bit 2 = ULO 2 Bit 1 = ULO 3 Bit 0 = ULO Logical Output Bit 15 = ULO 5 Bit 14 = ULO 6 Bit 13 = ULO 7 Bit 12 = ULO 8 Bit 11 = ULO 9 Bit 10 = LOADA Bit 9 = OCA 1 Bit 8 = OCA-2 Bit 7 = HLDA-1 Bit 6 = LLDA-1 Bit 5 = HLDA-2 Bit 4 = LLDA-2 Bit 3 = HPFA Bit 2 = LPFA Bit 1 = VarDA Bit 0 = PVarA 1159 Logical Output Bit 15 = NvarA Bit 14 = PWATT1 Bit 13 = PWATT2 Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = RESERVED Bit 7 = RESERVED Bit 6 = RESERVED Bit 5 = RESERVED Bit 4 = RESERVED Bit 3 = RESERVED Bit 2 = RESERVED Bit 1 = RESERVED Bit 0 = RESERVED 1160 Logical Output Bit 15 = RESERVED Bit 14 = RESERVED Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = RESERVED Bit 7 = RESERVED Bit 6 = RESERVED 1 st Winding 2 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Seal In Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Winding 2 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Seal In Alarm LATCHED Winding 1 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Seal In Alarm Winding 2 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Seal In Alarm Sudden Pressure Seal In Alarm User Logical Output 1 Energized User Logical Output 2 Energized User Logical Output 3 Energized User Logical Output 4 Energized (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bit User Logical Output 5 Energized (msb leftmost ) User Logical Output 6 Energized User Logical Output 7 Energized User Logical Output 8 Energized User Logical Output 9 Energized Load Current Alarm Winding 1 Overcurrent Alarm Winding 2 Overcurrent Alarm Winding 1 High Level Detector Alarm Winding 1 Low Level Detector Alarm Winding 1 High Level Detector Alarm Winding 2 Low Level Detector Alarm High Power Factor Alarm Low Power Factor Alarm 3 Phase kvar Demand Alarm Positive 3 Phase Power Factor Alarm(lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Negative 3 Phase Kvar Alarm(msb leftmost bit) Pwinding 1 Positive 3Phase kwatt Alarm Pwinding 2 Positive 3Phase kwatt Alarm RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits (msb leftmost bit) 92

99 Bit 5 = RESERVED Bit 4 = RESERVED Bit 3 = RESERVED Bit 2 = RESERVED Bit 1 = RESERVED Bit 0 = RESERVED 1161 Logical Input Bit 15 = 87T Bit 14 = 87H Bit 13 = 51P-1 Bit 12 = 51P-2 Bit 11 = 51N-1 Bit 10 =51G-2 (Note 2) Bit 9 = 50P-1 Bit 8 = 50P-2 Bit 7 = 50N-1 51N-2 (Note 3) Bit 6 = 50G-2 (Note 2) 50N-2 (Note 3) Bit 5 = 150P-1 Bit 4 = 150P-2 Bit 3 = 150N-1 Bit 2 = 150G-2 Bit 1 = 46-1 Bit 0 = Logical Input Bit 15 = ALT 1 Bit 14 = ALT 2 Bit 13 = ECI 1 Bit 12 = ECI 2 Bit 11 = WCI Bit 10 =TRIP Bit 9 = SPR Bit 8 = TCM Bit 7 = ULI 1 Bit 6 = ULI 2 Bit 5 = ULI 3 Bit 4 = ULI 4 Bit 3 = ULI 5 Bit 2 = ULI 6 Bit 1 = ULI 7 Bit 0 = ULI 8 (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Two or Three Winding 3 Phase % Differential Current Control Enabled (msb leftmost) Two or Three Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous Differential Current Control. Enabled Winding 1 Phase Time Overcurrent Control Enabled Winding 2 Phase Time Overcurrent Control Enabled Winding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent Control Enabled Winding 2 Ground Time Overcurrent Control Enabled Winding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent Control Enabled 1 st Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 1 st Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 1 st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 1 st Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 1 st Winding 2 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 2 nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 2 nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 2 nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 2 nd Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled Winding 1 Negative Sequence Control Enabled Winding 1 Negative Sequence Control Enabled (lsb rightmost) Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Alternate 1 Settings Enabled (msb leftmost) Alternate 2 Settings Enabled Event Capture 1 Initiated Enabled Event Capture 2 Initiated Enabled Waveform Capture Initiated Initiate Differential Trip Output Contacts Sudden Pressure Input Sensed Trip Coil Monitor Input Sensed User Logical Input 1 Sensed User Logical Input 2 Sensed User Logical Input 3 Sensed User Logical Input 4 Sensed User Logical Input 5 Sensed User Logical Input 6 Sensed User Logical Input 7 Sensed User Logical Input 8 Sensed (lsb rightmost) 1163 Logical Input Unsigned Integer 16 Bits 93

100 Bit 15 = ULI 9 Bit 14 = CRI Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = RESERVED Bit 7 = RESERVED Bit 6 = RESERVED Bit 5 = RESERVED Bit 4 = RESERVED Bit 3 = RESERVED Bit 2 = RESERVED Bit 1 = RESERVED Bit 0 = RESERVED 1164 Logical Input RESERVED 1165 Logical Input Bit 15 = 51P-3 (Note 3) Bit 14 = 51N-3 (Note 3) Bit 13 = 50P-3 (Note 3) Bit 12 = 50N-3 (Note 3) Bit 11 = 150P-3 (Note 3) Bit 10 = 150N-3 (Note3) Bit 9 = 46-3 (Note 3) Bit 8 = 51G Bit 7 = 50G Bit 6 = 150G (Note 3) Bit 5 = ECI3 (Note 3) Bit 4 = RESERVED Bit 3 = RESERVED Bit 2 = RESERVED Bit 1 = RESERVED Bit 0 = RESERVED 1166 Logical Input RESERVED 1167 Logical Input RESERVED 1168 Logical Input RESERVED 1169 Bit 15 = RESERVED Bit 14 = RESERVED Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = RESERVED Bit 7 = OUT 7 User Logical Input 8 Sensed (msb leftmost) Fault and Overcurrent Clear Through Counters Enabled RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (lsb rightmost) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits RESERVED Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled (msb leftmost) Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Control Enabled 1 st Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent Control Enabled 1 st Winding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent Control Enabled 2 nd Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent Control Enabled 2 nd Winding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent Control Enabled Winding 3 Negative Sequence Control Enabled Ground Time Overcurrent Function Enabled 1 st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Enabled 2 nd Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Enabled Storage of Data Fault Summary Capture Initiated RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (lsb rightmost) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits RESERVED Unsigned Integer 16 Bits RESERVED Unsigned Integer 16 Bits RESERVED 16 Bit Unsigned Integer (msb leftmost bit) 94

101 Bit 6 = OUT 6 Bit 5 = OUT 5 Bit 4 = OUT 4 Bit 3 = OUT 3 Bit 2 = OUT 2 Bit 1 = OUT 1 Bit 0 =TRIP 1170 FORCE PHYS IN Bit 15 = RESERVED Bit 14 = RESERVED Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = IN 9 Bit 7 = IN 8 Bit 6 = IN 7 Bit 5 = IN 6 Bit 4 = IN 5 Bit 3 = IN 4 Bit 2 = IN 3 Bit 1 = IN 2 Bit 0 = IN FORCE PHYS IN Bit 15 = RESERVED Bit 14 = RESERVED Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = IN 9 Bit 7 = IN 8 Bit 6 = IN 7 Bit 5 = IN 6 Bit 4 = IN 5 Bit 3 = IN 4 Bit 2 = IN 3 Bit 1 = IN 2 Bit 0 = IN FORCE PHYS IN Bit 15 = RESERVED Bit 14 = RESERVED Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = IN 9 Bit 7 = IN 8 Bit 6 = IN 7 Bit 5 = IN 6 Bit 4 = IN 5 Bit 3 = IN 4 Bit 2 = IN 3 Bit 1 = IN 2 Bit 0 = IN 1 (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits (msb leftmost bit) (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Physical Input Select Status RESERVED (msb leftmost bit) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits Physical Input Bit State RESERVED (msb leftmost bit) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed (lsb rightmost bit) 95

102 1173 Phys Out Bit 15 = RESERVED Bit 14 = RESERVED Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = RESERVED Bit 7 = OUT 7 Bit 6 = OUT 6 Bit 5 = OUT 5 Bit 4 = OUT4 Bit 3 = OUT3 Bit 2 = OUT2 Bit 1 = OUT 1 Bit 0 = TRIP 1174 Phys Out Bit 15 = RESERVED Bit 14 = RESERVED Bit 13 = RESERVED Bit 12 = RESERVED Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = RESERVED Bit 7 = OUT 7 Bit 6 = OUT 6 Bit 5 = OUT 5 Bit 4 = OUT4 Bit 3 = OUT3 Bit 2 = OUT2 Bit 1 = OUT 1 Bit 0 = TRIP 1175 FORCED LOGICAL IN Bit 15 = FLI 17 Bit 14 = FLI 18 Bit 13 = FLI 19 Bit 12 = FLI 20 Bit 11 = FLI 21 Bit 10 = FLI 22 Bit 9 = FLI 23 Bit 8 = FLI 24 Bit 7 = FLI 25 Bit 6 = FLI 26 Bit 5 = FLI 27 Bit 4 = FLI 28 Bit 3 = FLI 29 Bit 2 = FLI 30 Bit 1 = FLI 31 Bit 0 = FLI FORCED LOGICAL IN Bit 15 = FLI 1 Bit 14 = FLI 2 Bit 13 = FLI 3 Bit 12 = FLI 4 Bit 11 = FLI 5 16 Bit Unsigned Integer Physical Output Select Status RESERVED (msb leftmost bit) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced 0 = Normal : 1 = Forced (lsb rightmost bit) 16 Bit Unsigned Integer Physical Output Select State RESERVED(msb leftmost bit) RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed 0 = Open : 1 = Closed (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits FLI Select Status 0 = Normal : 1= Forced (msb leftmost bit) 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits FLI Select Status 0 = Normal : 1= Forced (msb leftmost bit) 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 96

103 Bit 10 = FLI 6 Bit 9 = FLI 7 Bit 8 = FLI 8 Bit 7 = FLI 9 Bit 6 = FLI 10 Bit 5 = FLI 11 Bit 4 = FLI 12 Bit 3 = FLI 13 Bit 2 = FLI 14 Bit 1 = FLI 15 Bit 0 = FLI FORCED LOGICAL IN Bit 15 = FLI 17 Bit 14 = FLI 18 Bit 13 = FLI 19 Bit 12 = FLI 20 Bit 11 = FLI 21 Bit 10 = FLI 22 Bit 9 = FLI 23 Bit 8 = FLI 24 Bit 7 = FLI 25 Bit 6 = FLI 26 Bit 5 = FLI 27 Bit 4 = FLI 28 Bit 3 = FLI 29 Bit 2 = FLI 30 Bit 1 = FLI 31 Bit 0 = FLI FORCED LOGICAL IN Bit 15 = FLI 1 Bit 14 = FLI 2 Bit 13 = FLI 3 Bit 12 = FLI 4 Bit 11 = FLI 5 Bit 10 = FLI 6 Bit 9 = FLI 7 Bit 8 = FLI 8 Bit 7 = FLI 9 Bit 6 = FLI 10 Bit 5 = FLI 11 Bit 4 = FLI 12 Bit 3 = FLI 13 Bit 2 = FLI 14 Bit 1 = FLI 15 Bit 0 = FLI Phys Out Bit 15 = 51P-3 Bit 14 = 50P-3 Bit 13 = 150P-3 Bit 12 = 51N-3 Bit 11 = 50N-3 Bit 10 = 150N-3 Bit 9 = = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced 0 = Normal : 1= Forced (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits FLI Point State 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (msb leftmost bit) 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (lsb rightmost bit) Unsigned Integer 16 Bits 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (msb leftmost bit) 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized 0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (lsb rightmost bit) 16 Bit Unsigned Integer Physical Output Select Status Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent Alarm (msb leftmost bit) 1 st Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm 2 nd Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm Winding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent Alarm 1 st Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm 2 nd Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm Winding 3 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent 97

104 Bit 8 = 51G Bit 7 = 50 G Bit 6 = 150G Bit 5 = 51P-3D Bit 4 = 51N-3D Bit 3 = 50P-3D Bit 2 = 50N-3D Bit 1 = 150P-3D Bit 0 = 150N-3D 1180 Phys Out Bit 15 = 46-3 Bit 14 = 51GD Bit 13 = 50GD Bit 12 = 150GD Bit 11 = 51P-3 (L) Bit 10 = 50P-3 (L) Bit 9 = 150P-3 (L) Bit 8 = 51N-3 (L) Bit 7 = 50N-3 (L) Bit 6 = 150N-3 (L) Bit 5 = 46-3 (L) Bit 4 = 51G (L) Bit 3 = 50G (L) Bit 2 = 150G (L) 1181 Phys Out Bit 1 = TFKA-3 (Note 1) Bit 0 = HLDA-3 Bit 15 = LLDA 3 Bit 14 = OCA-3 Bit 13 = Pwatt3 Bit 12 = OCA Gnd Bit 11 = RESERVED Bit 10 = RESERVED Bit 9 = RESERVED Bit 8 = RESERVED Bit 7 = RESERVED Alarm 1 st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm Ground Time Overcurrent Alarm 2 nd Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 1 st Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm Winding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 2 nd Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 2 nd Winding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm (lsb rightmost bit) 16 Bit Unsigned Integer Winding 3 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Alarm (msb leftmost bit) 1 st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Alarm 1 st Winding 3 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled 2 nd Winding 3 Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Function Disabled Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED 1 st Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED Winding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED 1 st Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED Winding 3 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED 1 st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED Ground Time Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED 2 nd Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED Through Fault Counter Alarm Winding 3 High Level Detector Alarm (lsb rightmost bit) 16 Bit Unsigned Integer Physical Output Select Status Winding 3 Low Level Detector Alarm (msb leftmost bit) Winding 3 Overcurrent Alarm Winding 3 Positive 3 Phase Watt Alarm Ground Overcurrent Alarm RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED 98

105 Bit 6 = RESERVED Bit 5 = RESERVED Bit 4 = RESERVED Bit 3 = RESERVED Bit 2 = RESERVED Bit 1 = RESERVED Bit 0 = RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED (lsb rightmost bit) NOTE 1: Drop Out Time is 3 cycles for Alarm Signals. The alarms activate with each operation or power-up until the counters are reset. The counter alarms are reset when the targets are reset. NOTE 2: Two Winding Relay Only NOTE 3: Three Winding Relay Only (L): This signal is latched and is only reset upon a protocol control command (Section 5), WIN ECP, ECP, or Front Panel Interface reset sequence. Source Scale Range and Source Scale Type Selections Explained Scaling is determined by a simple formula depending upon the SCALE TYPE, FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR, SCALING OPTION, and DESTINATION LENGTH, values. Each of the 4X registers defined within the Modbus Protocol Document are classified by being a Current Value, Voltage Value, or Power Value. If one of these aforementioned scale types are selected, the value in the FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR field is designated as the maximum value of the unscaled source value. If the source value is above the configured FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR field value, the maximum value (as shown in Table X) will be reported as the destination register scaled value. The values within the relay may be scaled by an integer factor if a normal or remainder scaling type is selected. If one of aforementioned selections are within the FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR selection field then the selection is automatically the scale factor. The allowable values for the FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR field are from 1 to This is equivalent to the secondary quantities and the relationship to the primary quantities being scaled as per said formulas below. (which should be familiar to those of you who are old transducer engineers.) If one of the voltage, current, or power SCALE TYPES are selected, then one or more of the following CT /PT ratio values must be known to compute the destination scaled value. The quantities which must be known to compute the equations for scaling are: 158: Unsigned Short Phase CT (CT) 159: Unsigned Short Neutral CT Ratio (CT) 160: Unsigned Short PT Ratio (PT) The values may be viewed from the ECP/WinECP program as illustrated in Figure 8-2. IF OFFSET BIPOLAR CURRENT IS SELECTED EQUATION 5: Register Value = (2 N-1 *Source Value / [FS * CT Ratio])+2 N-1-1 IF OFFSET BIPOLAR VOLTAGE IS SELECTED EQUATION 6: Register Value = (2 N-1 *Source Value / [FS * PT Ratio])+2 N-1-1 IF OFFSET BIPOLAR POWER IS SELECTED EQUATION 7: Register Value = (2 N-1 *Source Value / [FS * CT Ratio * PT Ratio])+2 N-1-1 IF NORMAL SCALING IS SELECTED EQUATION 8: Register Value = Source Value / Scale 99

106 IF REMAINDER SCALING IS SELECTED EQUATION 9: Register Value = Remainder of [Source Value/Scale] (commonly referred to as the modulus function). IF BIPOLAR CURRENT IS SELECTED EQUATION 10: Register Value = (2 N-1 *Source Value / [FS * CT Ratio]) IF BIPOLAR VOLTAGE IS SELECTED EQUATION 11: Register Value = (2 N-1 *Source Value / [FS * PT Ratio]) IF BIPOLAR POWER IS SELECTED EQUATION 12: Register Value = (2 N-1 *Source Value / [FS * CT Ratio * PT Ratio]) One should notice that if equations 5, 6, 7, 10, 11,or 12 are used, the SCALE entry shown in Figure 8-2, refers to the full scale value referenced in the equations. If equations 8 or 9 are used, the SCALE entry shown in Figure 8-2 refers to the Scale divisor denominator as referenced. TPU2000 and 2000R User Definable Register Defaults The TPU2000 and 2000R contains User Definable Register default mappings as shown in Table 5-12 below. It should be noted that the register shall saturate at the maximum values computed and shown in Table 5-11 above. The maximum saturation value can be computed to be 2N-1 where N is the register size in bits. Table Default Scaling and Remapping Register Assignments User Definable Register Type Start Register FS or Description Register (Bits) (Bits/Type) Scale(Type) 1: INDEX 97 Unipolar (16) (16/Unsigned) 1(Normal) Relay Status 2: INDEX 98 Offset Bipolar (12) (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current A(Wdg 2) 3: INDEX 99 Offset Bipolar (12) (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current B(Wdg 2) 4: INDEX 100 Offset Bipolar (12) (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current C(Wdg 2) 5: INDEX 101 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Unsigned) 150 (Voltage) Voltage VAN 6: INDEX 102 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Unsigned) 150 (Voltage) Voltage VBN 7: INDEX 103 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Unsigned) 150 (Voltage) Voltage VCN 8: INDEX 104 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 3000 (Power) 3 Phase Watts 9: INDEX 105 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 3000 (Power) 3 Phase VARs 10:INDEX 106 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase A Watts 11:INDEX 107 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase B Watts 12:INDEX 108 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase C Watts 13:INDEX 109 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase A VARs 14:INDEX 110 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase B VARs 15: INDEX111 Offset Bipolar (12) (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase C VARs 16: INDEX 112 Unipolar (16) (16/Unsigned) 1 (Normal) Phase CT Ratio 17: INDEX 113 Unipolar (16) (16/Unsigned) 1 (Normal) PT Ratio 18: INDEX 114 Offset Bipolar (12) (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current N 19:INDEX 115 Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) (Normal) Pos 3 Phase kwatthours (High) 20:INDEX 116 Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) (Remainder) Pos 3 Phase kwatthours (Low) 21: INDEX 117 Neg Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) (Normal) Neg 3 Phase kwatthours (High) 100

107 STAT US NORMAL FAIL PICKUP RECLOSER OUT SYSTEM RESET TA RGET S A B C N TIME INSTANTANEOUS FREQUENCY NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TARGET RESET DPU 2000R Network Partner V1.0 C E 22: INDEX 118 Neg Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) Pos 3 Phase (Remainder) kwatthours (Low) 23: INDEX 119 Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) Pos 3 Phase (Normal) kvarhours (High) 24: INDEX 120 Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) Pos 3 Phase (Remainder) kvarhours (Low) 25: INDEX 121 Neg Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) Neg 3 Phase (Normal) kvarhours (High) 26: INDEX 122 Neg Unipolar (16) (32/Signed) Neg 3 Phase (Remainder) kvarhours (Low) 27:INDEX 123 Unipolar (16) (16/Unsigned) 1 (Normal) System Frequency 28: INDEX 124 No Default No Default No Default Spare 29: INDEX 125 No Default No Default No Default Spare 30: INDEX 126 No Default No Default No Default Spare 31: INDEX 127 No Default No Default No Default Spare 32: INDEX 128 No Default No Default No Default Spare An explanation of some of the above default mappings are offered as a guide to understanding the scaling methodology implementation. Figure X illustrates the scaling procedure for Indicies 98 through 100. Registers 257, 259, and 261 (as detailed in Table 5-12 above) contain the MMI reported current values to be remapped and re-scaled to 12 bit Offset Bipolar Values DPU2000R Ia Current Mag. 32 Mappable Registers OFFSET BIPOLAR 12 bit resolution 0 = (-) Full Scale (12 bits -1) 2-1 = 2047 = 0 (12 bits) 2-1 = 4095 = (+) Full Scale Ib Current Mag Ic Current Mag REFERENCE TABLE 2 DPU 2000(R) Register Contents in Register 40002, 40003, or RTU or Host Reads 4095 DPU 2000(R) MMI Display or Register Contents of 40257, et al (+) Full Scale = 10 A RTU or Host Reads Amperes RTU or Host Reads 0 (-) Full Scale = -10 A Figure Register Scaling Default Example The mathematics to determine the reported value to the host is illustrated in Figure 8-8 and using Equation 5 above. Full Scale = 10 A CT Ratio (Current Calculation) = 100:1 (as per the default screen shown in Figure 8-2) Source Value Location = 259 [neglect the leading 4] 16 Bit Value Signed Calculate the 12 bit scaled reading when the TPU2000R indicates 5A for Ia. (12 bits -1) (12 bits -1) (( 2 * 5A)/(10 A * 100)) +(2-1) = 3071 counts. Thus Equation 7 illustrates that a current of 5A displayed on the MMI shall indicate a count of 3071 reported to the SCADA Host when register is read. The SCADA host shall then interpret it and display it on its host screen as 5 A. 101

108 STATUS NORMAL FAIL PICKUP RECLOSER OUT SYSTEM RESET TARGETS TIME INSTANTANEOUS FREQUENCY NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TARGET RESET Network Partner V1.0 C E Perhaps another example shall suffice. The TPU2000/2000R also meters voltages. The next example illustrates the scaling which occurs for the default registers 40005, 40006, and Figure 8-8 shows the scale algorithm application for scaling to an Offset Bipolar 12 bit number DPU2000R A B C N DPU 2000R Va Voltage Mag. Hi Va Voltage Mag. Lo VbVoltage Mag. Hi VbVoltage Mag. Lo 32 Mappable Registers Change Register Configuration OFFSET BIPOLAR 12 bit resolution 0 = (-) Full Scale (12 bits -1) 2-1 = 2047 = 0 (12 bits) 2-1 = 4095 = (+) Full Scale Vc Voltage Mag. Hi Vc Voltage Mag. Lo Value stored in Registers 40005, 40006,and read by the SCADA Host. RTU or Host Reads 4095 DPU 2000/2000R Metered Value reported to the MMI SCREEN (+) Full Scale = V RTU or Host Reads Amperes RTU or Host Reads 0 (-) Full Scale = V The values used for this example are: Figure Scaling Example for Voltage Mapped Registers Full Scale = 150 V PT Ratio (Current Calculation) = 100:1 Source Value Location = 265 [neglect the leading 4] 32 Bit Value Unsigned Using Equation 6 the following results when calculating the numeric value reported to the SCADA host when register 40005, or is accessed. (12 bits -1) (12 bits -1) (( 2 * 11884)/(500 * 100)) + (2-1) = counts = 3699 When the front panel MMI reads V, a value of 3699 is reported to the SCADA host. One final example is illustrated for transferring values from different areas in the protective relay to the default table. Such values as Relay status (located in register and transferred to 40001), Phase CT ratio (used by the SCADA host to provide for scale conversion located in Register and transferred to 40016), PT ratio (used by the SCADA host to provide for scale conversion in Register and transferred to 40017), and system frequency (located in Register 40027). The transfer of registers to a block is accomplished by using equation 8 and providing a scale factor of 1. Thus the contents of the source register are divided by 1 and transferred to the User Definable Register Table. It is important that the scale type of 16 be use d to ensure the transfer is not scaled. 102

109 Section 6 - DNP 3.0 Communication Troubleshooting DNP 3.0 is a very involved protocol. Many individuals when troubleshooting the network lack the appropriate tools to view the communication strings passed between the host and the TPU2000/2000R. The most common issues, which arise when commissioning a DNP 3.0 network, are as follows: 1. Improper host/tpu2000 or TPU2000R parameterization. Most individuals when setting the mode parameters select the defaults. Perhaps the most trouble is that the host has parameters for response in excess of those expected of the IED. The most critical parameter causing communication malfunction is device timeout (Parameter 4). Other issues are that all data is enabled via Groups. It is recommended that the device timeout parameter be maximized until communication occurs between the host. The value can be decreased later to efficiently tune communication speeds. Decrease Parameters 5,6,7, and 8 to 0,0,0,0. Thus enabling Group 0. Thus the minimum of data is transmitted upon a class or event request, thus allowing for network tuning. 2. Improper RS232 or RS485 cabling. Refer to Section 3 of this document. 3. Selecting a physical interface converter which cannot support DNP 3.0 communications. Additionally, some converters require additional configuration to set the data transfer on a RD line instead of RTS/CTS handshaking. 4. Improper Host Addressing. Remember, the TPU2000 and TPU2000R s address is in HEX. It is imperative that a complete understanding of the protocol exists by the implementor. It is recommended that the DNP 3.0 Texts be consulted (GE-HARRIS DNP 3.0 manual is especially beneficial). Several Websites are also available such as: It is also recommended that a communication analyzer package be available. One of many which has been used in the process is manufactured by Applied System Engineering of Sunnyvale, CA. The ASE DNP 3.0 test set allows (depending upon the model selected), the user to decode command strings between the devices, allow the test set to be a slave device, and/or allow the test set to be a host device. Many hosts also offer these same capabilities with respect to datascope or communication analyzer features. Some even offers communication string decodes capabilities. 103

110 Appendix A - ASCII CODE Decimal Hexadecimal Control Value Value Character Character 0 00 NUL Null 1 01 SOH (CTRL A) 2 02 STX ( CTRL B) 3 03 ETX (CTRL C) 4 04 EOT (CTRL D) 5 05 ENQ (CTRL E) 6 06 ACK(CTRL F) 7 07 BEL (CTRL G) Beep 8 08 BS (CTRL H) Backspace 9 09 HT (CTRL I) Tab 10 0A LF (CTRL J) Line-feed 11 0B VT (CTRL K) Cursor home 12 0C FF (CTRL M) Form-feed 13 0D CR (CTRL N) Carriage Return (Enter) 14 0E SO (CTRL O) Shift Out 15 0F SI (CTRL P) Shift In DLE Data Link Escape DCI DC DC DC NAK SYN ETB CAN EM 26 1A SUB 27 1B ESC 28 1C Cursor right 29 1D Cursor left 30 1E Cursor up 31 1F Cursor down Space 33 21! # $ % & ( ( 42 2A * 43 2B C, 45 2D E. 47 2F /

111 A 59 3B 60 3C < 61 3D 62 3E > 63 3F? A B C D E F G H I 74 4A J 75 4B K 76 4C L 77 4D M 78 4E N 79 4F O P Q R S T U V W X Y 90 5A Z 91 5B [ 92 5C \ 93 5D ] 94 5E ^ 95 5F _ a b c d e f g h i 106 6A j 107 6B k 108 6C l 109 6D m 110 6E n 105

112 111 6F o p q r s t u v w x y 122 7A z 123 7B { 124 7C 125 7D } 126 7E ~ F DEL 106

113 Appendix B - TPU2000 Protocol Command Set Revision Revision History Revision Date Author Description /07/98 VAB : maximum CT ratio was 2000 for messages 2/1-4/2. Maximum VT ratio was 2000 for message 20/1-20/2. 107

114 The valid commands for the TPU2000 relay are listed below. The words transmit and receive in the command are with respect to the relay. The commands are spelt out in a 10 byte RS-232 protocol or a 3 byte INCOM protocol. It will be easy to understand the commands in a 33 bit INCOM context and then translate the protocol to a 10 byte RS-232 protocol. The protocol messages are of two types - command and data. Bit Command Message (33 bit INCOM) S S C/D Inst Cmd Subcmd Address BCH S to 7 8 to to to to Figure 2 - Command Message (INCOM) Bit Data Message (33 bit INCOM) S S C/D Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 BCH S to to to to Figure 3 - Data Message (INCOM) These INCOM message types can be represented in a 10 byte RS-232 protocol as follows: Byte STX C/D Inst Command Message (10 byte RS-232) Cmd SCmd Addr Lo Addr Mid Addr Hi CS Lo CS Hi Figure 4 - Command Message (10 byte RS 232) The address bytes, Addr Lo, Addr Mid, and Addr Hi, are a 3 digit hex address. The checksum is 256 minus the sum of the ASCII characters in bytes 1 to 8. CS Lo is the low byte and CS Hi is the high byte of the checksum. Example (3 4 1 command with a unit address of 001) STX = hex 02 = use 2 -->Start of transmission C/D = hex 31 = ascii 1 -->Command type of message Inst = hex 33 = ascii 3 -->Instruction byte Cmd = hex 34 = ascii 4 -->Command byte SCmd = hex 31 = ascii 1 -->Subcommand byte Addr Lo = hex 31 = ascii 1 -->Unit address low byte Addr Mid = hex 30 = ascii 0 -->Unit address mid byte Addr Hi = hex 30 = ascii 0 -->Unit address high byte CS Lo = hex 34 = ascii 4 -->Checksum low byte CS Hi = hex 46 = ascii F -->Checksum high byte Checksum = (STX + C/D + Inst + Cmd + SCmd + Addr Lo + Addr Mid + Addr Hi) ( ) = F4 Byte Data Message (10 byte RS-232) STX C/D D1 Lo D1 Hi D2 Lo D2 Hi D3 Lo D3 Hi CS Lo CS Hi Figure 5 - Data Message (10 byte RS 232) 108

115 Where D1 Lo is the low nibble of the first data byte and D1 Hi is the high nibble of the first data byte, D2 Lo is the low nibble of the second data byte and D2 Hi is the high nibble of the second data byte, and D3 Lo is the low nibble of the third data byte and D3 Hi is the high nibble of the third data byte. The checksum is 256 minus the sum of the ASCII characters in bytes 1 to 8. CS Lo is the low byte and CS Hi is the high byte of the checksum. Example (3 data bytes, ascii characters 4, 8, and 7) STX = hex 2 --> Start of transmission C/D = hex 0 --> Data type of message D1 Lo = hex 4 --> Data 1 low byte D1 Hi = hex 3 --> Data 1 high byte D2 Lo = hex 8 --> Data 2 low byte D2 Hi = hex 3 --> Data 2 high byte D3 Lo = hex 7 --> Data 3 low byte D3 Hi = hex 3 --> Data 3 high byte CS Lo = hex 2 --> Checksum low byte CS Hi = hex E --> Checksum high byte The three data bytes translate to: Data 1 = 34 --> ascii 4 Data 2 = 38 --> ascii 8 Data 3 = 37 --> ascii 7 Checksum = (STX + C/D + D1L + D1H + D2L + D2H + D3L + D3H) ( ) = E2 Transmission and reception convention To acknowledge successful receipt of a message, an ACK is transmitted. The three byte message packet is 0x For an unsuccessful reception, ie. a checksum error or an error in command processing, a NACK is transmitted. The three byte message packet is 0x The commands for the TPU2000 relay can be catagorized into three basic types according to the response that is expected by the master. When a command or data is received, the TPU2000 must acknowledge if the reception was successful. 1-Simple Commands: A simple command directs the TPU2000 to perform specific actions. After the successful completion of these actions, the TPU2000 transmits an ACK as seen below. Master Command ACK DPU2000 Figure 6 - Simple Command Communication Flow 2-Upload Data This type of command requests the TPU2000 to transmit specific data. The proper transmission of this data is the TPU2000 acknowledge of this type of command as seen below. 109

116 Master Command Data. Data Data DPU2000 Figure 7 - Upload Data Communication Flow 3-Download Data: These commands edit the TPU2000 data. The TPU2000 responds with an ACK after the successful receipt of each data message packet. This can be seen in the figure below. Master Command ACK Data ACK Data. Data ACK DPU2000 Figure 8 - Download Data Communication Flow Message Packet Checksum: This checksum is different than the checksum associated with every incom message packet. The value of the checksum is contained in a two byte integer and is the summation of all message bytes (1/1 + 1/2 + 1/3 + 2/1 + 2/2 +...) for the command. The only exception is that the checksum message bytes are not included in the summation. Example (3 3 1 command): (values are hex equivalent of the ASCII) 1/1 = hex 05 3/1 = hex 44 1/2 = hex 31 3/2 = hex 00 1/3 = hex 04 3/3 = hex 00 2/1 = hex 00 4/1 = hex 00 2/2 = hex 01 4/2 = hex 00 <-- checksum high byte 2/3 = hex 44 4/3 = hex C3 <-- checksum low byte Command Set Summary Inst Cmd Subcmd Definition 3 0 n Status Commands 3 1 n 3 2 n 3 3 n Transmit Settings Commands 3 4 n Transmit Settings Commands 3 5 n Transmit Meter/Record Commands 3 6 n Load Profile/Record Commands 3 7 n Transmit Meter Commands 3 8 n 3 9 n Relay Commands 110

117 3 10 n Receive Edit Buffer Commands 3 11 n Receive Edit Buffer Commands 3 12 n 3 13 n Programmable Curve Commands 3 14 n Waveform Capture Commands 3 15 n Reserved for Factory 0 Transmit Status "N" Commands ( 3 0 n ) 0.0 Transmit Fast Status ( ) N Definition 0 Transmit Fast Status 1 Reserved 2 Unit Information 3 Reserved 4 Unreported Record Status 5 Reset Alarms/Target LEDs 6 Reset Max/Min Demand Currents 7 Show Logical I/O status This command will cause the relay to respond with one data message with the format shown below: byte 3 byte 2 byte 1 ST2 ST1 L T4 T3 T2 T1 T0 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 A3 A2 A1 A0 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 => Division Code. RTD division code is 5(000101) A3 A2 A1 A0 => A0 - One/More Unreported Operations A1 - Reserved A2,A3 - Reserved P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 => Product ID. (TPU2000 = ) T2 T1 T0 => Reserved T4 T3 => Reserved L => Reserved for local operator interface action. ST2 ST1 => Reserved for corporate standard status bits. 0.2 Unit Information ( ) This command will cause the relay to transmit data messages containing catalog number and the software version. 0.3 RCVDALL ( ) - Reserved - 1/1-5/3 Catalog Number (18 characters) 6/1 CPU Software Version high byte (*100) 6/2 CPU Software Version low byte 6/3 DSP Software Version (*10) 7/1 Front Panel Software Version (*10) 7/2 Rear Communication Software version (*10) 7/3 Serial Number most significant low byte 8/1 Serial Number least significant high byte 8/2 Serial Number least significant low byte 8/3 Serial Number most significant high byte 111

118 0.4 Unreported Record Status ( ) This command will respond with the number of unacknowledged operation and fault records. To mark the record as being reported, a command will retrieve the oldest unreported differential fault record and decrement the unreported differential fault record counter by one. Likewise, a command will retrieve the oldest unreported through fault record and decrement the unreported through fault record counter by one. The command will retrieve the oldest unreported harmonic restraint record and decrement the unreported harmonic restraint record counter by one. The command will retrieve the oldest unreported operations record and decrement the unreported operations record counter by one. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x04 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 4 2/1 Unreported Differential Fault Record Count byte 2/2 Unreported Through Fault Record Count byte 2/3 Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record Count byte 3/1 Unreported Operations Record Count byte 3/2 Spare 3/3 Spare 4/1 Spare 4/2 Spare 4/3 Spare 0.5 Reset Alarms/Target LEDs ( ) The targets, alarms and relay status flag (see command msg 2/1) will be reset on the TPU. After the relay receives this command it will transmit an ACK/NACK based on the TPU completing the command. 0.6 Reset Max/Min Demand Currents ( ) This command will reset the maximum and minimum demand current values along with their time tags. After the relay receives this command it will transmit an ACK/NACK based on the TPU completing the command. 0.7 Show Logical Input/Output Status ( ) This command displays the binary value of the logical input and output table for the present state of the unit. Bit = 0, Input Disabled/Output Not Energized Bit = 1, Input Enabled/Output Energized Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input 1-7 DIFF 87T 2-7 TFA 50N ALARM 87H P-1 50G T 51P P-2 150P H 51P P-1 150P HROA 51N P-1 150N HROA 51G P-2 150G AHROA 50P P TCFA 50P N

119 Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input G-2 ALT H-D ULI N-1 ALT P-1D ULI N-1 ECI P-2D ULI G-2 ECI N-1D ULI G-2 WCI G-2D ULI TRIP P-1D ULI SPR P-2D ULI T-D TCM N-1D ULI8 Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input G-2D ULI9 6-7 PBTA P-1D CRI 6-6 PCTA P-2D 6-5 PUA N-1D G-2D 6-3 THRUFA D 6-2 TFCA D 6-1 TFKA 5-0 PATA 6-0 TFSCA Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input 7-7 DTC T* 7-6 OCTC H* 7-5 PDA 8-5 2HROA* 7-4 NDA 8-4 5HROA* 7-3 PRIM 8-3 AHROA* 7-2 ALT P-1* 7-1 ALT P-2* 7-0 STCA P-1* Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input P-1* G-2* P-2* * P-2* * N-1* * G-2* 10-3 ULO N-1* 10-2 ULO N-1* 10-1 ULO G-2* 10-0 ULO4 Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input 11-7 ULO HLDA ULO LLDA ULO HLDA ULO LLDA ULO HPFA 11-2 LOADA 12-2 LPFA 11-1 OCA VarDA 11-0 OCA PVArA Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input 13-7 NVArA 14-7 Spare 13-6 PWatt Spare 13-5 PWatt Spare 13-4 Spare 14-4 Spare 13-3 Spare 14-3 Spare 13-2 Spare 14-2 Spare 113

120 13-1 Spare 14-1 Spare 13-0 Spare 14-0 Spare Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x07 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 12 2/1 Logical Output byte 1 2/2 Logical Output byte 2 2/3 Logical Output byte 3 3/1 Logical Output byte 4 3/2 Logical Output byte 5 3/3 Logical Output byte 6 4/1 Logical Output byte 7 4/2 Logical Output byte 8 4/3 Logical Output byte 9 5/1 Logical Output byte 10 5/2 Logical Output byte 11 5/3 Logical Output byte 12 6/1 Logical Output byte 13 6/2 Logical Output byte 14 6/3 Logical Output byte 15 7/1 Logical Output byte 16 7/2 Logical Input byte 1 7/3 Logical Input byte 2 8/1 Logical Input byte 3 8/2 Logical Input byte 4 8/3 Logical Input byte 5 9/1 Logical Input byte 6 9/2 Logical Input byte 7 9/3 Logical Input byte 8 10/1 Logical Input byte 9 10/2 Logical Input byte 10 10/3 Logical Input byte 11 11/1 Logical Input byte 12 11/2 Logical Input byte 13 11/3 Logical Input byte 14 12/1 Logical Input byte 15 12/2 Logical Input byte 16 12/3 Spare 12/1 Spare 12/2 Checksum High byte 12/3 Checksum Low byte 1 Transmit Buffer "N" Commands ( 3 1 n ) N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 1 n 1 Register Based Communication Command 1.1 Transmit Register Based Data Set ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Block Number (0-255) 1/2 Offset Number (0-255) 1/3 Number of Bytes to Retrieve (NumBytes)(3-132) in multiples of 3 114

121 Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status Byte Bit 7: Control Power Cycled Bit 6: New Fault Recorded Bit 5: Alternate 2 Settings Active Bit 4: Alternate 1 Settings Active Bit 3: Remote Edit Disable Bit 2: Local Settings Changed Bit 1: Contact Input Chnaged Bit 0: Selftest Status 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xXY 1/3 Total Number of Messages (TotalMsg = 1+(Num Bytes/3)) 2/1 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number 2/2 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + 1 2/3 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number TotalMsg/1 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + NumBytes - 3 TotalMsg/2 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + NumBytes - 2 TotalMsg/3 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + NumBytes - 1 Data Type Definitions Value Ranges Unsigned Byte (0 to 255) Signed Byte (-128 to 127) Unsigned Short (0 to 65535) Signed Short (-32,768 to 32767) Unsigned Long (0 to 4,294,967,295) Signed Long (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647) Note: Data Byte Order follows the Low Address -High Byte, High Address - Low Byte Convention. TPU2000/R Register Based Communication Definitions BLK 0: SYSTEM STATUS/CONFIGURATION BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Unsigned Word Relay Status Bit 15-11: Spare Bit 10: New Minimum Demand Value Bit 9: New Peak Demand Value Bit 8: New Operation Recorded Bit 7: Control Power Cycled Bit 6: New Fault Recorded Bit 5: Alternate 2 Settings Active Bit 4: Alternate 1 Settings Active Bit 3: Remote Edit Disable Bit 2: Local Settings Changed Bit 1: Contact Input Changed Bit 0: Selftest Status Offset 2: Unsigned Long Diagnostic Status Flag Bit 31-16: Spare Bit 15: DSP COP FAILURE Bit 14: DSP +5V FAILURE Bit 13: DSP +/-15V FAILURE Bit 12: DSP +/-5V FAILURE Bit 11: DSP ADC FAILURE Bit 10: DSP EXT RAM FAILURE 115

122 Bit 9: DSP INT RAM FAILURE Bit 8: DSP ROM FAILURE Bit 7: Spare Bit 6: Spare Bit 5: Spare Bit 4: Spare Bit 3: CPU EEPROM FAILURE Bit 2: CPU NVRAM FAILURE Bit 1: CPU EPROM FAILURE Bit 0: CPU RAM FAILURE Offset 6: Unsigned Word Relay Configuration Bit 15-4: Spare Bit 3: 0=kWhr/kVarhr, 1=MWhr/MVarhr Bit 2: 0= Wye PT, 1=Delta PT Bit 1,0: Meter Winding Mode (0=Winding 1, 1=Winding2, 2=Winding3) Offset 8:20 Char String(NULL Term) Catalog Number Offset 28: Unsigned Short 100 CPU Software Version Number Offset 30: Unsigned Short 10 Analog/DSP Software Version Number Offset 32: Unsigned Short 10 Front Panel Controller Software Version Number Offset 34: Unsigned Short 10 Auxillary Communication Software Version Number Offset 36: Unsigned Long 1 Serial Number Offset 40: 18 Char String (NULL Term) Unit Name BLK 1: DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT/ANGULAR/HARMONIC VALUES BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Unsigned Word 800 Operate Current-A Offset 2: Unsigned Word 800 Operate Current-B Offset 4: Unsigned Word 800 Operate Current-C Offset 6: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-A Winding 1 Offset 8: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-B Winding 1 Offset 10: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-C Winding 1 Offset 12: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-A Winding 2 Offset 14: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-B Winding 2 Offset 16: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-C Winding 2 Offset 18: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-A Winding 3 Offset 20: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-B Winding 3 Offset 22: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-C Winding 3 Offset 24: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-A Winding 1 Offset 26: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 1 Offset 28: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-C Winding 1 Offset 30: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-A Winding 2 Offset 32: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 2 Offset 34: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-C Winding 2 Offset 36: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-A Winding 3 Offset 38: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 3 Offset 40: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-C Winding 3 Offset 42: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 3 Offset 44: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-A Winding 1 Offset 45: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-B Winding 1 Offset 46: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-C Winding 1 Offset 47: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-A Winding 1 Offset 48: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-B Winding 1 Offset 49: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-C Winding 1 Offset 50: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-A Winding 1 Offset 51: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-B Winding 1 Offset 52: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-C Winding 1 Offset 53: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-A Winding 2 116

123 Offset 54: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-B Winding 2 Offset 55: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-C Winding 2 Offset 56: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-A Winding 2 Offset 57: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-B Winding 2 Offset 58: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-C Winding 2 Offset 59: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-A Winding 2 Offset 60: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-B Winding 2 Offset 61: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-C Winding 2 Offset 62: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-A Winding 3 Offset 63: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-B Winding 3 Offset 64: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-C Winding 3 Offset 65: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-A Winding 3 Offset 66: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-B Winding 3 Offset 67: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-C Winding 3 Offset 68: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-A Winding 3 Offset 69: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-B Winding 3 Offset 70: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-C Winding 3 Offset 71 Unsigned Byte 10 Current Tap Scale Winding 1 Offset 72 Unsigned Byte 10 Current Tap Scale Winding 2 Offset 73 Unsigned Byte 10 Current Tap Scale Winding 3 BLK 2: RMS LOAD CURRENT/ANGULAR VALUES BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-A Winding 1 Offset 4: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-B Winding 1 Offset 8: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-C Winding 1 Offset 12: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-N Winding 1 Offset 16: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-A Winding 2 Offset 20: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-B Winding 2 Offset 24: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-C Winding 2 Offset 28: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-G Winding 2 Offset 32: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-A Winding 3 Offset 36: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-B Winding 3 Offset 40: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-C Winding 3 Offset 44: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-N Winding 3 Offset 48: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-A Angle Winding 1 Offset 50: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-B Angle Winding 1 Offset 52: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-C Angle Winding 1 Offset 54: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-N Angle Winding 1 Offset 56: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-A Angle Winding 2 Offset 58: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-B Angle Winding 2 Offset 60: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-C Angle Winding 2 Offset 62: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-G Angle Winding 2 Offset 64: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-A Angle Winding 3 Offset 66: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-B Angle Winding 3 Offset 68: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-C Angle Winding 3 Offset 70: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-N Angle Winding 3 Offset 72: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Winding 1 Offset 76: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Winding 1 Offset 80: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Winding 1 Offset 84: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Winding 2 Offset 88: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Winding 2 Offset 92: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Winding 2 Offset 96: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Winding 3 Offset 100: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Winding 3 Offset 104: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Winding 3 Offset 108: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Winding 1 Offset 110: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Angle Winding 1 Offset 112: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Angle Winding 1 117

124 Offset 114: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Winding 2 Offset 116: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Angle Winding 2 Offset 118: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Angle Winding 2 Offset 120: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Winding 3 Offset 122: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Angle Winding 3 Offset 124: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Angle Winding 3 BLK 3: RMS VOLTAGE/ANGULAR/REAL and REACTIVE POWER/ENERGY VALUES BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage VA Offset 4: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage VB Offset 8: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage VC Offset 12: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage VA Angle Offset 14: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage VB Angle Offset 16: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage VC Angle Offset 18: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage Positive Sequence Offset 22: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage Negative Sequence Offset 26: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage Positive Sequence Angle Offset 28: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage Negative Sequence Angle Offset 30: Signed Long 1 kwatts A Offset 34: Signed Long 1 kwatts B Offset 38: Signed Long 1 kwatts C Offset 42: Signed Long 1 kvars A Offset 46: Signed Long 1 kvars B Offset 50: Signed Long 1 kvars C Offset 54: Signed Long 1 kwatt Hours A Offset 58: Signed Long 1 kwatt Hours B Offset 62: Signed Long 1 kwatt Hours C Offset 66: Signed Long 1 kvar Hours A Offset 70: Signed Long 1 kvar Hours B Offset 74: Signed Long 1 kvar Hours C Offset 78 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kwatts Offset 82 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kvars Offset 86 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kwatt Hours Offset 90 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kvar Hours Offset 94 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kva Offset 98 Unsigned Short 100 System Frequency Offset 100 Unsigned Short Power Factor Bit 15-9: Not used Bit 8: 0=Positive, 1=Negative Bit 7: 0=Leading, 1=Lagging Bit 6-0: Power Factor Value (x100) BLK 4: RMS DEMAND CURRENT/REAL and REACTIVE POWER VALUES BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-A Offset 4: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-B Offset 8: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-C Offset 12: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-N Offset 16: Signed Long 1 Demand kwatts-a Offset 20: Signed Long 1 Demand kwatts-b Offset 24: Signed Long 1 Demand kwatts-c Offset 28: Signed Long 1 Demand kvars-a Offset 32: Signed Long 1 Demand kvars-b Offset 36: Signed Long 1 Demand kvars-c Offset 40: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Demand Watts Offset 44: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Demand Vars 118

125 BLK 5: RMS PEAK DEMAND CURRENT/REAL and REACTIVE POWER VALUES and TIME STAMPS BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-A Offset 4: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A Year Offset 5: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A Month Offset 6: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A Day Offset 7: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A Hour Offset 8: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A Minute Offset 9: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset10: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-B Offset14: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B Year Offset15: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B Month Offset16: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B Day Offset17: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B Hour Offset18: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B Minute Offset19: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 20: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-C Offset 24: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C Year Offset 25: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C Month Offset 26: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C Day Offset 27: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C Hour Offset 28: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C Minute Offset 29: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 30: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-N Offset 34: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N Year Offset 35: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N Month Offset 36: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N Day Offset 37: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N Hour Offset 38: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N Minute Offset 39: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 40: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KWatts-A Offset 44: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A Year Offset 45: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A Month Offset 46: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A Day Offset 47: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A Hour Offset 48: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A Minute Offset 49: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 50: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KWatts-B Offset 54: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B Year Offset 55: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B Month Offset 56: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B Day Offset 57: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B Hour Offset 58: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B Minute Offset 59: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 60: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KWatts-C Offset 64: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C Year Offset 65: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C Month Offset 66: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C Day Offset 67: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C Hour Offset 68: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C Minute Offset 69: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 70: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KVars-A Offset 74: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A Year Offset 75: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A Month Offset 76: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A Day Offset 77: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A Hour Offset 78: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A Minute 119

126 Offset 79: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 80: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KVars-B Offset 84: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B Year Offset 85: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B Month Offset 86: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B Day Offset 87: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B Hour Offset 88: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B Minute Offset 89: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 90: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KVars-C Offset 94: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C Year Offset 95: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C Month Offset 96: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C Day Offset 97: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C Hour Offset 98: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C Minute Offset 99: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 100: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts Offset 104: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts Year Offset 105: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts Month Offset 106: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts Day Offset 107: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts Hour Offset 108: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts Minute Offset 109: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 110: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars Offset 114: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars Year Offset 115: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars Month Offset 116: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars Day Offset 117: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars Hour Offset 118: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars Minute Offset 119: Unsigned Byte Spare BLK 6: RMS MINIMUM DEMAND CURRENT/REAL and REACTIVE POWER VALUES and TIME STAMPS BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-A Offset 4: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A Year Offset 5: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A Month Offset 6: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A Day Offset 7: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A Hour Offset 8: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A Minute Offset 9: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset10: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-B Offset14: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B Year Offset15: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B Month Offset16: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B Day Offset17: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B Hour Offset18: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B Minute Offset19: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 20: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-C Offset 24: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C Year Offset 25: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C Month Offset 26: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C Day Offset 27: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C Hour Offset 28: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C Minute Offset 29: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 30: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-N Offset 34: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N Year Offset 35: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N Month Offset 36: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N Day Offset 37: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N Hour 120

127 Offset 38: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N Minute Offset 39: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 40: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KWatts-A Offset 44: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A Year Offset 45: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A Month Offset 46: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A Day Offset 47: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A Hour Offset 48: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A Minute Offset 49: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 50: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KWatts-B Offset 54: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B Year Offset 55: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B Month Offset 56: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B Day Offset 57: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B Hour Offset 58: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B Minute Offset 59: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 60: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KWatts-C Offset 64: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C Year Offset 65: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C Month Offset 66: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C Day Offset 67: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C Hour Offset 68: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C Minute Offset 69: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 70: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KVars-A Offset 74: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A Year Offset 75: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A Month Offset 76: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A Day Offset 77: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A Hour Offset 78: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A Minute Offset 79: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 80: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KVars-B Offset 84: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B Year Offset 85: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B Month Offset 86: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B Day Offset 87: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B Hour Offset 88: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B Minute Offset 89: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 90: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KVars-C Offset 94: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C Year Offset 95: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C Month Offset 96: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C Day Offset 97: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C Hour Offset 98: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C Minute Offset 99: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 100: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts Offset 104: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts Year Offset 105: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts Month Offset 106: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts Day Offset 107: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts Hour Offset 108: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts Minute Offset 109: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 110: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars Offset 114: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars Year Offset 115: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars Month Offset 116: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars Day Offset 117: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars Hour Offset 118: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars Minute Offset 119: Unsigned Byte Spare 121

128 BLK 7: COUNTERS BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Scale Description Offset 0: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Differential Fault Record Counter Offset 2: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Through Fault Record Counter Offset 4: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record Counter Offset 6: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Operation Record Counter Offset 8: Unsigned Short 1 Through Fault Counter Offset 10: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation kamps-a Counter Offset 14: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation kamps-b Counter Offset 18: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation kamps-c Counter Offset 22: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation Cycles Counter Offset 26: Unsigned Short 1 Overcurrent Trip Counter Offset 28: Unsigned Short 1 Differential Trip Counter BLK 8: PHYSICAL and LOGICAL INPUT/OUTPUT BLOCK Block Offset Data Size Description Offset 0: Unsigned Long Logical Output 0-31 Bit 31: DIFF Bit 15: 51G-2 Bit 30: ALARM Bit 14: 50N-1 Bit 29: 87T Bit 13: 150N-1 Bit 28: 87H Bit 12: 50G-2 Bit 27: 2HROA Bit 11: 150G-2 Bit 26: 5HROA Bit 10: 46-1 Bit 25: AHROABit 9: 46-2 Bit 24: TCFA Bit 8: 87T-D Bit 23: TFA Bit 7: 87H-D Bit 22: 51P-1 Bit 6: 51P-1D Bit 21: 51P-2 Bit 5: 51P-2D Bit 20: 50P-1 Bit 4: 51N-1D Bit 19: 150P-1 Bit 3: 51G-2D Bit 18: 50P-2 Bit 2: 50P-1D Bit 17: 150P-2 Bit 1: 50P-2D Bit 16: 51N-1 Bit 0: 50N-1D Offset 4: Unsigned Long Logical Output Bit 31: 50G-2D Bit 15: DTC Bit 30: 150P-1D Bit 14: OCTC Bit 29: 150P-2D Bit 13: PDA Bit 28: 150N-1D Bit 12: NDA Bit 27: 150G-2D Bit 11: PRIM Bit 26: 46-1D Bit 10: ALT1 Bit 25: 46-2D Bit 9: ALT2 Bit 24: PATA Bit 8: STCA Bit 23: PBTA Bit 7: 87T* Bit 22: PCTA Bit 6: 87H* Bit 21: PUA Bit 5: 2HROA* Bit 20: 63 Bit 4: 5HROA* Bit 19: THRUFA Bit 3: AHROA* Bit 18: TFCA Bit 2: 51P-1* Bit 17: TFKA Bit 1: 51P-2* Bit 16: TFSCA Bit 0: 50P-1* Offset 8: Unsigned Long Logical Output Bit 31: 150P-1* Bit 15: ULO5 Bit 30: 50P-2* Bit 14: ULO6 Bit 29: 150P-2* Bit 13: ULO7 Bit 28: 51N-1* Bit 12: ULO8 Bit 27: 51G-2* Bit 11: ULO9 Bit 26: 50N-1* Bit 10: LOADA 122

129 Bit 25: 150N-1* Bit 9: OCA-1 Bit 24: 50G-2* Bit 8: OCA-2 Bit 23: 150G-2* Bit 7: HLDA-1 Bit 22: 46-1* Bit 6: LLDA-1 Bit 21: 46-2* Bit 5: HLDA-2 Bit 20: 63* Bit 4: LLDA-1 Bit 19: ULO1 Bit 3: HPFA Bit 18: ULO2 Bit 2: LPFA Bit 17: ULO3 Bit 1: VarDA Bit 16: ULO4 Bit 0: PVarA Offset 12: Unsigned Long Logical Output Bit 31: NVarA Bit 15: Bit 30: PWatt1 Bit 14: Bit 29: PWatt2 Bit 13: Bit 28: Bit 12: Bit 27: Bit 11: Bit 26: Bit 10: Bit 25: Bit 9: Bit 24: Bit 8: Bit 23: Bit 7: Bit 22: Bit 6: Bit 21: Bit 5: Bit 20: Bit 4: Bit 19: Bit 3: Bit 18: Bit 2: Bit 17: Bit 1: Bit 16: Bit 0: Offset 16: Unsigned Long Logical Input 0-31 Bit 31: 87T Bit 15: ALT1 Bit 30: 87H Bit 14: ALT2 Bit 29: 51P-1 Bit 13: ECI1 Bit 28: 51P-2 Bit 12: ECI2 Bit 27: 51N-1 Bit 11: WCI Bit 26: 51G-2 Bit 10: TRIP Bit 25: 50P-1 Bit 9: SPR Bit 24: 50P-2 Bit 8: TCM Bit 23: 50N-1 Bit 7: ULI1 Bit 22: 50G-2 Bit 6: ULI2 Bit 21: 150P-1 Bit 5: ULI3 Bit 20: 150P-2 Bit 4: ULI4 Bit 19: 150N-1 Bit 3: ULI5 Bit 18: 150G-2 Bit 2: ULI6 Bit 17: 46-1 Bit 1: ULI7 Bit 16: 46-2 Bit 0: ULI8 Offset 20: Unsigned Long Logical Input Bit 31: ULI9 Bit 15: Bit 30: CRI Bit 14: Bit 29: Bit 13: Bit 28: Bit 12: Bit 27: Bit 11: Bit 26: Bit 10: Bit 25: Bit 9: Bit 24: Bit 8: Bit 23: Bit 7: Bit 22: Bit 6: Bit 21: Bit 5: Bit 20: Bit 4: Bit 19: Bit 3: Bit 18: Bit 2: 123

130 Bit 17: Bit 1: Bit 16: Bit 0: Offset 24: Unsigned Long Logical Input (Reserved) Offset 28: Unsigned Long Logical Input (Reserved) Offset 32: Unsigned Short Physical Output Bit 15: Spare Bit 7: OUT7 Bit 14: Spare Bit 6: OUT6 Bit 13: Spare Bit 5: OUT5 Bit 12: Spare Bit 4: OUT4 Bit 11: Spare Bit 3: OUT3 Bit 10: Spare Bit 2: OUT2 Bit 9: Spare Bit 1: OUT1 Bit 8: Spare Bit 0: TRIP Offset 34: Unsigned Short Physical Input Bit 15: Spare Bit 7: IN8 Bit 14: Spare Bit 6: IN7 Bit 13: Spare Bit 5: IN6 Bit 12: Spare Bit 4: IN5 Bit 11: Spare Bit 3: IN4 Bit 10: Spare Bit 2: IN3 Bit 9: Spare Bit 1: IN2 Bit 8: IN9 Bit 0: IN1 3 Transmit Buffer "N" Commands ( 3 3 n ) N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 3 n 1 Communications Settings 3.1 Transmit Communications Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Port configuration byte bit0-3 = port baud rate where 0 = 300, 1 = 1200, 2 = 2400, 3 = 4800, 4 = 9600, 5 = 19200,6 = bit 4-5 = parity (0=None,1=Odd,2=Even) bit 6 = number of data bits (0=seven,1=eight) bit 7 = number of stop bits (0=one,1=two) Valid Frame Combinations (EVEN 7 1, ODD 7 1, NONE 8 1, EVEN 8 1, ODD 8 1, NONE 8 2, NONE 7 2) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x31 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 9 2/1 Unit Address high byte 2/2 Unit Address low byte 2/3 Front Panel RS232 configuration byte 3/1 Rear Panel RS232 or INCOM configuration byte 3/2 Rear Panel RS485 configuration byte 3/3 Rear Panel IRIG byte 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled 4/1 Spare 4/2 Spare 4/3 Aux Port Parameter 1 byte (0-255) 5/1 Aux Port Parameter 2 byte (0-255) 5/2 Aux Port Parameter 3 byte (0-255) 5/3 Aux Port Parameter 4 byte (0-255) 6/1 Aux Port Parameter 5 byte (0-255) 6/2 Aux Port Parameter 6 byte (0-255) 124

131 6/3 Aux Port Parameter 7 byte (0-255) 7/1 Aux Port Parameter 8 byte (0-255) 7/2 Aux Port Parameter 9 byte (0-255) 7/3 Aux Port Parameter 10 byte (0-255) 8/1 Aux Port Parameter Mode byte 8/2 Spare 8/3 Spare 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum high byte 9/3 Checksum low byte 4 Transmit Buffer "N" Commands ( 3 4 n ) N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 4 n 1 Programmable Input Select and Index Tables 2 Programmable Input Negated AND Table 3 Programmable Input AND/OR Table 4 Programmable Input User Defined Input Names 5 Programmable Output Select Table 6 Programmable Output AND/OR Table 7 Programmable Output User Defined Output Strings 8 Primary Relay Settings 9 Alternate 1 Relay Settings 10 Alternate 2 Relay Settings 11 Configuration Settings 12 Counter Settings 13 Alarm Settings 14 Real Time Clock 15 Output Delays 4.1 Transmit Programmable Input Select and Index ( ) Bit = 0, Physical Input is selected. Bit = 1, Physical Input is not selected. Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Index byte is the offset into the TPU s logical input structure. Offset Definitions 00 87T Restrained Differential Trip 01 87H High Set Inst Differential Trip 02 51P-1 Wdg1 Phase Time OC Trip 03 51P-2 Wdg2 Phase Time OC Trip 04 51N-1 Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Trip 05 51G-2 Wdg2 Ground Time OC Trip 06 50P-1 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip 07 50P-2 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip 08 50N-1 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 09 50G-2 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip P-1 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip P-2 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip N-1 2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip G-2 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip Wdg1 Neg Seq Time OC Trip Wdg2 Neg Seq Time OC Trip 16 ALT1 Enables Alt 1 Settings 17 ALT2 Enables Alt 2 Settings 18 ECI1 Event-1 Capture Initiated 19 ECI2 Event-2 Capture Initiated 125

132 20 WCI Waveform Capture Initiated 21 Trip Initiates Diff Trip Output 22 SPR Sudden Pressure Input 23 TCM Trip Coil Monitoring 24 ULI1 User Logical Input 1 25 ULI2 User Logical Input 2 26 ULI3 User Logical Input 3 27 ULI4 User Logical Input 4 28 ULI5 User Logical Input 5 29 ULI6 User Logical Input 6 30 ULI7 User Logical Input 7 31 ULI8 User Logical Input 8 32 ULI9 User Logical Input 9 33 CRI Clears Through Fault and OC Counters Example : if message 2/1 = hex 24 2/2 = hex 11 2/3 = hex 4 I/O word is hex 2411 Note the Physical Inputs are translated using the physical input table below: In the example IN3, IN10, IN8 and IN5 are selected for GND. The AND/OR selection and enable disable mapping is selected with commands and Bit Physical Input IN6 1 IN7 2 IN8 3 IN2 4 IN9 5 IN3 6 IN4 7 IN5 8 IN1 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status Bit 0 : SelfTest Status Bit 1 : Contact Input Status changed Bit 2 : Local Settings Change Bit 3 : Remote Edit Disabled. Bit 4 : Alternate Settings Group 1 enabled. Bit 5 : Alternate Setting Group 2 enabled. Bit 6 : Fault Record Logged. Bit 7 : Power was Cycled 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x41 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 34 2/1 INPUT1 high byte 2/2 INPUT1 low byte 2/3 INPUT1 index byte 126

133 3/1 INPUT2 high byte 3/2 INPUT2 low byte 3/3 INPUT2 index byte 4/1 INPUT3 high byte 4/2 INPUT3 low byte 4/3 INPUT3 index byte 5/1 INPUT4 high byte 5/2 INPUT4 low byte Bit Physical Input 5/3 INPUT4 index byte /1 INPUT5 high byte 0 IN6 6/2 INPUT5 low byte 1 IN7 6/3 INPUT5 index byte 2 IN8 7/1 INPUT6 high byte 3 IN2 7/2 INPUT6 low byte 4 IN9 7/3 INPUT6 index byte 5 IN3 8/1 INPUT7 high byte 6 IN4 8/2 INPUT7 low byte 7 IN5 8/3 INPUT7 index byte 8 IN1 9/1 INPUT8 high byte 9 Reserved 9/2 INPUT8 low byte 10 Reserved 9/3 INPUT8 index byte 11 Reserved 10/1 INPUT9 high byte 12 Reserved 10/2 INPUT9 low byte 13 Reserved 10/3 INPUT9 index byte 14 Reserved 11/1 INPUT10 high byte 15 Reserved 11/2 INPUT10 low byte 11/3 INPUT10 index byte 12/1 INPUT11 high byte 12/2 INPUT11 low byte 12/3 INPUT11 index byte 13/1 INPUT12 high byte 13/2 INPUT12 low byte 13/3 INPUT12 index byte 14/1 INPUT13 high byte 14/2 INPUT13 low byte 14/3 INPUT13 index byte 15/1 INPUT14 high byte 15/2 INPUT14 low byte 15/3 INPUT14 index byte 16/1 INPUT15 high byte 16/2 INPUT15 low byte 16/3 INPUT15 index byte 17/1 INPUT16 high byte 17/2 INPUT16 low byte 17/3 INPUT16 index byte 18/1 INPUT17 high byte 18/2 INPUT17 low byte 18/3 INPUT17 index byte 19/1 INPUT18 high byte 19/2 INPUT18 low byte 19/3 INPUT18 index byte 20/1 INPUT19 high byte 20/2 INPUT19 low byte 20/3 INPUT19 index byte 21/1 INPUT20 low byte 21/3 INPUT20 index byte 22/1 INPUT21 high byte 22/2 INPUT21 low byte 22/3 INPUT21 index byte 127

134 23/1 INPUT22 high byte 23/2 INPUT22 low byte 23/3 INPUT22 index byte 24/1 INPUT23 high byte 24/2 INPUT23 low byte 24/3 INPUT23 index byte 25/1 INPUT24 high byte 25/2 INPUT24 low byte 25/3 INPUT24 index byte 26/1 INPUT25 high byte 26/2 INPUT25 low byte 26/3 INPUT25 index byte 27/1 INPUT26 high byte 27/2 INPUT26 low byte 27/3 INPUT26 index byte 28/1 INPUT27 high byte 28/2 INPUT27 low byte 28/3 INPUT27 index byte 29/1 INPUT28 high byte 29/2 INPUT28 low byte 29/3 INPUT28 index byte 30/1 INPUT29 high byte 30/2 INPUT29 low byte 30/3 INPUT29 index byte 31/1 INPUT30 high byte 31/2 INPUT30 low byte 31/3 INPUT30 index byte 32/1 INPUT31 high byte 32/2 INPUT31 low byte 32/3 INPUT31 index byte 33/1 INPUT32 high byte 33/2 INPUT32 low byte 33/3 INPUT32 index byte 34/1 spare 34/2 Checksum high byte 34/3 Checksum low byte 4.2 Transmit Programmable Input Negated AND Input ( ) From TPU Negated Programmable Input data transferred from TPU2 to PC. (3, 4, 2) Bit = 0, Enabled when input is opened. Bit = 1, Enabled when input is closed. Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x42 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 23 2/1 INPUT1 high byte 2/2 INPUT1 low byte 2/3 INPUT2 high byte 3/1 INPUT2 low byte 3/2 INPUT3 high byte 3/3 INPUT3 low byte 4/1 INPUT4 high byte 4/2 INPUT4 low byte Bit Physical Input 4/3 INPUT5 high byte

135 5/1 INPUT5 low byte 0 IN6 5/2 INPUT6 high byte 1 IN7 5/3 INPUT6 low byte 2 IN8 6/1 INPUT7 high byte 3 IN2 6/2 INPUT7 low byte 4 IN9 6/3 INPUT8 high byte 5 IN3 7/1 INPUT8 low byte 6 IN4 7/2 INPUT9 high byte 7 IN5 7/3 INPUT9 low byte 8 IN1 8/1 INPUT10 high byte 9 Reserved 8/2 INPUT10 low byte 10 Reserved 8/3 INPUT11 high byte 11 Reserved 9/1 INPUT11 low byte 12 Reserved 9/2 INPUT12 high byte 13 Reserved 9/3 INPUT12 low byte 14 Reserved 10/1 INPUT13 high byte 15 Reserved 10/2 INPUT13 low byte 10/3 INPUT14 high byte 11/1 INPUT14 low byte 11/2 INPUT15 high byte 11/3 INPUT15 low byte 12/1 INPUT16 high byte 12/2 INPUT16 low byte 12/3 INPUT17 high byte 13/1 INPUT17 low byte 13/2 INPUT18 high byte 13/3 INPUT18 low byte 14/1 INPUT19 high byte 14/2 INPUT19 low byte 14/3 INPUT20 high byte 15/1 INPUT20 low byte 15/2 INPUT21 high byte 15/3 INPUT21 low byte 16/1 INPUT22 high byte 16/2 INPUT22 low byte 16/3 INPUT23 high byte 17/1 INPUT23 low byte 17/2 INPUT24 high byte 17/3 INPUT24 low byte 18/1 INPUT25 high byte 18/2 INPUT25 low byte 18/3 INPUT26 high byte 19/1 INPUT26 low byte 19/2 INPUT27 high byte 19/3 INPUT27 low byte 20/1 INPUT28 high byte 20/2 INPUT28 low byte 20/3 INPUT29 high byte 21/1 INPUT29 low byte 21/2 INPUT30 high byte 21/3 INPUT30 low byte 22/1 INPUT31 high byte 22/2 INPUT31 low byte 22/3 INPUT32 high byte 23/1 INPUT32 low byte 23/2 Checksum high byte 23/3 Checksum low byte 129

136 4.3 Transmit Programmable Input AND/OR Select ( ) Bit = 0, Selected inputs are ORed together. Bit = 1, Selected inputs are ANDed together. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x43 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 3 2/1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits /2 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits /3 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits /1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 0-7 3/2 Checksum high byte 3/3 Checksum low byte Bit Logical Input INPUT1 1 INPUT INPUT28 28 INPUT29 29 INPUT30 30 INPUT31 31 INPUT Transmit Programmable User Defined Input Names ( ) User definable 8 char input strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x44 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 37 2/1-4/2 IN1 Character String 8 bytes 4/3-7/1 IN2 Character String 8 bytes 7/2-9/3 IN3 Character String 8 bytes 10/1-12/2 IN4 Character String 8 bytes 12/3-15/1 IN5 Character String 8 bytes 15/2-17/3 IN6 Character String 8 bytes 18/1-20/2 IN7 Character String 8 bytes 20/3-23/1 IN8 Character String 8 bytes 23/2-25/3 IN9 Character String 8 bytes 26/1-28/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 28/3-31/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 31/2-33/3 spare Character String 8 bytes 34/1-36/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 36/3-37/1 Spare 37/2 Checksum high byte 37/3 Checksum low byte 4.5 Transmit Programmable Output Select ( ) Bit = 0, Physical Output is selected. Bit = 1, Physical Output is not selected. 130

137 Least significant low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. Least significant high byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Most significant low byte consists of bits 16 through 23. Most significant high byte consists of bits 24 through 31. Bit Logical Output 0 Not used, reserved for fixed Differential Trip 1 OUTPUT1 2 OUTPUT2 3 OUTPUT OUTPUT30 31 OUTPUT31 Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x45 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 21 2/1 Contact OUT5 most significant high byte 2/2 Contact OUT5 most significant low byte 2/3 Contact OUT5 least significant high byte 3/1 Contact OUT5 least significant low byte 3/2 Contact OUT7 most significant high byte 3/3 Contact OUT7 most significant low byte 4/1 Contact OUT7 least significant high byte 4/2 Contact OUT7 least significant low byte 4/3 Contact OUT4 most significant high byte 5/1 Contact OUT4 most significant low byte 5/2 Contact OUT4 least significant high byte 5/3 Contact OUT4 least significant low byte 6/1 Contact OUT6 most significant high byte 6/2 Contact OUT6 most significant low byte 6/3 Contact OUT6 least significant high byte 7/1 Contact OUT6 least significant low byte 7/2 Contact OUT3 most significant high byte 7/3 Contact OUT3 most significant low byte 8/1 Contact OUT3 least significant high byte 8/2 Contact OUT3 least significant low byte 8/3 Contact OUT2 most significant high byte 9/1 Contact OUT2 most significant low byte 9/2 Contact OUT2 least significant high byte 9/3 Contact OUT2 least significant low byte 10/1 Contact OUT1 most significant high byte 10/2 Contact OUT1 most significant low byte 10/3 Contact OUT1 least significant high byte 11/1 Contact OUT1 least significant low byte 11/2-21/1 Spare Outputs 21/2 Checksum high byte 21/3 Checksum low byte 4.6 Transmit Programmable Output AND/OR Select ( ) Bit = 0, Selected inputs are ORed together. Bit = 1, Selected inputs are ANDed together. Index byte is the offset into the TPU s logical output structure. 131

138 Bit Logical Output 0 not used, reserved for fixed DIFF TRIP 1 Contact OUT5 2 Contact OUT7 3 Contact OUT4 4 Contact OUT6 5 Contact OUT3 6 Contact OUT2 7 Contact OUT1 8 spare 9 spare 10 spare 11 spare 12 spare 13 spare 14 spare 15 spare Index Output Definition 00 DIFF Fixed Diff Trip, 87T or 87H 01 ALARM Fixed Self Check Alarm 02 87T Percentage Differential Trip 03 87H High Set Inst Diff Trip 04 2HROA 2nd Harm Restraint Output Alarm 05 5HROA 5th Harm Restraint Alarm 06 AHROA All Harm Restraint Alarm 07 TCFA Trip Circuit Failure Alarm 08 TFA Trip Failure Alarm 09 51P-1 Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Trip 10 51P-2 Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Trip 11 50P-1 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip P-1 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip 13 50P-2 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip P-2 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip 15 51N-1 Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Trip 16 51G-2 Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Trip 17 50N-1 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip N-1 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 19 50G-2 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip G-2 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip Wdg 1 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip Wdg 2 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip 23 87T-D Percentage Differential Disabled Alarm 24 87H-D High Set Inst Diff Disabled Alarm 25 51P-1D Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm 26 51P-2D Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm 27 51N-1D Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Disabled Alarm 28 51G-2D Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Disabled Alarm 29 50P-1D 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm 30 50P-2D 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm 31 50N-1D 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Disabled Alarm 32 50G-2D 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Disabled Alarm P-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm P-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm N-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst Disabled Alarm G-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst Disabled Alarm D Wdg 1 Neg Sequence Time OC Disabled Alarm D Wdg 2 Neg Sequence Time OC Disabled Alarm 132

139 39 PATA Phase A LED Alarm 40 PBTA Phase B LED Alarm 41 PCTA Phase C LED Alarm 42 PUA Pickup Alarm Sudden Pressure Input Alarm 44 THRUFA Through Fault Alarm 45 TFCA Through Fault Counter Alarm 46 TFKA Through Fault KAmp Summation Alarm 47 TFSCA Through Fault Cycle Summation Alarm 48 DTC Differential Trip Counter Alarm 49 OCTC Overcurrent Trip Counter Alarm 50 PDA Phase Current Demand Alarm 51 NDA Neutral Current Demand Alarm 52 PRIM Primary Set Enabled Alarm 53 ALT1 Alt1 Set Enabled Alarm 54 ALT2 Alt2 Set Enabled Alarm 55 STCA Settings Table Changed Alarm 56 87T* Percentage Diff Sealed In Alarm 57 87H* High Set Inst Diff Sealed In Alarm 58 2HROA* 2nd Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm 59 5HROA* 5th Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm 60 AHROA* All Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm 61 51P-1* Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm 62 51P-2* Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm 63 50P-1* 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm P-1* 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm 65 50P-2* 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm P-2* 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm 67 51N-1* Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Sealed In Alarm 68 51G-2* Wdg2 Ground Time OC Sealed In Alarm 69 50N-1* 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm N-1* 2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm 71 50G-2* 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm G-2* 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm * Wdg1 Neg Sequence Time OC Sealed In Alarm * Wdg2 Neg Sequence Time OC Sealed In Alarm 75 63* Sudden Pressure Input Sealed In Alarm 76 ULO1 User Logical Output 1 77 ULO2 User Logical Output 2 78 ULO3 User Logical Output 3 79 ULO4 User Logical Output 4 80 ULO5 User Logical Output 5 81 ULO6 User Logical Output 6 82 ULO7 User Logical Output 7 83 ULO8 User Logical Output 8 84 ULO9 User Logical Output 9 85 LOADA Load Current 86 OCA-1 Overcurrent Alarm, Winding 1 87 OCA-2 Overcurrent Alarm, Winding 2 88 HLDA-1 High Level Detection Alarm, Winding 1 89 LLDA-1 Low Level Detection Alarm, Winding 1 90 HLDA-2 High Level Detection Alarm, Winding 2 91 LLDA-2 Low Level Detection Alarm, Winding 2 92 HPFA High Power Factor Alarm 93 LPFA Low Power Factor Alarm 94 VarDA Three Phase kvar Demand Alarm 95 PVArA Positive 3 Phase kilovar Alarm 96 NVArA Negative 3 Phase kilovar Alarm 97 PWatt1 Positive Watt Alarm 1 133

140 98 PWatt2 Positive Watt Alarm 2 Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x46 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 14 2/1 spare (bits 24-31) 2/2 spare (bits 16-23) 2/3 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits /1 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits 0-7 3/2 OUTPUT1 index byte 3/3 OUTPUT2 index byte 4/1 OUTPUT3 index byte 4/2 OUTPUT4 index byte 4/3 OUTPUT5 index byte 5/1 OUTPUT6 index byte 5/2 OUTPUT7 index byte 5/3 OUTPUT8 index byte 6/1 OUTPUT9 index byte 6/2 OUTPUT10 index byte 6/3 OUTPUT11 index byte 7/1 OUTPUT12 index byte 7/2 OUTPUT13 index byte 7/3 OUTPUT14 index byte 8/1 OUTPUT15 index byte 8/2 OUTPUT16 index byte 8/3 OUTPUT17 index byte 9/1 OUTPUT18 index byte 9/2 OUTPUT19 index byte 9/3 OUTPUT20 index byte 10/1 OUTPUT21 index byte 10/2 OUTPUT22 index byte 10/3 OUTPUT23 index byte 11/1 OUTPUT24 index byte 11/2 OUTPUT25 index byte 11/3 OUTPUT26 index byte 12/1 OUTPUT27 index byte 12/2 OUTPUT28 index byte 12/3 OUTPUT29 index byte 13/1 OUTPUT30 index byte 13/2 OUTPUT31 index byte 13/3 spare 14/1 spare 14/2 Checksum high byte 14/3 Checksum low byte 4.7 Transmit Programmable Output User Defined Strings ( ) User definable 8 char output strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x47 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 39 2/1-4/2 OUT1 Character String 8 bytes 4/3-7/1 OUT2 Character String 8 bytes 7/2-9/3 OUT3 Character String 8 bytes 10/1-12/2 OUT4 Character String 8 bytes 12/3-15/1 OUT5 Character String 8 bytes 134

141 15/2-17/3 OUT6 Character String 8 bytes 18/1-20/2 OUT7 Character String 8 bytes 20/3-23/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 23/2-25/3 spare Character String 8 bytes 26/1-28/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 28/3-31/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 31/2-33/3 spare Character String 8 bytes 34/1-36/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 36/3-39/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 39/2 Checksum high byte 39/3 Checksum low byte 4.8,9,10 Transmit Relay Settings ( 3 4 X ) ( ) = Primary Settings ( ) = Alternate 1 Settings ( ) = Alternate 2 Settings Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Curve Selection Type I 0 = Extremely Inverse 1 = Very Inverse 2 = Inverse 3 = Short Time Inverse 4 = Definite Time 5 = Long Time Extremely Inverse 6 = Long Time Very Inverse 7 = Long Time Inverse 8 = Recloser Curve 9 = Disabled 10 = User Curve 1 11 = User Curve 2 12 = User Curve 3 Curve Selection Type II 0 = Disabled 1 = Standard 2 = Inverse 3 = Definite Time 4 = Short Time Inverse 5 = Short Time Extremely Inverse 6 = User Curve 1 7 = User Curve 2 8 = User Curve 3 Curve Selection Type 87T 0 = Disabled 1 = Percent Slope 2 = HU 30% 3 = HU 35% 4 = Percent 15 Tap 5 = Percent 25 Tap 6 = Percent 40 Tap 7 = User Curve 1 8 = User Curve 2 9 = User Curve 3 135

142 Mode Selection Type 87T 0 = Disabled 1 = 2nd Harmonics 2 = 2nd & 5th Harmonics 3 = All Harmonics Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = (Prim=0x48, Alt1=0x49, Alt2=0x4a) 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 25 2/1 87T Curve byte (Type 87T) 2/2 87T Minimum I Operate ( *10) 2/3 87T Percent Restraint (15-60) 3/1 87T Restraint Mode (Mode Selection Type 87T) 3/2 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint high byte( *10) 3/3 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint low byte 4/1 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint high byte (15-40 *10) 4/2 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint low byte 4/3 87T All Harmonics Restraint high byte (15-40 *10) 5/1 87T All Harmonics Restraint low byte 5/2 87H Tap X byte (6-20 *10) 5/3 87T-1 Tap Amp (2-9 Amp *10, Amp *50) 6/1 51P-1 Curve Select byte (Type I) 6/2 51P-1 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12 Amp *10, Amp *50) 6/3 51P-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20) 7/1 50P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 7/2 50P-1 Pickup X byte ( , *10) 7/3 50P-1 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100) 8/1 50P-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 8/2 150P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 8/3 150P-1 Pickup X (0.5-20, *10) 9/1 150P-1 Timedial high byte (0-9.99, *100) 9/2 150P-1 Timedial low byte 9/ Curve Select byte (Type I) 10/ Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, Amp *50) 10/ Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20) 10/3 51N-1 Curve Select byte (Type I) 11/1 51N-1 Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, Amp *50) 11/2 51N-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20) 11/3 50N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 12/1 50N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 12/2 50N-1 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100) 12/3 50N-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 13/1 150N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 13/2 150N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 13/3 150N-1 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100) 14/1 150N-1 Time Delay low byte 14/2 87T-2 Tap Amp byte (2-9 Amp *10, Amp *50) 14/3 51P-2 Curve Select byte (Type I) 15/1 51P-2 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12 Amp *10, Amp *50) 15/2 51P-2 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20) 15/3 50P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 16/1 50P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 16/2 50P-2 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100) 16/3 50P-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 17/1 150P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 17/2 150P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 17/3 150P-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100) 18/1 150P-2 Time Delay low byte 136

143 18/ Curve Select byte (Type I) 18/ Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, Amp *50) 19/ Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20) 19/2 51G-2 Curve Select byte (Type I) 19/3 51G-2 Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, Amp *50) 20/1 51G-2 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20) 20/2 50G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 20/3 50G-2 PickupX (0.5-20, *10) 21/1 50G-2 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100) 21/2 50G-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 21/3 150G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 22/1 150G-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 22/2 150G-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100) 22/3 150G-2 Time Delay low byte 23/1 Disturb-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-5, *10) 23/2 Level Detector-1 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable) 23/3 Level Detector-2 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable) 24/1 spare 24/2 spare 24/3 spare 25/1 Unit Configuration byte bit 0 : neutral tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 1 : phase tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 2 : neutral tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 3 : phase tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 4 : user definable curves bit 5 : Reserved for frequency bit 6 : neutral tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 7 : phase tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1= A) 25/2 Checksum high byte 25/3 Checksum low byte 4.11 Transmit Configuration Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Mode Selection Type Trip Failure 0 = Differential Trip 1 = OC Alarm 2 = Differential and OC Alarm Mode Selection Type Demand Time Constant 0 = 5 1 = 15 2 = 30 3 = 60 Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4b 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 21 2/1 Wdg1 P CT Ratio high byte (1-4000) 2/2 Wdg1 P CT Ratio low byte 2/3 Wdg1 N CT Ratio high byte (1-4000) 3/1 Wdg1 N CT Ratio low byte 3/2 Wdg2 P CT Ratio high byte (1-4000) 3/3 Wdg2 P CT Ratio low byte 4/1 Wdg2 G CT Ratio high byte (1-4000) 137

144 4/2 Wdg2 G CT Ratio low byte 4/3 Winding Phase Comp high byte (0-330, /30) 5/1 Winding Phase Comp low byte 5/2 Wind 1 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB) 5/3 Wind 1 CT Config low byte 6/1 Wind 2 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB) 6/2 Wind 2 CT Config low byte 6/3 Phase Rotation high byte (0=ABC, 1=ACB) 7/1 Phase Rotation low byte 7/2 Alt 1 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable) 7/3 Alt 1 Settings low byte 8/1 Alt 2 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable) 8/2 Alt 2 Settings low byte 8/3 Trip Failure Mode high byte (Type Trip Failure) 9/1 Trip Failure Mode low byte 9/2 Trip Failure Time high byte (5-60) 9/3 Trip Failure Time low byte 10/1 Trip Fail Dropout % PU high byte (5-90) 10/2 Trip Fail Dropout % PU low byte 10/3 Configuration Flag high byte bit 8 : Cross Block Mode (0=Disable, 1=Enable) bit 9 : SPARE bit 10 : SPARE bit 11 : SPARE bit 12 : SPARE bit 13 : SPARE bit 14 : SPARE bit 15 : SPARE 11/1 Configuration Flag low byte bit 0 : OC Protect Mode (0=Fund, 1=RMS) bit 1 : Reset Mode (0=Instant 1=Delayed) bit 2 : Spare bit 3 : Target Display Mode (0=Last, 1=All) bit 4 : Local Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable) bit 5 : Remote Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable) bit 6 : WHr/VARHr Meter Mode (0=KWHr, 1=MWHr) bit 7 : LCD Light (0=Timer, 1=On) 11/2-16/1 Unit Name character /2 Transformer Configuration Byte (0=Wye1-Wye2, 1=Wye1-Delta2, 2=Delta1-Wye2, 3=Delta1- Delta2) 16/3 Demand Time Const high byte (Type Demand Time) 17/1 Demand Time Const low byte 17/2 LCD Contrast Adj high byte (0-63) 17/3 LCD Contrast Adj low byte 18/1 Relay Password character 1 18/2 Relay Password character 2 18/3 Relay Password character 3 19/1 Relay Password character 4 19/2 Meter Winding Mode (0=Wdg1, 1=Wdg2, 2=Wdg3) 19/3 VT Configuration (0=69VWye, 1=120VWye, 2=120V Delta, 3=208V Delta) 20/1 VT Ratio high byte (1-4500) 20/2 VT Ratio low byte 20/3 Spare 21/1 Spare 21/2 Checksum high byte 21/3 Checksum low byte 138

145 4.12 Transmit Counter Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4c 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 7 2/1 Through Faults high byte (0-9999) 2/2 Through Faults low byte 2/3 Through Fault Sum kamp A high byte (0-9999) 3/1 Through Fault Sum kamp A low byte 3/2 Through Fault kamp B high byte (0-9999) 3/3 Through Fault kamp B low byte 4/1 Through Fault kamp C high byte (0-9999) 4/2 Through Fault kamp C low byte 4/3 Thr Fault Sum Cyc high byte ( ) 5/1 Thr Fault Sum Cyc low byte 5/2 Overcurrent Trips high byte (0-9999) 5/3 Overcurrent Trips low byte 6/1 Differential Trips high byte (0-9999) 6/2 Differential Trips low byte 6/3 Spare 7/1 Spare 7/2 Checksum high byte 7/3 Checksum low byte 4.13 Transmit Alarm Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4d 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 17 2/1 Through Faults high byte (0-9999) 2/2 Through Faults low byte 2/3 Through Fault Sum kamp high byte (0-9999) 3/1 Through Fault Sum kamp low byte 3/2 Through Fault Sum Cyc high byte ( ) 3/3 Through Fault Sum Cyc low byte 4/1 Overcurrent Trips high byte (0-9999) 4/2 Overcurrent Trips low byte 4/3 Differential Trips high byte (0-9999) 5/1 Differential Trips low byte 5/2 Phase Demand high byte (1-9999) 5/3 Phase Demand low byte 6/1 Neutral Demand high byte (1-9999) 6/2 Neutral Demand low byte 6/3 Load Current Alarm high byte (1 to 9999) 7/1 Load Current Alarm low byte 7/2 Phase Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999,10000=Disables) 7/3 Phase Demand Alarm low byte 8/1 Low PF Alarm high byte( *100, 101=Disables) 8/2 Low PF Alarm low byte 139

146 8/3 High PF Alarm high byte( *100, 101=Disables) 9/1 High Pf Alarm low byte 9/2 Positive kvar Alarm high byte ( / 10,10000=Disable) 9/3 Positive kvar Alarm low byte 10/1 Negative kvar Alarm high byte ( /10,10000=Disable) 10/2 Negative kvar Alarm high byte 10/3 Pos Watt Alarm 1 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable) 11/1 Pos Watt Alarm 1 low byte 11/2 Pos Watt Alarm 2 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable) 11/3 Pos Watt Alarm 2 low byte 12/1 Spare 12/2 Spare 12/3 Spare 13/1 Spare 13/2 Spare 13/3 Spare 14/1 Spare 14/2 Spare 14/3 Spare 15/1 Spare 15/2 Spare 15/3 Spare 16/1 Spare 16/2 Spare 16/3 Spare 17/1 Spare 17/2 Checksum high byte 17/3 Checksum low byte 4.14 Transmit Real Time Clock ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4e 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 4 2/1 Hours byte (0-23) 2/2 Minutes byte (0-59) 2/3 Seconds byte (0-59) 3/1 Day byte (0-31), (0=Shutdown Clock) 3/2 Month byte (1-12) 3/3 Year byte (0-99) 4/1 Spare 4/2 Checksum high byte 4/3 Checksum low byte 4.15 Transmit Programmable Output Delays ( ) Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4f 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 8 2/1 OUT 5 delay high byte ( , *100) 2/2 OUT 5 delay low byte 2/3 OUT 7 delay high byte ( , *100) 3/1 OUT 7 delay low byte 3/2 OUT 4 delay high byte ( , *100) 3/3 OUT 4 delay low byte 4/1 OUT 6 delay high byte ( , *100) 4/2 OUT 6 delay low byte 140

147 4/3 OUT 3 delay high byte ( , *100) 5/1 OUT 3 delay low byte 5/2 OUT 2 delay high byte ( , *100) 5/3 OUT 2 delay low byte 6/1 OUT 1 delay high byte ( , *100) 6/2 OUT 1 delay low byte 6/3 Spare 7/1 Spare 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum high byte 8/3 Checksum low byte 5 Transmit Buffer "N" Commands ( 3 5 n ) When n=0 then the previous Receive Number command would define the number "N". Otherwise this command would take the number "N" defined by the subcmd field (1-15 ). N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 5 n 1 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Load Metered Data 2 Show Demand Currents Data 3 Show Max Demand Currents Data 4 Show Min Demand Currents Data 5 Show Magnitudes Load Meter Data 6 Show Average Load Current 7 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Differential Meter Data 8 Send First Fault Record 9 Send Next Fault Record 10 Not used 11 Not used 12 Send First Operation Record 13 Send Next Operation Record 14 Breaker Status (including contact inputs) 15 Power Fail Data 5.1 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Load Metered Data ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x51 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 29 2/1 Aux. Status byte (Meter Mode) Bits 0 & 1 : 0=Winding1; 1=Winding2; 2=Winding3 Bit 2 : 0 = Wye PTs; 1 = Delta PTs Bit 3 : 0 = kwhr; 1 = MWhr 2/2 IA-1 Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 IA-1 Mid byte 3/1 IA-1 Lo byte 3/2 IA-1 Angle Hi byte 3/3 IA-1 Angle Lo byte 4/1 IB-1 Hi byte 4/2 IB-1 Mid byte 4/3 IB-1 Lo byte 5/1 IB-1 Angle Hi byte 5/2 IB-1 Angle Lo byte 5/3 IC-1 Hi byte 6/1 IC-1 Mid byte 141

148 6/2 IC-1 Lo byte 6/3 IC-1 Angle Hi byte 7/1 IC-1 Angle Lo byte 7/2 IN-1 Hi byte 7/3 IN-1 Mid byte 8/1 IN-1 Lo byte 8/2 IN-1 Angle Hi byte 8/3 IN-1 Angle Lo byte 9/1 I0-1 (Mag) Hi byte 9/2 I0-1 (Mag) Mid byte 9/3 I0-1 (Mag) Lo byte 10/1 I0-1 Angle Hi byte 10/2 I0-1 Angle Lo byte 10/3 I1-1 (Mag) Hi byte 11/1 I1-1 (Mag) Mid byte 11/2 I1-1 (Mag) Lo byte 11/3 I1-1 Angle Hi byte 12/1 I1-1 Angle Lo byte 12/2 I2-1 (Mag) Hi byte 12/3 I2-1 (Mag) Mid byte 13/1 I2-1 (Mag) Lo byte 13/2 I2-1 Angle Hi byte 13/3 I2-1 Angle Lo byte 14/1 IA-2 Hi byte 14/2 IA-2 Mid byte 14/3 IA-2 Lo byte 15/1 IA-2 Angle Hi byte 15/2 IA-2 Angle Hi byte 15/3 IB-2 Hi byte 16/1 IB-2 Mid byte 16/2 IB-2 Lo byte 16/3 IB-2 Angle Hi byte 17/1 IB-2 Angle Lo byte 17/2 IC-2 Hi byte 17/3 IC-2 Mid byte 18/1 IC-2 Lo byte 18/2 IC-2 Angle Hi byte 18/3 IC-2 Angle Lo byte 19/1 IG-2 Hi byte 19/2 IG-2 Mid byte 19/3 IG-2 Lo byte 20/1 IG-2 Angle Hi byte 20/2 IG-2 Angle Lo byte 20/3 I0-2 (Mag) Hi byte 21/1 I0-2 (Mag) Mid byte 21/2 I0-2 (Mag) Lo byte 21/3 I0-2 Angle Hi byte 22/1 I0-2 Angle Lo byte 22/2 I1-2 (Mag) Hi byte 22/3 I1-2 (Mag) Mid byte 23/1 I1-2 (Mag) Lo byte 23/2 I1-2 Angle Hi byte 23/3 I1-2 Angle Lo byte 24/1 I2-2 (Mag) Hi byte 24/2 I2-2 (Mag) Mid byte 24/3 I2-2 (Mag) Lo byte 25/1 I2-2 Angle Hi byte 25/2 I2-2 Angle Lo byte 25/3 Spare 142

149 26/1-29/3 Reserved for Tap Changer Position 5.2 Show Demand Currents Data ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x52 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 6 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Demand Ia Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Demand Ia Mid byte 3/1 Demand Ia Lo byte 3/2 Demand Ib Hi byte 3/3 Demand Ib Mid byte 4/1 Demand Ib Lo byte 4/2 Demand Ic Hi byte 4/3 Demand Ic Mid byte 5/1 Demand Ic Lo byte 5/2 Demand In/Ig Hi byte 5/3 Demand In/Ig Mid byte 6/1 Demand In/Ig Lo byte 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare 5.3 Show Maximum Demand Currents Data ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x53 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 12 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Max Dem Ia Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Max Dem Ia Mid byte 3/1 Max Dem Ia Lo byte 3/2 Max Dem Ia time yy 3/3 Max Dem Ia time mn 4/1 Max Dem Ia time dd 4/2 Max Dem Ia time hh 4/3 Max Dem Ia time mm 5/1 Max Dem Ib Hi byte 5/2 Max Dem Ib Mid byte 5/3 Max Dem Ib Lo byte 6/1 Max Dem Ib time yy 6/2 Max Dem Ib time mn 6/3 Max Dem Ib time dd 7/1 Max Dem Ib time hh 7/2 Max Dem Ib time mm 7/3 Max Dem Ic Hi byte 8/1 Max Dem Ic Mid byte 8/2 Max Dem Ic Lo byte 8/3 Max Dem Ic time yy 9/1 Max Dem Ic time mn 9/2 Max Dem Ic time dd 9/3 Max Dem Ic time hh 10/1 Max Dem Ic time mm 10/2 Max Dem In/Ig Hi byte 10/3 Max Dem In/Ig Mid byte 11/1 Max Dem In/Ig Lo byte 11/2 Max Dem In/Ig time yy 143

150 11/3 Max Dem In/Ig time mn 12/1 Max Dem In/Ig time dd 12/2 Max Dem In/Ig time hh 12/3 Max Dem In/Ig time mm 5.4 Show Minimum Demand Currents Data ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x53 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 12 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Min Dem Ia Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Min Dem Ia Mid byte 3/1 Min Dem Ia Lo byte 3/2 Min Dem Ia time yy 3/3 Min Dem Ia time mn 4/1 Min Dem Ia time dd 4/2 Min Dem Ia time hh 4/3 Min Dem Ia time mm 5/1 Min Dem Ib Hi byte 5/2 Min Dem Ib Mid byte 5/3 Min Dem Ib Lo byte 6/1 Min Dem Ib time yy 6/2 Min Dem Ib time mn 6/3 Min Dem Ib time dd 7/1 Min Dem Ib time hh 7/2 Min Dem Ib time mm 7/3 Min Dem Ic Hi byte 8/1 Min Dem Ic Mid byte 8/2 Min Dem Ic Lo byte 8/3 Min Dem Ic time yy 9/1 Min Dem Ic time mn 9/2 Min Dem Ic time dd 9/3 Min Dem Ic time hh 10/1 Min Dem Ic time mm 10/2 Min Dem In/Ig Hi byte 10/3 Min Dem In/Ig Mid byte 11/1 Min Dem In/Ig Lo byte 11/2 Min Dem In/Ig time yy 11/3 Min Dem In/Ig time mn 12/1 Min Dem In/Ig time dd 12/2 Min Dem In/Ig time hh 12/3 Min Dem In/Ig time mm 5.5 Show Magnitudes Load Metered Data ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x55 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 6 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Ia high byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Ia (mid byte) 3/1 Ia (low byte) 3/2 Ib (high byte) 3/3 Ib (mid byte) 4/1 Ib (low byte) 4/2 Ic (high byte) 144

151 4/3 Ic (mid byte) 5/1 Ic (low byte) 5/2 In/Ig (high byte) 5/3 In/Ig (mid byte) 6/1 In/Ig (low byte) 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare 5.6 Show Average Load Current ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x56 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 3 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Iavg (high byte) 2/3 Iavg (mid byte) 3/1 Iavg (low byte) 3/2 Spare 3/3 Spare 5.7 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Differential Metering ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x57 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 18 2/1 Aux. Status (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Iop A high byte (*800) 2/3 Iop A low byte 3/1 Iop B high byte (*800) 3/2 Iop B low byte 3/3 Iop C high byte (*800) 4/1 Iop C low byte 4/2 IresA-1 high byte (*800) 4/3 IresA-1 low byte 5/1 IresA-1 Angle high byte 5/2 IresA-1 Angle low byte 5/3 IresB-1 high byte (*800) 6/1 IresB-1 low byte 6/2 IresB-1 Angle high byte 6/3 IresB-1 Angle low byte 7/1 IresC-1 high byte (*800) 7/2 IresC-1 low byte 7/3 IresC-1 Angle high byte 8/1 IresC-1 Angle low byte 8/2 IresA-2 high byte (*800) 8/3 IresA-2 low byte 9/1 IresA-2 Angle high byte 9/2 IresA-2 Angle low byte 9/3 IresB-2 high byte (*800) 10/1 IresB-2 low byte 10/2 IresB-2 Angle high byte 10/3 IresB-2 Angle low byte 11/1 IresC-2 high byte (*800) 11/2 IresC-2 low byte 11/3 IresC-2 Angle high byte 12/1 IresC-2 Angle low byte 12/2 2nd Harmonic % A-1 byte (*2) 145

152 12/3 2nd Harmonic % B-1 byte (*2) 13/1 2nd Harmonic % C-1 byte (*2) 13/2 2nd Harmonic % A-2 byte (*2) 13/3 2nd Harmonic % B-2 byte (*2) 14/1 2nd Harmonic % C-2 byte (*2) 14/2 5th Harmonic % A-1 byte (*2) 14/3 5th Harmonic % B-1 byte (*2) 15/1 5th Harmonic % C-1 byte (*2) 15/2 5th Harmonic % A-2 byte (*2) 15/3 5th Harmonic % B-2 byte (*2) 16/1 5th Harmonic % C-2 byte (*2) 16/2 All Harmonics % A-1 byte (*2) 16/3 All Harmonics % B-1 byte (*2) 17/1 All Harmonics % C-1 byte (*2) 17/2 All Harmonics % A-2 byte (*2) 17/3 All Harmonics % B-2 byte (*2) 18/1 All Harmonics % C-2 byte (*2) 18/2 Winding 1 Tap (*10) 18/3 Winding 2 Tap (*10) 5.8 Send First Differential Fault Record ( ) The Differential Fault Record command returns data in two parts. This command requires a data byte message to indicate which part of the record is to be returned. If the data message 1/2 = 0, part 1 of the record is returned. If the data message 1/2 = 1, part 2 of the record is returned. Fault Type Definitions 00 87T 01 87H 02 51P N P N P N P G P G P G ECI-1 17 ECI-2 18 Thru Flt 19 Harm Rest Data byte 1/1 0 = Reserved for Unreported Records 1/2 0 = Send part 1 of Record, 1 = Send part 2 of Record 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2 Msg byte Definition-Part 1 of Record 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x58 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 28 2/1 Param Flag high byte 2/2 Param Flag low byte 146

153 2/3 Fault Type (element) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte) 4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds 6/2 Clear Time Hi byte (*1000) 6/3 Clear Time Lo byte 7/1 Winding1 Tap Hi byte (*10) 7/2 Winding1 Tap Lo byte 7/3 Winding2 Tap Hi byte (*10) 8/1 Winding2 Tap Lo byte 8/2 I operate A Hi byte (*800) 8/3 I operate A Lo byte 9/1 I operate B Hi byte (*800) 9/2 I operate B Lo byte 9/3 I operate C Hi byte (*800) 10/1 I operate C Lo byte 10/2 I restraint A-1 Hi byte (*800) 10/3 I restraint A-1 Lo byte 11/1 I restraint B-1 Hi byte (*800) 11/2 I restraint B-1 Lo byte 11/3 I restraint C-1 Hi byte (*800) 12/1 I restraint C-1 Lo byte 12/2 I restraint A-2 Hi byte (*800) 12/3 I restraint A-2 Lo byte 13/1 I restraint B-2 Hi byte (*800) 13/2 I restraint B-2 Lo byte 13/3 I restraint C-2 Hi byte (*800) 14/1 I restraint C-2 Lo byte 14/2 2nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) 14/3 5th Harmonic A-1 (*2) 15/1 All Harmonics A-1 (*2) 15/2 2nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) 15/3 5th Harmonic B-1 (*2) 16/1 All Harmonics B-1 (*2) 16/2 2nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) 16/3 5th Harmonic C-1 (*2) 17/1 All Harmonics C-1 (*2) 17/2 2nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) 17/3 5th Harmonic A-2 (*2) 18/1 All Harmonics A-2 (*2) 18/2 2nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) 18/3 5th Harmonic B-2 (*2) 19/1 All Harmonic B-2 (*2) 19/2 2nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) 19/3 5th Harmonic C-2 (*2) 20/1 All Harmonic C-2 (*2) 20/2 I restraint A-1 (Ang) Hi byte 20/3 I restraint A-1 (Ang) Lo byte 21/1 I restraint B-1 (Ang) Hi byte 21/2 I restraint B-1 (Ang) Lo byte 21/3 I restraint C-1 (Ang) Hi byte 22/1 I restraint C-1 (Ang) Lo byte 147

154 22/2 I restraint A-2 (Ang) Hi byte 22/3 I restraint A-2 (Ang) Lo byte 23/1 I restraint B-2 (Ang) Hi byte 23/2 I restraint B-2 (Ang) Lo byte 23/3 I restraint C-2 (Ang) Hi byte 24/1 I restraint C-2 (Ang) Lo byte 24/2 Spare 24/3 Spare 25/1 Spare 25/2 Spare 25/3 Spare 26/1 Spare 26/2 Spare 26/3 Spare 27/1 Spare 27/2 Spare 27/3 Spare 28/1 Spare 28/2 Spare 28/3 Spare Data byte See previous Msg byte Definition-Part 2 of Record 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x58 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 28 2/1 Param Flag high byte 2/2 Param Flag low byte 2/3 Fault Type (element) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte) 4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds 6/2 Clear Time Hi byte (*1000) 6/3 Clear Time Lo byte 7/1 I A-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 7/2 I A-1 low byte 7/3 I B-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 8/1 I B-1 low byte 8/2 I C-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 8/3 I C-1 low byte 9/1 I N-1 high byte (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) 9/2 I N-1 low byte 9/3 I A-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 10/1 I A-2 low byte 10/2 I B-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 10/3 I B-2 low byte 11/1 I C-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 11/2 I C-2 low byte 11/3 I G-2 high byte (*800 / Ground Wdg2 Scale) 12/1 I G-2 low byte 148

155 12/2 Spare 12/3 I A-1 (ang) high byte 13/1 I A-1 (ang) low byte 13/2 I B-1 (ang) high byte 13/3 I B-1 (ang) low byte 14/1 I C-1 (ang) high byte 14/2 I C-1 (ang) low byte 14/3 I N-1 (ang) high byte 15/1 I N-1 (ang) low byte 15/2 I A-2 (ang) high byte 15/3 I A-2 (ang) low byte 16/1 I B-2 (ang) high byte 16/2 I B-2 (ang) low byte 16/3 I C-2 (ang) high byte 17/1 I C-2 (ang) low byte 17/2 I G-2 (ang) high byte 17/3 I G-2 (ang) low byte 18/1 I 0-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 18/2 I 0-1 low byte 18/3 I 1-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 19/1 I 1-1 low byte 19/2 I 2-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 19/3 I 2-1 low byte 20/1 I 0-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 20/2 I 0-2 low byte 20/3 I 1-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 21/1 I 1-2 low byte 21/2 I 2-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 21/3 I 2-2 low byte 22/1 I 0-1 (ang) high byte 22/2 I 0-1 (ang) low byte 22/3 I 1-1 (ang) high byte 23/1 I 1-1 (ang) low byte 23/2 I 2-1 (ang) high byte 23/3 I 2-1 (ang) low byte 24/1 I 0-2 (ang) high byte 24/2 I 0-2 (ang) low byte 24/3 I 1-2 (ang) high byte 25/1 I 1-2 (ang) low byte 25/2 I 2-2 (ang) high byte 25/3 I 2-2 (ang) low byte 26/1 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 high byte 26/2 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 low byte 26/3 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 high byte 27/1 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 low byte 27/2 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 high byte 27/3 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 low byte 28/1 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 high byte 28/2 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 low byte 28/3 Spare If no fault data entry is present then send all 0s for 2/1 through 27/ Send Next Differential Fault Record ( ) Same format as ( ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x

156 5.12 Send First Operations Record ( ) Message Number Definitions 00 87T Trip 01 87H Trip 02 51P-1 Trip 03 51N-1 Trip 04 50P-1 Trip 05 50N-1 Trip P-1 Trip N-1 Trip Trip 09 51P-2 Trip 10 51G-2 Trip 11 50P-2 Trip 12 50G-2 Trip P-2 Trip G-2 Trip Trip 16 ECI-1 17 ECI-2 18 Thru Flt 19 Harm Rest 31 Fault Clear Failed 32 Fault Cleared 33 Harmonic Restraint 34 Manual Trip 35 Manual Trip Failed 40 87T Enabled 41 87H Enabled 42 51P-1 Enabled 43 51P-2 Enabled 44 51N-1 Enabled 45 51G-2 Enabled 46 50P-1 Enabled 47 50P-2 Enabled 48 50N-1 Enabled 49 50G-2 Enabled P-1 Enabled P-2 Enabled N-1 Enabled G-2 Enabled Enabled Enabled 56 ALT1 Input Closed 57 ALT2 Input Closed 58 Event Cap1 Init 59 Event Cap2 Init 60 Wave Cap. Init 61 Trip Input Closed 62 SPR Input Closed 63 TCM Input Closed 64 Primary Set Active 65 Alt1 Set Active 66 Alt2 Set Active 70 Thru Flt Cntr Alm 71 Thru Flt kasum Alm 72 Thru Flt Cycle Alm 150

157 73 OC Trip Cntr Alarm 74 Diff Trip Cntr Alm 75 Phase Demand Alarm 76 Neutral Demand Alm 77 Load Current Alarm 78 Trip Coil Failure 79 High PF Alarm 80 Low PF Alarm 81 kvar Demand Alarm 82 Pos. kvar Alarm 83 Neg. kvar Alarm 84 Pos. Watt Alarm 1 85 Pos. Watt Alarm 2 90 Event Capture #1 91 Event Capture #2 92 Waveform Capture 93 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 1 94 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 1 95 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 2 96 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg ROM Failure 101 RAM Failure 102 Self Test Failed 103 EEPROM Failure 104 BATRAM Failure 105 DSP Failure 106 Control Power Fail 107 Editor Access T Disabled H Disabled P-1 Disabled P-2 Disabled N-1 Disabled G-2 Disabled P-1 Disabled P-2 Disabled N-1 Disabled G-2 Disabled P-1 Disabled P-2 Disabled N-1 Disabled G-2 Disabled Disabled Disabled 136 ALT1 Input Opened 137 ALT2 Input Opened 138 Event Cap1 Reset 139 Event Cap2 Reset 140 Wave Cap. Reset 141 Trip Input Opened 142 SPR Input Opened 143 TCM Input Opened 162 ULI1 Input Closed 163 ULI1 Input Opened 164 ULI2 Input Closed 165 ULI2 Input Opened 166 ULI3 Input Closed 167 ULI3 Input Opened 168 ULI4 Input Closed 151

158 169 ULI4 Input Opened 170 ULI5 Input Closed 171 ULI5 Input Opened 172 ULI6 Input Closed 173 ULI6 Input Opened 174 ULI7 Input Closed 175 ULI7 Input Opened 176 ULI8 Input Closed 177 ULI8 Input Opened 178 ULI9 Input Closed 179 ULI9 Input Opened 180 CRI Input Closed 181 CRI Input Opened Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x5c 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 5 2/1 Year 2/2 Month 2/3 Day 3/1 Hour 3/2 Minute 3/3 Second 4/1 Hundredths of second 4/2 Message Number 4/3 Value (if any) Hi byte 5/1 Value (if any) Lo byte 5/2 Operation Number (high byte) 5/3 Operation Number (low byte) If the operation entry doesn t exist then send 0 s in all the bytes 2/1 through 5/ Send Next Operations Record ( ) Same format as ( ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x5d Breaker Status (Including I/O Status) ( ) Input status bit 0=opened, 1=closed. Output status bit 0=de-energized, 1=energized. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x5e 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 3 2/1 Contact Input Status (high byte) Bit 0 - Input 9 Bit 1 - Spare Bit 2 - Spare Bit 3 - Spare Bit 4 - Spare Bit 5 - Spare Bit 6 - Spare Bit 7 - Spare 2/2 Contact Input Status (low byte) Bit 0 - Input 1 Bit 1 - Input 2 Bit 2 - Input 3 152

159 Bit 3 - Input 4 Bit 4 - Input 5 Bit 5 - Input 6 Bit 6 - Input 7 Bit 7 - Input 8 2/3 Self Test Status (high byte) Bit 0 - DSP ROM Bit 1 - DSP Internal RAM Bit 2 - DSP External RAM Bit 3 - ADC Failure Bit 4 - DSP +/-5V Bit 5 - DSP +/-15V Bit 6 - DSP +5V Bit 7 - DSP Comm. Failure 3/1 Self Test Status (low byte) Bit 0 - CPU RAM Bit 1 - CPU EPROM Bit 2 - CPU NVRAM Bit 3 - CPU EEPROM Bit 4 - Bit 5 - Bit 6 - Bit 7-3/2 Output Contact Status (high byte) Bit 0 - Spare Bit 1 - Spare Bit 2 - Spare Bit 3 - Spare Bit 4 - Spare Bit 5 - Spare Bit 6 - Spare Bit 7 - Spare 3/3 Output Contact Status (low byte) Bit 0 - Trip Bit 1 - Output 1 Bit 2 - Output 2 Bit 3 - Output 3 Bit 4 - Output 4 Bit 5 - Output 5 Bit 6 - Output 6 Bit 7 - Output Power Fail Data ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x5f 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 4 2/1 Year 2/2 Month 2/3 Day 3/1 Hour 3/2 Minute 3/3 Second 4/1 Hundredths of second 4/2 Power Fail Type Bit 0: DC Control Bit 1: +5/+15V 4/3 Breaker Status (state) 153

160 6 Load Profile Commands & Records ( 3 6 n ) N Definition 0 Define Load Profile Settings 1 Start Load Profile Data Accumulation 2 Freeze Load Profile Data 3 Report Load Profile Header-All 4 Report Next Load Profile Data Block 5 Retransmit Last Load Profile Data Block 6 Report Load Profile Header-Last 7 Not in use 8 Fault Record-First 9 Fault Record-Next 10 Restraint Record-First 11 Restraint Record-Next 12 Oldest Unreported Differential Record 13 Oldest Unreported Through Fault Record 14 Oldest Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record 15 Oldest Unreported Operations Record 6.0 Load Profile Settings ( ) Reserved for user configuration. 6.1 Accumulate Load Profile Data ( ) 6.2 Freeze Load Profile Data ( ) 6.3 Report Load Profile Data Header(All Data) ( ) This command is used to initialize the unit to report the entire contents of the accumulated load profile. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2-4/1 Report Column (1-9) Attribute Number 4/2 spare 4/3-9/3 Unit Id Name (16 chars) 10/1-11/2 Time Tag of the first Block reporting (5 bytes :yy,mn,dd,hh,mm in order) 11/3 spare 12/1-12/2 Report Column 1 Attribute Scale(high, low byte) 12/3-17/3 Report Column (2-9) Attribute Scale Attr# Description Dynamic Scale 0 Demand Ia 1 1 Demand Ib 1 2 Demand Ic 1 3 Demand In Report Next Load Profile Data Block ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Demand Interval (5/15/30/60 Mins) 1/2-1/3 Record # (a number starting from 1 to #of blocks) 2/1 Total Number Data Bytes (1 through 126) 2/2-3/3 Time Tag of the first Block (5 bytes : hh, mm, dd, mn, yy in order) NOTE: Different order from command time stamp. 4/1-45/3 Data Blocks (up to 126 bytes of data) 154

161 Each data block is a two byte word that has the following bit configuration: bit 0-13 : data values bit 14 : sign bit (1=multiply bits 0-13 by -1) bit 15 : scale bit (0=multiply bits 0-13 by 1, 1=multiply bits 0-13 by attribute scale) Example: Report column 1 is profiling attribute #0 (Demand kw-a) and has a dynamic scale = 122 Data word Binary pattern Scale Reported value 8, ,000 kw 24, ,000 kw 16, ,912 kw 49, ,912 kw To obtain the reported value column from the data word, a listing for a c routine should look as follows: long int ConvertData( unsigned short,unsigned short ); long int report_value; unsigned short intdata_word; report_value = ConvertData( data_word,attribute_scale); { int scale=1; if ( data_word & 0x4000 ) /* is sign bit set? */ { scale = -1; } if ( data_word & 0x8000 ) /* is scale bit set? */ { scale *= attribute_scale; } } return( (data_word & 0x3fff) * scale ); 6.5 Retransmit the Last Load Profile Data Block ( ) Same as Report Next Load Profile Data Block except its the previous data sent! 6.6 Report Load Profile Data Header(Last Data) ( ) This command is used to initialize the unit to report the entire contents of the accumulated load profile. 6.8 Send First Through Fault Record (3 6 8) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x68 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 30 2/1 Param Flag (high byte) 2/2 Param Flag (low byte) 2/3 Fault Type (element) (See Send First Differential Fault Record, command for Fault Type Definitions) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte) 155

162 4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds 6/2 Clear Time High byte (*1000) 6/3 Clear Time Low byte 7/1 Relay Time Most Significant Hi byte (*1000) 7/2 Relay Time Most Significant Lo byte 7/3 Relay Time Least Significant Hi byte 8/1 Relay Time Least Significant Lo byte 8/2 I A-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 8/3 I A-1 Lo byte 9/1 I B-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 9/2 I B-1 Lo byte 9/3 I C-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 10/1 I C-1 Lo byte 10/2 I N-1 Hi byte (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) 10/3 I N-1 Lo byte 11/1 I A-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 11/2 I A-2 Lo byte 11/3 I B-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 12/1 I B-2 Lo byte 12/2 I C-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 12/3 I C-2 Lo byte 13/1 I G-2 Hi byte (*800 / Ground Wdg2 Scale) 13/2 I G-2 Lo byte 13/3 Spare 14/1 I A-1 (ang) Hi byte 14/2 I A-1 (ang) Lo byte 14/3 I B-1 (ang) Hi byte 15/1 I B-1 (ang) Lo byte 15/2 I C-1 (ang) Hi byte 15/3 I C-1 (ang) Lo byte 16/1 I N-1 (ang) Hi byte 16/2 I N-1 (ang) Lo byte 16/3 I A-2 (ang) Hi byte 17/1 I A-2 (ang) Lo byte 17/2 I B-2 (ang) Hi byte 17/3 I B-2 (ang) Lo byte 18/1 I C-2 (ang) Hi byte 18/2 I C-2 (ang) Lo byte 18/3 I G-2 (ang) Hi byte 19/1 I G-2 (ang) Lo byte 19/2 I 0-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 19/3 I 0-1 Lo byte 20/1 I 1-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 20/2 I 1-1 Lo byte 20/3 I 2-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 21/1 I 2-1 Lo byte 21/2 I 0-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 21/3 I 0-2 Lo byte 22/1 I 1-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 22/2 I 1-2 Lo byte 22/3 I 2-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 23/1 I 2-2 Lo byte 23/2 I 0-1 (ang) Hi byte 156

163 23/3 I 0-1 (ang) Lo byte 24/1 I 1-1 (ang) Hi byte 24/2 I 1-1 (ang) Lo byte 24/3 I 2-1 (ang) Hi byte 25/1 I 2-1 (ang) Lo byte 25/2 I 0-2 (ang) Hi byte 25/3 I 0-2 (ang) Lo byte 26/1 I 1-2 (ang) Hi byte 26/2 I 1-2 (ang) Lo byte 26/3 I 2-2 (ang) Hi byte 27/1 I 2-2 (ang) Lo byte 27/2 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 high byte 27/3 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 low byte 28/1 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 high byte 28/2 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 low byte 28/3 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 high byte 29/1 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 low byte 29/2 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 high byte 29/3 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 low byte 30/1 Spare 30/2 Spare 30/3 Spare If no fault data entry is present then send all 0s for 2/1 through 30/ Send Next Through Fault Record (3 6 9) Same format as ( ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x Send First Harmonic Restraint Record (3 6 10) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x6a 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 42 2/1 Param Flag (high byte) 2/2 Param Flag (low byte) 2/3 Fault Type (element) (See Send First Differential Fault Record, command for Fault Type Definitions) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte) 4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds Values at Start 6/2 Winding 1 Tap Hi byte (*10) 6/3 Winding 1 Tap Lo byte 7/1 Winding 2 Tap Hi byte (*10) 7/2 Winding 2 Tap Lo byte 7/3 I operate A hi byte (*800) 8/1 I operate A lo byte 8/2 I operate B hi byte (*800) 157

164 8/3 I operate B lo byte 9/1 I operate C hi byte (*800) 9/2 I operate C lo byte 9/3 I restraint A-1 Hi byte (*800) 10/1 I restraint A-1 Lo byte 10/2 I restraint B-1 Hi byte (*800) 10/3 I restraint B-1 Lo byte 11/1 I restraint C-1 Hi byte (*800) 11/2 I restraint C-1 Lo byte 11/3 I restraint A-2 Hi byte (*800) 12/1 I restraint A-2 Lo byte 12/2 I restraint B-2 Hi byte (*800) 12/3 I restraint B-2 Lo byte 13/1 I restraint C-2 Hi byte (*800) 13/2 I restraint C-2 Lo byte 13/3 2nd Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 14/1 5th Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 14/2 All Harmonics A-1 byte (*2) 14/3 2nd Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 15/1 5th Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 15/2 All Harmonics B-1 byte (*2) 15/3 2nd Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 16/1 5th Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 16/2 All Harmonics C-1 byte (*2) 16/3 2nd Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 17/1 5th Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 17/2 All Harmonics A-2 byte (*2) 17/3 2nd Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 18/1 5th Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 18/2 All Harmonics B-2 byte (*2) 18/3 2nd Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 19/1 5th Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 19/2 All Harmonics C-2 byte (*2) 19/3 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Hi byte 20/1 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Lo byte 20/2 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Hi byte 20/3 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Lo byte 21/1 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Hi byte 21/2 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Lo byte 21/3 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Hi byte 22/1 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Lo byte 22/2 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Hi byte 22/3 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Lo byte 23/1 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Hi byte 23/2 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Lo byte Values at End 23/3 Winding 1 Tap Hi byte (*10) 24/1 Winding 1 Tap Lo byte 24/2 Winding 2 Tap Hi byte (*10) 24/3 Winding 2 Tap Lo byte 25/1 I operate A hi byte (*800) 25/2 I operate A lo byte 25/3 I operate B hi byte (*800) 26/1 I operate B lo byte 26/2 I operate C hi byte (*800) 26/3 I operate C lo byte 27/1 I restraint A-1 Hi byte (*800) 27/2 I restraint A-1 Lo byte 158

165 27/3 I restraint B-1 Hi byte (*800) 28/1 I restraint B-1 Lo byte 28/2 I restraint C-1 Hi byte (*800) 28/3 I restraint C-1 Lo byte 29/1 I restraint A-2 Hi byte (*800) 29/2 I restraint A-2 Lo byte 29/3 I restraint B-2 Hi byte (*800) 30/1 I restraint B-2 Lo byte 30/2 I restraint C-2 Hi byte (*800) 30/3 I restraint C-2 Lo byte 31/1 2nd Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 31/2 5th Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 31/3 All Harmonics A-1 byte (*2) 32/1 2nd Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 32/2 5th Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 32/3 All Harmonics B-1 byte (*2) 33/1 2nd Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 33/2 5th Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 33/3 All Harmonics C-1 byte (*2) 34/1 2nd Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 34/2 5th Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 34/3 All Harmonics A-2 byte (*2) 35/1 2nd Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 35/2 5th Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 35/3 All Harmonics B-2 byte (*2) 36/1 2nd Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 36/2 5th Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 36/3 All Harmonics C-2 byte (*2) 37/1 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Hi byte 37/2 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Lo byte 37/3 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Hi byte 38/1 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Lo byte 38/2 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Hi byte 38/3 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Lo byte 39/1 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Hi byte 39/2 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Lo byte 39/3 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Hi Lo byte 40/1 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Lo Hi byte 40/2 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Hi byte 40/3 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Lo byte 41/1 Duration Most Significant Hi byte (*1000) 41/2 Duration Most Significant Lo byte 41/3 Duration Least Significant Hi byte 42/1 Duration Least Significant Lo byte 42/2 Spare 42/3 Spare If no harmonic restraint data entry is present then send all 0s for 2/1 through 27/ Send Next Harmonic Restraint Record (3 6 11) Same format as ( ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6b Oldest Unreported Differential Fault Record (3 6 12) This command will report the oldest unreported differential fault record. The command can be issued to determine the number of unreported records that exist in the unit s queue. The issuance of the command will decrement the unit s counter by one record. 159

166 Unreported Command Byte 0 = Get Oldest Unreported, 1 = Repeat last command Data Byte Definition 1/1 Unreported Command Byte 1/2 Record Part Byte (0=Part 1, 1=Part 2) 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2 Msg Byte Definition Same format as (3 5 8) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6c Oldest Unreported Through Fault Record (3 6 13) This command will report the oldest unreported through fault record. The command can be issued to determine the number of unreported records that exist in the unit s queue. The issuance of the command will decrement the unit s counter by one record. Unreported Command Byte 0 = Get Oldest Unreported, 1 = Repeat last command Data Byte Definition 1/1 Unreported Command Byte 1/2 Reserved for Differential Record Part 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2 Msg Byte Definition Same format as (3 6 8) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6d Oldest Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record (3 6 14) This command will report the oldest unreported harmonic restraint record. The command can be issued to determine the number of unreported records that exist in the unit s queue. The issuance of the command will decrement the unit s counter by one record. Unreported Command Byte 0 = Get Oldest Unreported, 1 = Repeat last command Data Byte Definition 1/1 Unreported Command Byte 1/2 Reserved for Differential Record Part 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2 Msg Byte Definition Same format as (3 6 10) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6e Oldest Unreported Operations Record (3 6 15) This command will report the oldest unreported operations record. The command can be issued to determine the number of unreported records that exist in the unit s queue. The issuance of the command will decrement the unit s counter by one record. Unreported Command Byte 0 = Get Oldest Unreported, 1 = Repeat last command Data Byte Definition 1/1 Unreported Command Byte 1/2 Reserved for Differential Record Part 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2 160

167 Msg Byte Definition Same format as (3 5 12) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6f. 9 Trip and Energize Commands ( 3 9 n ) 9.0 Trip Command (3 9 0) N Definition 0 Trip Command 2 Energize Output Contact Command 3 Set/Reset Outputs Command The TRIP command will be issued to the TPU. This command has a data message that contains the Password and a command verification code for trip. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0x Energize Output Contact Command (3 9 2) The test output contact command will be issued to the TPU. This command has a data message that contains the Password and a command verification code and a 16 bit word indicating which contacts should be closed. The output contact will be a momentary closure for the time period specified in the configuration menu for trip failure time. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0x92 3/1 Output Contact State Bit Spare 3/2 Output Contact State Bit 0 - TRIP Bit 1 - OUT1 Bit 2 - OUT2 Bit 3 - OUT3 Bit 4 - OUT4 Bit 5 - OUT5 Bit 6 - OUT6 Bit 7 - OUT7 3/3 Output Contact State Confirmation Bit Spare 4/1 Output Contact State Confirmation Bit 0 - TRIP Bit 1 - OUT1 Bit 2 - OUT2 Bit 3 - OUT3 Bit 4 - OUT4 Bit 5 - OUT5 161

168 Bit 6 - OUT6 Bit 7 - OUT7 4/2 Checksum high byte 4/3 Checksum low byte 9.3 Set/Reset Output Contacts Command (3 9 3) This command allows for the assertion/deassertion of the ULO1 to ULO9 logical outputs. It also provides the means to reset the sealed in logical output contacts. Outputs denoted with an * are sealed in and can only be reset. Bit = 0, Output Not Energized/No Change in Status. Bit = 1, Output Energized/Change in Status. Bit Output Byte1 Output Byte2 Output Byte3 7 87T* 150P-1* 150G-2* 6 87H* 50P-2* 46-1* 5 2HROA* 150P-2* 46-2* 4 5HROA* 51N-1* 63* 3 AHROA* 51G-2* ULO1 2 51P-1* 50N-1* ULO2 1 51P-2* 150N-1* ULO3 0 50P-1* 50G-2* ULO4 Bit Output Byte4 Output Bytes5-8 7 ULO5 SPARE 6 ULO6 SPARE 5 ULO7 SPARE 4 ULO8 SPARE 3 ULO9 SPARE 2 SPARE SPARE 1 SPARE SPARE 0 SPARE SPARE Example: To send a command to clear 150G-2* and set ULO4, the following command bytes should be issued. Set/Reset Output Byte3 = 01 hex Status Change Output Byte3 = 81 hex This allows a change to occur for outputs in bit position 7 and 0. Note that you can only clear * (sealed in) outputs. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0x93 3/1 Set/Reset Output Byte1 3/2 Set/Reset Output Byte2 3/3 Set/Reset Output Byte3 4/1 Set/Reset Output Byte4 4/2 Set/Reset Output Byte5 4/3 Set/Reset Output Byte6 5/1 Set/Reset Output Byte7 5/2 Set/Reset Output Byte8 5/3 Spare 6/1 Spare 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare 7/1 Status Change Output Byte1 7/2 Status Change Output Byte2 162

169 7/3 Status Change Output Byte3 8/1 Status Change Output Byte4 8/2 Status Change Output Byte5 8/3 Status Change Output Byte6 9/1 Status Change Output Byte7 9/2 Status Change Output Byte8 9/3 Spare 10/1 Spare 10/2 Spare 10/3 Spare 11/1 Spare 11/2 Checksum high byte 11/3 Checksum low byte 10 Receive Buffer "N" Commands ( 3 10 n ) N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 10 n 1 Communications Settings 10.1 Receive Communications Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Port configuration byte bit 0-3 = port baud rate (0=300,1=1200,2=2400,3=4800, 4=9600,5=19200,6=38400) bit 4-5 = parity (0=None,1=Odd,2=Even) bit 6 = number of data bits (0=seven,1=eight) bit 7 = number of stop bits (0=one,1=two) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xa1 3/1 Unit Address high byte 3/2 Unit Address low byte 3/3 Front Panel RS232 configuration byte 4/1 Rear Panel RS232 or INCOM configuration byte 4/2 Rear Panel RS485 configuration byte 4/3 Rear Panel IRIG byte 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled 5/1 Spare 5/2 Spare 5/3 Aux Port Parameter 1 byte (0-255) 6/1 Aux Port Parameter 2 byte (0-255) 6/2 Aux Port Parameter 3 byte (0-255) 6/3 Aux Port Parameter 4 byte (0-255) 7/1 Aux Port Parameter 5 byte (0-255) 7/2 Aux Port Parameter 6 byte (0-255) 7/3 Aux Port Parameter 7 byte (0-255) 8/1 Aux Port Parameter 8 byte (0-255) 8/2 Aux Port Parameter 9 byte (0-255) 8/3 Aux Port Parameter 10 byte (0-255) 9/1 Aux Port Parameter Mode byte 9/2 Spare 9/3 Spare 163

170 10/1 Spare 10/2 Checksum high byte 10/3 Checksum low byte 11 Receive Edit Buffer "N" Commands (3 11 n) N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 11 n 1 Programmable Input Select and Index Tables 2 Programmable Input Negated AND Table 3 Programmable Input AND/OR Table 4 Programmable Input User Defined Input Names 5 Programmable Output Select Table 6 Programmable Output AND/OR Table 7 Programmable Output User Defined Output Names 8 Primary Relay Settings 9 Alternate 1 Relay Settings 10 Alternate 2 Relay Settings 11 Configuration Settings 12 Counter Settings 13 Alarm Settings 14 Real Time Clock 15 Output Delays 11.1 Receive Programmable Input Select and Index ( ) Bit = 0, Physical Input is selected. Bit = 1, Physical Input is not selected. Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Index byte is the offset into the TPU s logical input structure. Offset Definitions 00 87T Restrained Differential Trip 01 87H High Set Inst Differential Trip 02 51P-1 Wdg1 Phase Time OC Trip 03 51P-2 Wdg2 Phase Time OC Trip 04 51N-1 Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Trip 05 51G-2 Wdg2 Ground Time OC Trip 06 50P-1 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip 07 50P-2 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip 08 50N-1 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 09 50G-2 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip P-1 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip P-2 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip N-1 2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip G-2 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip Wdg1 Neg Seq Time OC Trip Wdg2 Neg Seq Time OC Trip 16 ALT1 Enables Alt 1 Settings 17 ALT2 Enables Alt 2 Settings 18 ECI1 Event-1 Capture Initiated 19 ECI2 Event-2 Capture Initiated 20 WCI Waveform Capture Initiated 21 Trip Initiates Diff Trip Output 22 SPR Sudden Pressure Input 23 TCM Trip Coil Monitoring 24 ULI1 User Logical Input 1 25 ULI2 User Logical Input 2 164

171 26 ULI3 User Logical Input 3 27 ULI4 User Logical Input 4 28 ULI5 User Logical Input 5 29 ULI6 User Logical Input 6 30 ULI7 User Logical Input 7 31 ULI8 User Logical Input 8 32 ULI9 User Logical Input 9 33 CRI Resets OC Trip and all Recloser Counters Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb1 3/1 INPUT1 high byte 3/2 INPUT1 low byte 3/3 INPUT1 index byte 4/1 INPUT2 high byte 4/2 INPUT2 low byte 4/3 INPUT2 index byte 5/1 INPUT3 high byte 5/2 INPUT3 low byte 5/3 INPUT3 index byte 6/1 INPUT4 high byte 6/2 INPUT4 low byte Bit Physical Input 6/3 INPUT4 index byte /1 INPUT5 high byte 0 IN6 7/2 INPUT5 low byte 1 IN7 7/3 INPUT5 index byte 2 IN8 8/1 INPUT6 high byte 3 IN2 8/2 INPUT6 low byte 4 IN9 8/3 INPUT6 index byte 5 IN3 9/1 INPUT7 high byte 6 IN4 9/2 INPUT7 low byte 7 IN5 9/3 INPUT7 index byte 8 IN1 10/1 INPUT8 high byte 9 Reserved 10/2 INPUT8 low byte 10 Reserved 10/3 INPUT8 index byte 11 Reserved 11/1 INPUT9 high byte 12 Reserved 11/2 INPUT9 low byte 13 Reserved 11/3 INPUT9 index byte 14 Reserved 12/1 INPUT10 high byte 15 Reserved 12/2 INPUT10 low byte 12/3 INPUT10 index byte 13/1 INPUT11 high byte 13/2 INPUT11 low byte 13/3 INPUT11 index byte 14/1 INPUT12 high byte 14/2 INPUT12 low byte 14/3 INPUT12 index byte 15/1 INPUT13 high byte 15/2 INPUT13 low byte 15/3 INPUT13 index byte 16/1 INPUT14 high byte 16/2 INPUT14 low byte 16/3 INPUT14 index byte 17/1 INPUT15 high byte 165

172 17/2 INPUT15 low byte 17/3 INPUT15 index byte 18/1 INPUT16 high byte 18/2 INPUT16 low byte 18/3 INPUT16 index byte 19/1 INPUT17 high byte 19/2 INPUT17 low byte 19/3 INPUT17 index byte 20/1 INPUT18 high byte 20/2 INPUT18 low byte 20/3 INPUT18 index byte 21/1 INPUT19 high byte 21/2 INPUT19 low byte 21/3 INPUT19 index byte 22/1 INPUT20 high byte 22/2 INPUT20 low byte 22/3 INPUT20 index byte 23/1 INPUT21 high byte 23/2 INPUT21 low byte 23/3 INPUT21 index byte 24/1 INPUT22 high byte 24/2 INPUT22 low byte 24/3 INPUT22 index byte 25/1 INPUT23 high byte 25/2 INPUT23 low byte 25/3 INPUT23 index byte 26/1 INPUT24 high byte 26/2 INPUT24 low byte 26/3 INPUT24 index byte 27/1 INPUT25 high byte 27/2 INPUT25 low byte 27/3 INPUT25 index byte 28/1 INPUT26 high byte 28/2 INPUT26 low byte 28/3 INPUT26 index byte 29/1 INPUT27 high byte 29/2 INPUT27 low byte 29/3 INPUT27 index byte 30/1 INPUT28 high byte 30/2 INPUT28 low byte 30/3 INPUT28 index byte 31/1 INPUT29 high byte 31/2 INPUT29 low byte 31/3 INPUT29 index byte 32/1 INPUT30 high byte 32/2 INPUT30 low byte 32/3 INPUT30 index byte 33/1 INPUT31 high byte 33/2 INPUT31 low byte 33/3 INPUT31 index byte 34/1 INPUT32 high byte 34/2 INPUT32 low byte 34/3 INPUT32 index byte 35/1 Spare 35/2 Checksum high byte 35/3 Checksum low byte 166

173 11.2 Receive Programmable Input Negated AND ( ) Bit = 0, Enabled when input is opened. Bit = 1, Enabled when input is closed. Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb2 3/1 INPUT1 high byte 3/2 INPUT1 low byte 3/3 INPUT2 high byte 4/1 INPUT2 low byte 4/2 INPUT3 high byte 4/3 INPUT3 low byte 5/1 INPUT4 high byte 5/2 INPUT4 low byte 5/3 INPUT5 high byte Bit Physical Input 6/1 INPUT5 low byte /2 INPUT6 high byte 0 IN6 6/3 INPUT6 low byte 1 IN7 7/1 INPUT7 high byte 2 IN8 7/2 INPUT7 low byte 3 IN2 7/3 INPUT8 high byte 4 IN9 8/1 INPUT8 low byte 5 IN3 8/2 INPUT9 high byte 6 IN4 8/3 INPUT9 low byte 7 IN5 9/1 INPUT10 high byte 8 IN1 9/2 INPUT10 low byte 9 Reserved 9/3 INPUT11 high byte 10 Reserved 10/1 INPUT11 low byte 11 Reserved 10/2 INPUT12 high byte 12 Reserved 10/3 INPUT12 low byte 13 Reserved 11/1 INPUT13 high byte 14 Reserved 11/2 INPUT13 low byte 15 Reserved 11/3 INPUT14 high byte 12/1 INPUT14 low byte 12/2 INPUT15 high byte 12/3 INPUT15 low byte 13/1 INPUT16 high byte 13/2 INPUT16 low byte 13/3 INPUT17 high byte 14/1 INPUT17 low byte 14/2 INPUT18 high byte 14/3 INPUT18 low byte 15/1 INPUT19 high byte 15/2 INPUT19 low byte 15/3 INPUT20 high byte 16/1 INPUT20 low byte 16/2 INPUT21 high byte 16/3 INPUT21 low byte 17/1 INPUT22 high byte 17/2 INPUT22 low byte 167

174 17/3 INPUT23 high byte 18/1 INPUT23 low byte 18/2 INPUT24 high byte 18/3 INPUT24 low byte 19/1 INPUT25 high byte 19/2 INPUT25 low byte 19/3 INPUT26 high byte 20/1 INPUT26 low byte 20/2 INPUT27 high byte 20/3 INPUT27 low byte 21/1 INPUT28 high byte 21/2 INPUT28 low byte 21/3 INPUT29 high byte 22/1 INPUT29 low byte 22/2 INPUT30 high byte 22/3 INPUT30 low byte 23/1 INPUT31 high byte 23/2 INPUT31 low byte 23/3 INPUT32 high byte 24/1 INPUT32 low byte 24/2 Checksum high byte 24/3 Checksum low byte 11.3 Receive Programmable Input AND/OR Select ( ) Bit = 0, Selected inputs are ORed together. Bit = 1, Selected inputs are ANDed together. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb3 3/1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits /2 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits /3 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits /1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 0-7 4/2 Checksum high byte 4/3 Checksum low byte Bit Logical Input INPUT1 1 INPUT INPUT28 28 INPUT29 29 INPUT30 30 INPUT31 31 INPUT Receive Programmable Input User Defined Strings ( ) User definable 8 char input strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL 168

175 Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb4 3/1-5/2 IN1 Character String 8 bytes 5/3-8/1 IN2 Character String 8 bytes 8/2-10/3 IN3 Character String 8 bytes 11/1-13/2 IN4 Character String 8 bytes 13/3-16/1 IN5 Character String 8 bytes 16/2-18/3 IN6 Character String 8 bytes 19/1-21/2 IN7 Character String 8 bytes 21/3-24/1 IN8 Character String 8 bytes 24/2-26/3 IN9 Character String 8 bytes 27/1-29/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 29/3-32/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 32/2-34/3 spare Character String 8 bytes 35/1-37/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 37/3-38/1 spares 38/2 Checksum high byte 38/3 Checksum low byte 11.5 Receive Programmable Output Select ( ) Programmable Output data transferred from PC to TPU2000. Bit = 0, Physical Output is selected. Bit = 1, Physical Output is not selected. Least significant low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. Least significant high byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Most significant low byte consists of bits 16 through 23. Most significant high byte consists of bits 24 through 31. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb5 3/1 Contact OUT5 most significant high byte 3/2 Contact OUT5 most significant low byte 3/3 Contact OUT5 least significant high byte 4/1 Contact OUT5 least significant low byte 4/2 Contact OUT7 most significant high byte 4/3 Contact OUT7 most significant low byte 5/1 Contact OUT7 least significant high byte 5/2 Contact OUT7 least significant low byte 5/3 Contact OUT4 most significant high byte 6/1 Contact OUT4 most significant low byte 6/2 Contact OUT4 least significant high byte 6/3 Contact OUT4 least significant low byte 7/1 Contact OUT6 most significant high byte 7/2 Contact OUT6 most significant low byte 7/3 Contact OUT6 least significant high byte 8/1 Contact OUT6 least significant low byte 169

176 8/2 Contact OUT3 most significant high byte 8/3 Contact OUT3 most significant low byte 9/1 Contact OUT3 least significant high byte 9/2 Contact OUT3 least significant low byte 9/3 Contact OUT2 most significant high byte 10/1 Contact OUT2 most significant low byte 10/2 Contact OUT2 least significant high byte 10/3 Contact OUT2 least significant low byte 11/1 Contact OUT1 most significant high byte 11/2 Contact OUT1 most significant low byte 11/3 Contact OUT1 least significant high byte 12/1 Contact OUT1 least significant low byte 12/2-22/1 spare 22/2 Checksum high byte 22/3 Checksum low byte Bit Logical Output TRIP 1 OUTPUT1 2 OUTPUT2 3 OUTPUT OUTPUT29 31 OUTPUT Receive Programmable Output AND/OR Index ( ) Bit = 0, Selected outputs are ORed together. Bit = 1, Selected outputs are ANDed together. Index byte is the offset into the TPU s logical output structure. Index Output Definition 00 DIFF Fixed Diff Trip, 87T or 87H 01 ALARM Fixed Self Check Alarm 02 87T Percentage Differential Trip 03 87H High Set Inst Diff Trip 04 2HROA 2nd Harm Restraint Output Alarm 05 5HROA 5th Harm Restraint Alarm 06 AHROA All Harm Restraint Alarm 07 TCFA Trip Circuit Failure Alarm 08 TFA Trip Failure Alarm 09 51P-1 Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Trip 10 51P-2 Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Trip 11 50P-1 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip P-1 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip 13 50P-2 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip P-2 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip 15 51N-1 Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Trip 16 51G-2 Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Trip 17 50N-1 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip N-1 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 19 50G-2 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip G-2 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip Wdg 1 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip Wdg 2 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip 23 87T-D Percentage Differential Disabled Alarm 170

177 24 87H-D High Set Inst Diff Disabled Alarm 25 51P-1D Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm 26 51P-2D Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm 27 51N-1D Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Disabled Alarm 28 51G-2D Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Disabled Alarm 29 50P-1D 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm 30 50P-2D 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm 31 50N-1D 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Disabled Alarm 32 50G-2D 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Disabled Alarm P-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm P-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm N-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst Disabled Alarm G-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst Disabled Alarm D Wdg 1 Neg Seq Time OC Disabled Alarm D Wdg 2 Neg Seq Time OC Disabled Alarm 39 PATA Phase A LED Alarm 40 PBTA Phase B LED Alarm 41 PCTA Phase C LED Alarm 42 PUA Pickup Alarm Sudden Pressure Input Alarm 44 THRUFA Through Fault Alarm 45 TFCA Through Fault Counter Alarm 46 TFKA Through Fault KAmp Summation Alarm 47 TFSCA Through Fault Cycle Summation Alarm 48 DTC Differential Trip Counter Alarm 49 OCTC Overcurrent Trip Counter Alarm 50 PDA Phase Current Demand Alarm 51 NDA Neutral Current Demand Alarm 52 PRIM Primary Set Enabled Alarm 53 ALT1 Alt1 Set Enabled Alarm 54 ALT2 Alt2 Set Enabled Alarm 55 STCA Settings Table Changed Alarm 56 87T* Percentage Diff Sealed In Alarm 57 87H* High Set Inst Diff Sealed In Alarm 58 2HROA* 2nd Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm 59 5HROA* 5th Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm 60 AHROA* All Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm 61 51P-1* Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm 62 51P-2* Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm 63 50P-1* 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm P-1* 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm 65 50P-2* 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm P-2* 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm 67 51N-1* Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Sealed In Alarm 68 51G-2* Wdg2 Ground Time OC Sealed In Alarm 69 50N-1* 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm N-1*2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm 71 50G-2* 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm G-2* 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm * Wdg1 Neg Seq Time OC Sealed In Alarm * Wdg2 Neg Seq Time OC Sealed In Alarm 75 63* Sudden Pressure Input Sealed In Alarm 76 ULO1 User Logical Output 1 77 ULO2 User Logical Output 2 78 ULO3 User Logical Output 3 79 ULO4 User Logical Output 4 80 ULO5 User Logical Output 5 81 ULO6 User Logical Output 6 82 ULO7 User Logical Output 7 171

178 83 ULO8 User Logical Output 8 84 ULO9 User Logical Output 9 85 LOADA Load Current 86 OCA-1 Overcurrent Alarm Winding 1 87 OCA-2 Overcurrent Alarm Winding 2 88 HLDA-1 High Level Detection Alarm Winding 1 89 LLDA-1 Low Level Detection Alarm Winding 1 90 HLDA-2 High Level Detection Alarm Winding 2 91 LLDA-2 Low Level Detection Alarm Winding 2 92 HPFA High Power Factor Alarm 93 LPFA Low Power Factor Alarm 94 VarDA Three Phase kvar Demand Alarm 95 PVArA Positive 3 Phase kilovar Alarm 96 NVArA Negative 3 Phase kilovar Alarm 97 PWatt1 Positive Watt Alarm 1 98 PWatt2 Positive Watt Alarm 2 Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb6 3/1 spare (bits 24-31) 3/2 spare (bits 16-23) 3/3 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits /1 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits 0-7 4/2 OUTPUT1 index byte 4/3 OUTPUT2 index byte 5/1 OUTPUT3 index byte 5/2 OUTPUT4 index byte 5/3 OUTPUT5 index byte 6/1 OUTPUT6 index byte 6/2 OUTPUT7 index byte 6/3 OUTPUT8 index byte 7/1 OUTPUT9 index byte 7/2 OUTPUT10 index byte 7/3 OUTPUT11 index byte 8/1 OUTPUT12 index byte 8/2 OUTPUT13 index byte 8/3 OUTPUT14 index byte 9/1 OUTPUT15 index byte 9/2 OUTPUT16 index byte 9/3 OUTPUT17 index byte 10/1 OUTPUT18 index byte 10/2 OUTPUT19 index byte 10/3 OUTPUT20 index byte 11/1 OUTPUT21 index byte 11/2 OUTPUT22 index byte 11/3 OUTPUT23 index byte 12/1 OUTPUT24 index byte 12/2 OUTPUT25 index byte 12/3 OUTPUT26 index byte 13/1 OUTPUT27 index byte 13/2 OUTPUT28 index byte 13/3 OUTPUT29 index byte 14/1 OUTPUT30 index byte 14/2 OUTPUT31 index byte 172

179 14/3 spare 15/1 spare 15/2 Checksum high byte 15/3 Checksum low byte Bit Physical Output not used reserved for fixed DIFF TRIP 1 Contact OUT5 2 Contact OUT7 3 Contact OUT4 4 Contact OUT6 5 Contact OUT3 6 Contact OUT2 7 Contact OUT1 8 spare 9 spare 10 spare 11 spare 12 spare 13 spare 14 spare 15 spare 11.7 Receive Programmable Output User Defined Names (3 11 7) User definable 8 char output strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb7 3/1-5/2 OUT1 Character String 8 bytes 5/3-8/1 OUT2 Character String 8 bytes 8/2-10/3 OUT3 Character String 8 bytes 11/1-13/2 OUT4 Character String 8 bytes 13/3-16/1 OUT5 Character String 8 bytes 16/2-18/3 OUT6 Character String 8 bytes 19/1-21/2 OUT7 Character String 8 bytes 21/3-24/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 24/2-26/3 spare Character String 8 bytes 27/1-29/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 29/3-32/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 32/2-34/3 spare Character String 8 bytes 35/1-37/2 spare Character String 8 bytes 37/3-40/1 spare Character String 8 bytes 40/2 Checksum high byte 40/3 Checksum low byte 11.8,9,10 Receive Relay Settings ( 3 11 X ) ( ) = Primary Settings ( ) = Alternate 1 Settings ( ) = Alternate 2 Settings 173

180 Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Curve Selection Type I 0 = Extremely Inverse 1 = Very Inverse 2 = Inverse 3 = Short Time Inverse 4 = Definite Time 5 = Long Time Extremely Inverse 6 = Long Time Very Inverse 7 = Long Time Inverse 8 = Recloser Curve 9 = Disabled 10 = User Curve 1 11 = User Curve 2 12 = User Curve 3 Curve Selection Type II 0 = Disabled 1 = Standard 2 = Inverse 3 = Definite Time 4 = Short Time Inverse 5 = Short Time Extremely Inverse 6 = User Curve 1 7 = User Curve 2 8 = User Curve 3 Curve Selection Type 87T 0 = Disabled 1 = Percent Slope 2 = HU 30% 3 = HU 35% 4 = Percent 15 Tap 5 = Percent 25 Tap 6 = Percent 40 Tap 7 = User Curve 1 8 = User Curve 2 9 = User Curve 3 Mode Selection Type 87T 0 = Disabled 1 = 2nd Harmonics 2 = 2nd & 5th Harmonics 3 = All Harmonics Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = (Prim=0xb8, Alt1=0xb9, Alt2=0xba) 3/1 87T Curve Select byte (Type 87T) 3/2 87T Min I Operate byte ( *10) 3/3 87T Percent Restraint byte (15-60) 4/1 87T Restraint Mode byte (Mode Selection Type 87T) 174

181 4/2 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint high byte ( *10) 4/3 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint low byte 5/1 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint high byte (15-40 *10) 5/2 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint low byte 5/3 87T All Harmonics Restraint high byte (15-40 *10) 6/1 87T All Harmonics Restraint low byte 6/2 87H Tap X byte (6-20 *10) 6/3 87T-1 Tap Amp byte (2-9 Amp *10, Amp *50) 7/1 51P-1 Curve Select byte (Type I) 7/2 51P-1 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12A *10, A *50) 7/3 51P-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20) 8/1 50P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 8/2 50P-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 8/3 50P-1 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100) 9/1 50P-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 9/2 150P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 9/3 150P-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 10/1 150P-1 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100) 10/2 150P-1 Time Delay low byte 10/ Curve Select byte (Type I) 11/ Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, A *50) 11/ Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10,*20) 11/3 51N-1 Curve Select byte (Type I) 12/1 51N-1 Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, A *50) 12/2 51N-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10,*20) 12/3 50N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 13/1 50N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 13/2 50N-1 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100) 13/3 50N-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 14/1 150N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II) 14/2 150N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 14/3 150N-1 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100) 15/1 150N-1 Time Delay low byte 15/2 87T-2 Tap Amp byte (2-9 Amp *10, Amp *50) 15/3 51P-2 Curve Select byte (Type I) 16/1 51P-2 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12 Amp *10, Amp *50) 16/2 51P-2 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20) 16/3 50P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 17/1 50P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 17/2 50P-2 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100) 17/3 50P-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 18/1 150P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 18/2 150P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 18/3 150P-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100) 19/1 150P-2 Time Delay low byte 19/ Curve Select byte (Type I) 19/ Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, A *50) 20/ Timedial/delay byte (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20) 20/2 51G-2 Curve Select byte (Type I) 20/3 51G-2 Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, A *50) 21/1 51G-2 Timedial/delay byte (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20) 21/2 50G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 21/3 50G-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 22/1 50G-2 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100) 22/2 50G-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay ) 22/3 150G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II) 23/1 150G-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10) 23/2 150G-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100) 23/3 150G-2 Time Delay low byte 175

182 24/1 Disturb-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-5, *10) 24/2 Level Detector-1 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable) 24/3 Level Detector-2 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable) 25/1 spare 25/2 spare 25/3 spare 26/1 Unit Configuration byte bit 0 : neutral tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 1 : phase tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 2 : neutral tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 3 : phase tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 4 : user definable curves bit 5 : Reserved for frequency bit 6 : neutral tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1= A) bit 7 : phase tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1= A) 26/2 Checksum high byte 26/3 Checksum low byte Receive Configuration Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Mode Selection Type Trip Failure 0 = Differential Trip 1 = OC Alarm 2 = Differential and OC Alarm Mode Selection Type Demand Time Constant 0 = 5 1 = 15 2 = 30 3 = 60 Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbb 3/1 Wdg1 P CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 3/2 Wdg1 P CT Ratio low byte 3/3 Wdg1 N CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 4/1 Wdg1 N CT Ratio low byte 4/2 Wdg2 P CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 4/3 Wdg2 P CT Ratio low byte 5/1 Wdg2 G CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 5/2 Wdg2 G CT Ratio low byte 5/3 Winding Phase Comp high byte (0-330, /30) 6/1 Winding Phase Comp low byte 6/2 Wind1 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB) 6/3 Wind1 CT Config low byte 7/1 Wind2 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB) 7/2 Wind2 CT Config low byte 7/3 Phase Rotation high byte (0=ABC, 1=ACB) 8/1 Phase Rotation low byte 8/2 Alt 1 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable) 8/3 Alt 1 Settings low byte 176

183 9/1 Alt 2 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable) 9/2 Alt 2 Settings low byte 9/3 Trip Failure Mode high byte (Type Trip Failure) 10/1 Trip Failure Mode low byte 10/2 Trip Failure Time high byte (5-60) 10/3 Trip Failure Time low byte 11/1 Trip Fail Dropout % PU high byte (5-90) 11/2 Trip Fail Dropout % PU low byte 11/3 Configuration Flag high byte bit 8 : Cross Block Mode (0=Disable, 1=Enable) bit 9 : SPARE bit 10 : SPARE bit 11 : SPARE bit 12 : SPARE bit 13 : SPARE bit 14 : SPARE bit 15 : SPARE 12/1 Configuration Flag low byte bit 0 : OC Protect Mode (0=Fund, 1=RMS) bit 1 : Reset Mode (0=Instant 1=Delayed) bit 2 : Spare bit 3 : Target Display Mode (0=Last, 1=All) bit 4 : Local Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable) bit 5 : Remote Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable) bit 6 : WHr/VARHr Meter Mode (0=KWHr, 1=MWHr) bit 7 : LCD Light (0=Timer, 1=On) 12/2 Unit Name character 1 12/3 Unit Name character 2 13/1 Unit Name character 3 13/2 Unit Name character 4 13/3 Unit Name character 5 14/1 Unit Name character 6 14/2 Unit Name character 7 14/3 Unit Name character 8 15/1 Unit Name character 9 15/2 Unit Name character 10 15/3 Unit Name character 11 16/1 Unit Name character 12 16/2 Unit Name character 13 16/3 Unit Name character 14 17/1 Unit Name character 15 17/2 Transformer Configuration Byte (0=Wye1-Wye2, 1=Wye1-Delta2, 2=Delta1-Wye2, 3=Delta1-Delta2) 17/3 Demand Time Const high byte (Type Demand Time) 18/1 Demand Time Const low byte 18/2 LCD Contrast Adjustment high byte (0-63) 18/3 LCD Contrast Adjustment low byte 19/1 Relay Password character 1 19/2 Relay Password character 2 19/3 Relay Password character 3 20/1 Relay Password character 4 20/2 Meter Winding Mode (0=Wdg1, 1=Wdg2, 2=Wdg3) 20/3 VT Configuration (0=69VWye, 1=120VWye, 2=120V Delta, 3=208V Delta) 21/1 VT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 21/2 VT Ratio low byte 21/3 spare 22/1 spare 22/2 Checksum high byte 22/3 Checksum low byte 177

184 11.12 Receive Counter Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbc 3/1 Through Faults Counter high byte (0-9999) 3/2 Through Faults Counter low byte 3/3 Thr Fault Sum kamp A Counter high byte (0-9999) 4/1 Thr Fault Sum kamp A Counter low byte 4/2 Through Fault Sum Cyc Counter high byte ( ) 4/3 Through Fault Sum Cyc Counter low byte 5/1 Overcurrent Trips Counter high byte (0-9999) 5/2 Overcurrent Trips Counter low byte 5/3 Differential Trips Counter high byte (0-9999) 6/1 Differential Trips Counter low byte 6/2 Thr Fault Sum kamp B Counter high byte (0-9999) 6/3 Thr Fault Sum kamp B Counter low byte 7/1 Thr Fault Sum kamp C Counter high byte (0-9999) 7/2 Thr Fault Sum kamp C Counter low byte 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum high byte 8/3 Checksum low byte Receive Alarm Settings ( ) Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7. High byte consists of bits 8 through 15. Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbd 3/1 Through Faults Alarm Threshold high byte (0-9999) 3/2 Through Faults Alarm Threshold low byte 3/2 Through Fault Sum kamp Alarm Thres high (0-9999) 4/1 Through Fault Sum kamp Alarm Threshold low byte 4/2 Through Fault Sum Cyc Alarm high ( , /10) 4/3 Through Fault Sum Cyc Alarm Threshold low byte 5/1 Overcurrent Trips Alarm high byte (0-9999) 5/2 Overcurrent Trips Alarm low byte 5/3 Differential Trips Alarm high byte (0-9999) 6/1 Differential Trips Alarm low byte 6/2 Phase Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999) 6/3 Phase Demand Alarm low byte 7/1 Neutral Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999) 7/2 Neutral Demand Alarm low byte 7/3 Load Alarm high byte (1-9999) 178

185 8/1 Load Alarm low byte 8/2 Phase Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999,10000=Disables) 8/3 Phase Demand Alarm low byte 9/1 Low PF Alarm high byte( *100, 101=Disables) 9/2 Low PF Alarm low byte 9/3 High PF Alarm high byte( *100, 101=Disables) 10/1 High Pf Alarm low byte 10/2 Positive kvar Alarm high byte ( / 10,10000=Disable) 10/3 Positive kvar Alarm low byte 11/1 Negative kvar Alarm high byte ( /10,10000=Disable) 11/2 Negative kvar Alarm high byte 11/3 Pos Watt Alarm 1 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable) 12/1 Pos Watt Alarm 1 low byte 12/2 Pos Watt Alarm 2 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable) 12/3 Pos Watt Alarm 2 low byte 13/1 Spare 13/2 Spare 13/3 Spare 14/1 Spare 14/2 Spare 14/3 Spare 15/1 Spare 15/2 Spare 15/3 Spare 16/1 Spare 16/2 Spare 16/3 Spare 17/1 Spare 17/2 Spare 17/3 Spare 18/1 Spare 18/2 Checksum high byte 18/3 Checksum low byte Receive Real Time Clock ( ) Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbe 3/1 Hours byte (0-23) 3/2 Minutes byte (0-59) 3/3 Seconds byte (0-59) 4/1 Day byte (0-31), (0=Shutdown Clock) 4/2 Month byte (1-12) 4/3 Year byte (0-99) 5/1 spare 5/2 Checksum high byte 5/3 Checksum low byte Receive Programmable Output Delays ( ) Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 179

186 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbf 3/1 OUT 5 delay high byte ( , *100) 3/2 OUT 5 delay low byte 3/3 OUT 7 delay high byte ( , *100) 4/1 OUT 7 delay low byte 4/2 OUT 4 delay high byte ( , *100) 4/3 OUT 4 delay low byte 5/1 OUT 6 delay high byte ( , *100) 5/2 OUT 6 delay low byte 5/3 OUT 3 delay high byte ( , *100) 6/1 OUT 3 delay low byte 6/2 OUT 2 delay high byte ( , *100) 6/3 OUT 2 delay low byte 7/1 OUT 1 delay high byte ( , *100) 7/2 OUT 1 delay low byte 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Spare 8/3 Spare 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum high byte 9/3 Checksum low byte 13 Programmable Curve Commands ( 3 13 n ) N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 13 n 1 Receive Overcurrent Curve Parameters 2 Receive First Overcurrent Curve Data Set 3 Receive Next Overcurrent Curve Data Set 4 Receive Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table 5 Send Overcurrent Curve Parameters 6 Send Overcurrent Curve Data Set 7 Send Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table 8 Receive Differential Curve Parameters 9 Receive First Differential Curve Data Set 10 Receive Next Differential Curve Data Set 11 Send Differential Curve Parameters 12 Send Differential Curve Data Set 13.1 Receive Overcurrent Curve Parameters ( ) For the unit to receive the overcurrent curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued: (Curve Parameters) (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (60 Pointer Offsets) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 180

187 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd1 3/1 Programmable curve number User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 3/2 Coefficient A (high high byte) 3/3 Coefficient A 4/1 Coefficient A 4/2 Coefficient A (low low byte) 4/3 Coefficient B (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient B 5/2 Coefficient B 5/3 Coefficient B (low byte) 6/1 Coefficient C (high byte) 6/2 Coefficient C 6/3 Coefficient C 7/1 Coefficient C (low byte) 7/2 Coefficient P (high byte) 7/3 Coefficient P 8/1 Coefficient P 8/2 Coefficient P (low byte) 8/3 Spare 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum (high byte) 9/3 Checksum (low byte) 13.2 Receive First Overcurrent Curve Data Set ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd2 3/1 Programmable curve number User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 3/2 Segment 0: Endrange (high byte) 3/3 Segment 0: Endrange (low byte) 4/1 Segment 0: Alpha (high byte) 4/2 Segment 0: Alpha 4/3 Segment 0: Alpha 5/1 Segment 0: Alpha (low byte) 5/2 Segment 0: Beta (high byte) 5/3 Segment 0: Beta 6/1 Segment 0: Beta 6/2 Segment 0: Beta (low byte) 6/3-9/3 Segment 1 (same as segment 0) 10/1-14/1 Segment 2 (same as segment 0) 14/2-18/2 Segment 3 (same as segment 0) 18/3-22/3 Segment 4 (same as segment 0) 23/1-27/1 Segment 5 (same as segment 0) 27/2-31/2 Segment 6 (same as segment 0) 31/3-35/3 Segment 7 (same as segment 0) 36/1 Spare 36/2 Checksum (high byte) 36/3 Checksum (low byte) 181

188 13.3 Receive Next Overcurrent Curve Data Set ( ) Same format as ( ) Receive Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd4 3/1 Programmable curve number User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 3/2 Pointer offset 0 3/3 Pointer offset 1 4/1 Pointer offset 2 4/2 Pointer offset 3 4/3 Pointer offset 4 5/1 Pointer offset 5 5/2 Pointer offset 6 5/3 Pointer offset 7 6/1 Pointer offset 8 6/2 Pointer offset 9 6/3 Pointer offset 10 7/1 Pointer offset 11 7/2 Pointer offset 12 7/3 Pointer offset 13 8/1 Pointer offset 14 8/2 Pointer offset 15 8/3 Pointer offset 16 9/1 Pointer offset 17 9/2 Pointer offset 18 9/3 Pointer offset 19 10/1 Pointer offset 20 10/2 Pointer offset 21 10/3 Pointer offset 22 11/1 Pointer offset 23 11/2 Pointer offset 24 11/3 Pointer offset 25 12/1 Pointer offset 26 12/2 Pointer offset 27 12/3 Pointer offset 28 13/1 Pointer offset 29 13/2 Pointer offset 30 13/3 Pointer offset 31 14/1 Pointer offset 32 14/2 Pointer offset 33 14/3 Pointer offset 34 15/1 Pointer offset 35 15/2 Pointer offset 36 15/3 Pointer offset 37 16/1 Pointer offset 38 16/2 Pointer offset 39 16/3 Pointer offset 40 17/1 Pointer offset 41 17/2 Pointer offset

189 17/3 Pointer offset 43 18/1 Pointer offset 44 18/2 Pointer offset 45 18/3 Pointer offset 46 19/1 Pointer offset 47 19/2 Pointer offset 48 19/3 Pointer offset 49 20/1 Pointer offset 50 20/2 Pointer offset 51 20/3 Pointer offset 52 21/1 Pointer offset 53 21/2 Pointer offset 54 21/3 Pointer offset 55 22/1 Pointer offset 56 22/2 Pointer offset 57 22/3 Pointer offset 58 23/1 Pointer offset 59 23/2 Spare 23/3 Spare 24/1 Spare 24/2 Spare 24/3 Spare 25/1 Spare 25/2 Spare 25/3 Spare 26/1 Spare 26/2 Checksum (high byte) 26/3 Checksum (low byte) 13.5 Send Overcurrent Curve Parameters ( ) For the unit to receive the overcurrent curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued (Curve Parameters) (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block (60 Pointer Offsets) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable Curve Number User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 1/2 Programmable Curve Number 1/3 Programmable Curve Number Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xd5 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 8 2/1 Coefficient A (high byte) 2/2 Coefficient A 2/3 Coefficient A 3/1 Coefficient A (low byte) 3/2 Coefficient B (high byte) 3/3 Coefficient B 183

190 4/1 Coefficient B 4/2 Coefficient B (low byte) 4/3 Coefficient C (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient C 5/2 Coefficient C 5/3 Coefficient C (low byte) 6/1 Coefficient P (high byte) 6/2 Coefficient P 6/3 Coefficient P 7/1 Coefficient P (low byte) 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum (high byte) 8/3 Checksum low byte) 13.6 Send Overcurrent Curve Data Set ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 1/2 Block number 1/3 Programmable curve number + Block number Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xd6 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 29 2/1 Programmable curve number User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 2/2 Block number 2/3 Segment 0: Endrange (high byte) 3/1 Segment 0: Endrange (low byte) 3/2 Segment 0: Alpha (high byte) 3/3 Segment 0: Alpha 4/1 Segment 0: Alpha 4/2 Segment 0: Alpha (low byte) 4/3 Segment 0: Beta (high byte) 5/1 Segment 0: Beta 5/2 Segment 0: Beta 5/3 Segment 0: Beta (low byte) 6/1-9/1 Segment 1 (same as segment 0) 9/2-12/2 Segment 2 (same as segment 0) 12/3-15/3 Segment 3 (same as segment 0) 16/1-19/1 Segment 4 (same as segment 0) 19/2-22/2 Segment 5 (same as segment 0) 22/3-25/3 Segment 6 (same as segment 0) 26/1-29/1 Segment 7 (same as segment 0) 29/2 Checksum (high byte) 29/3 Checksum (low byte) 13.7 Send Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable curve number User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 1/2 Programmable curve number 1/3 Programmable curve number 184

191 Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xd7 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 25 2/1 Programmable curve number User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 2/2 Pointer offset 0 2/3 Pointer offset 1 3/1 Pointer offset 2 3/2 Pointer offset 3 3/3 Pointer offset 4 4/1 Pointer offset 5 4/2 Pointer offset 6 4/3 Pointer offset 7 5/1 Pointer offset 8 5/2 Pointer offset 9 5/3 Pointer offset 10 6/1 Pointer offset 11 6/2 Pointer offset 12 6/3 Pointer offset 13 7/1 Pointer offset 14 7/2 Pointer offset 15 7/3 Pointer offset 16 8/1 Pointer offset 17 8/2 Pointer offset 18 8/3 Pointer offset 19 9/1 Pointer offset 20 9/2 Pointer offset 21 9/3 Pointer offset 22 10/1 Pointer offset 23 10/2 Pointer offset 24 10/3 Pointer offset 25 11/1 Pointer offset 26 11/2 Pointer offset 27 11/3 Pointer offset 28 12/1 Pointer offset 29 12/2 Pointer offset 30 12/3 Pointer offset 31 13/1 Pointer offset 32 13/2 Pointer offset 33 13/3 Pointer offset 34 14/1 Pointer offset 35 14/2 Pointer offset 36 14/3 Pointer offset 37 15/1 Pointer offset 38 15/2 Pointer offset 39 15/3 Pointer offset 40 16/1 Pointer offset 41 16/2 Pointer offset 42 16/3 Pointer offset 43 17/1 Pointer offset 44 17/2 Pointer offset 45 17/3 Pointer offset 46 18/1 Pointer offset 47 18/2 Pointer offset 48 18/3 Pointer offset 49 19/1 Pointer offset 50 19/2 Pointer offset

192 19/3 Pointer offset 52 20/1 Pointer offset 53 20/2 Pointer offset 54 20/3 Pointer offset 55 21/1 Pointer offset 56 21/2 Pointer offset 57 21/3 Pointer offset 58 22/1 Pointer offset 59 22/2 Spare 22/3 Spare 23/1 Spare 23/2 Spare 23/3 Spare 24/1 Spare 24/2 Spare 24/3 Spare 25/1 Spare 25/2 Checksum (high byte) 25/2 Checksum (low byte) 13.8 Receive Differential Curve Parameters ( ) For the unit to receive the differential curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued: (Differential Curve Parameters) (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 2 Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd8 3/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3) 3/2 Coefficient A (high high byte) 3/3 Coefficient A 4/1 Coefficient A 4/2 Coefficient A (low low byte) 4/3 Coefficient B (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient B 5/2 Coefficient B 5/3 Coefficient B (low byte) 6/1 Coefficient C (high byte) 6/2 Coefficient C 6/3 Coefficient C 7/1 Coefficient C (low byte) 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Spare 8/3 Spare 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum (high byte) 9/3 Checksum (low byte) 186

193 13.9 Receive First Differential Curve Data Set ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd9 3/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3) 3/2 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (high byte) 3/3 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (low byte) 4/1 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0) 4/2 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0) 4/3 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0) 5/1 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0) 5/2 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0) 5/3 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0) 6/1 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0) 6/2 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0) 6/3 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0) 7/1 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0) 7/2 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0) 7/3 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0) 8/1 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0) 8/2 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0) 8/3 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0) 9/1 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0) 9/2 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0) 9/3 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0) 10/1 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0) 10/2 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0) 10/3 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0) 11/1 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0) 11/2 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0) 11/3 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0) 12/1 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0) 12/2 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0) 12/3 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0) 13/1 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0) 13/2 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0) 13/3 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0) 14/1 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0) 14/2 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0) 14/3 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0) 15/1 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0) 15/2 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0) 15/3 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0) 16/1 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0) 16/2 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0) 16/3 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0) 17/1 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0) 17/2 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0) 17/3 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0) 18/1 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0) 18/2 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0) 18/3 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0) 19/1 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0) 187

194 19/2 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0) 19/3 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0) 20/1 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0) 20/2 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0) 20/3 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0) 21/1 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0) 21/2 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0) 21/3 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0) 22/1 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0) 22/2 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0) 22/3 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0) 23/1 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0) 23/2 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0) 23/3 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0) 24/1 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0) 24/2 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0) 24/3 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0) 25/1 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0) 25/2 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0) 25/3 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0) 26/1 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0) 26/2 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0) 26/3 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0) 27/1 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0) 27/2 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0) 27/3 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0) 28/1 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0) 28/2 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0) 28/3 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0) 29/1 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0) 29/2 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0) 29/3 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0) 30/1 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0) 30/2 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0) 30/3 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0) 31/1 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0) 31/2 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0) 31/3 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0) 32/1 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0) 32/2 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0) 32/3 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0) 33/1 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0) 33/2 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0) 33/3 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0) 34/1 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0) 34/2 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0) 34/3 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0) 35/1 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0) 35/2 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0) 35/3 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0) 36/1 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0) 36/2 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0) 36/3 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0) 37/1 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0) 37/2 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0) 37/3 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0) 38/1 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0) 38/2 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0) 38/3 Spare 188

195 39/1 Spare 39/2 Checksum (high byte) 39/3 Checksum (low byte) Receive Next Differential Curve Data Set ( ) Same format as ( ) Send Differential Curve Parameters ( ) For the unit to receive the Differential curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued (Differential Curve Parameters) (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 2 Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable Curve Number (1, 2, or 3) 1/2 Programmable Curve Number (1, 2, or 3) 1/3 Programmable Curve Number (1, 2, or 3) Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xdb 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 8 2/1 Coefficient A (high byte) 2/2 Coefficient A 2/3 Coefficient A 3/1 Coefficient A (low byte) 3/2 Coefficient B (high byte) 3/3 Coefficient B 4/1 Coefficient B 4/2 Coefficient B (low byte) 4/3 Coefficient C (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient C 5/2 Coefficient C 5/3 Coefficient C (low byte) 6/1 Spare 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare 7/1 Spare 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum (high byte) 8/3 Checksum low byte) Send Differential Curve Data Set ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3) 1/2 Block number 1/3 Programmable curve number + Block number Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xdc 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 38 2/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3) 189

196 2/2 Block number 2/3 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (high byte) 3/1 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (low byte) 3/2 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0) 3/3 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0) 4/1 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0) 4/2 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0) 4/3 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0) 5/1 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0) 5/2 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0) 5/3 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0) 6/1 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0) 6/2 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0) 6/3 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0) 7/1 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0) 7/2 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0) 7/3 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0) 8/1 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0) 8/2 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0) 8/3 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0) 9/1 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0) 9/2 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0) 9/3 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0) 10/1 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0) 10/2 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0) 10/3 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0) 11/1 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0) 11/2 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0) 11/3 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0) 12/1 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0) 12/2 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0) 12/3 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0) 13/1 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0) 13/2 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0) 13/3 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0) 14/1 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0) 14/2 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0) 14/3 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0) 15/1 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0) 15/2 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0) 15/3 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0) 16/1 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0) 16/2 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0) 16/3 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0) 17/1 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0) 17/2 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0) 17/3 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0) 18/1 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0) 18/2 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0) 18/3 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0) 19/1 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0) 19/2 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0) 19/3 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0) 20/1 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0) 20/2 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0) 20/3 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0) 21/1 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0) 21/2 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0) 21/3 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0) 190

197 22/1 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0) 22/2 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0) 22/3 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0) 23/1 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0) 23/2 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0) 23/3 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0) 24/1 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0) 24/2 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0) 24/3 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0) 25/1 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0) 25/2 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0) 25/3 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0) 26/1 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0) 26/2 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0) 26/3 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0) 27/1 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0) 27/2 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0) 27/3 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0) 28/1 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0) 28/2 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0) 28/3 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0) 29/1 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0) 29/2 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0) 29/3 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0) 30/1 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0) 30/2 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0) 30/3 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0) 31/1 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0) 31/2 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0) 31/3 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0) 32/1 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0) 32/2 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0) 32/3 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0) 33/1 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0) 33/2 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0) 33/3 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0) 34/1 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0) 34/2 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0) 34/3 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0) 35/1 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0) 35/2 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0) 35/3 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0) 36/1 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0) 36/2 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0) 36/3 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0) 37/1 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0) 37/2 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0) 37/3 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0) 38/1 Spare 38/2 Checksum (high byte) 38/3 Checksum (low byte) 14 Waveform Capture Commands ( 3 14 n ) N Definition 0 Define waveform capture settings 1 Show waveform capture settings 2 Start waveform data accumulation 3 Stop waveform data accumulation 191

198 4 Report waveform record data headers 5 Fetch first block of a record (Part A) 6 Fetch next block of a record (Part A) 7 Retransmit last block of a record (Part A) 8 Fetch first block of a record (Part B) 9 Fetch next block of a record (Part B) 10 Retransmit last block of a record (Part B) 11 Fetch Acquisition Status 14.0 Define Waveform Capture Settings ( ) Note the trigger sources are OR ed together. Example: if 3/1 is Hex 07 ;trigger on 87T or 87H or 51P-1 pickup. The capture is 8 cycles of waveform with 32 samples per cycle. We then have 8 inputs each of 8 cycles capture The inputs are Ia-1,Ib-1,Ic-1,In-1, Ia-2 Ib-2 Ic-2 and Ig-2. The data is sent from the TPU in quarter cycle records, that is 32/4 samples per analog variable. Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xe0 3/1 Trigger source (byte 1) Bit 0: 87T Bit 1: 87H Bit 2: 51P-1 Bit 3: 51N-1 Bit 4: 50P-1 Bit 5: 50N-1 Bit 6: 150P-1 Bit 7: 150N-1 3/2 Trigger source (byte 2) Bit 0: 46-1 Bit 1: 51P-2 Bit 2: 51G-2 Bit 3: 50P-2 Bit 4: 50G-2 Bit 5: 150P-2 Bit 6: 150G-2 Bit 7: /3 Trigger source : (byte 3) Bit 0: Through Fault Bit 1: Harmonic Restraint Bit 2: External (WCI) 4/1 Trigger source:reserved (byte 4) 4/2 Trigger position quarter cycle: 0 to 255 (for 64 qtr cycle record) 0 to 128 (for 32 qtr cycle record) 0 to 64 (for 16 qtr cycle record) 0 to 32 (for 8 qtr cycle record) 4/3 Mode/Record Size bit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record 01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record 10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record 11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record bit 6: Single Shot Mode (0=Off, 1=On) 192

199 bit 7: Append Record Mode (0=Off, 1=On) 5/1 Spare 5/2 Checksum high byte 5/3 Checksum low byte 14.1 Report Waveform Capture Settings ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe1 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 9 2/1-6/3 Unit ID Name (15 characters) 7/1 Trigger source (byte 1) Bit 0: 87T Bit 1: 87H Bit 2: 51P-1 Bit 3: 51N-1 Bit 4: 50P-1 Bit 5: 50N-1 Bit 6: 150P-1 Bit 7: 150N-1 7/2 Trigger source (byte 2) Bit 0: 46-1 Bit 1: 51P-2 Bit 2: 51G-2 Bit 3: 50P-2 Bit 4: 50G-2 Bit 5: 150P-2 Bit 6: 150G-2 Bit 7: /3 Trigger source (byte 3) Bit 0: Through Fault Bit 1: Harmonic Restraint Bit 2: External (WCI) 8/1 Trigger source (byte 4) 8/2 Trigger position quarter cycle: 0 to 255 (for 64 qtr cycle record) 0 to 128 (for 32 qtr cycle record) 0 to 64 (for 16 qtr cycle record) 0 to 32 (for 8 qtr cycle record) 8/3 Mode/Record Size bit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record 01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record 10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record 11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record bit 6: Single Shot Mode (0=Off, 1=On) bit 7: Append Record Mode (0=Off, 1=On) 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum (high byte) 9/3 Checksum (low byte) 14.2 Arm Waveform Data Accumulation ( ) 14.3 Disarm Waveform Data Accumulation ( ) 193

200 14.4 Report Waveform Record Data Headers ( ) Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe4 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 38 2/1-6/3 Unit ID Name (15 characters) 7/1 Record 0: Trigger position 7/2 Record 0: Year 7/3 Record 0: Month 8/1 Record 0: Date 8/2 Record 0: Hour 8/3 Record 0: Minute 9/1 Record 0: Second 9/2 Record 0: Hundredth of second 9/3 Record 0: Spare 10/1 Record 0: Spare 10/2 Record 0: Mode/Record Size bit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record 01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record 10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record 11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record bit 6: Single Shot Mode (0=Off, 1=On) bit 7: Append Record Mode (0=Off, 1=On) 10/3 Record 0: Spare 11/1-14/3 Record 1 (same as record 0) 15/1-18/3 Record 2 ( " ) 194

201 19/1-22/3 Record 3 ( " ) 23/1-26/3 Record 4 ( " ) 27/1-30/3 Record 5 ( " ) 31/1-34/3 Record 6 ( " ) 35/1-38/3 Record 7 ( " ) 14.5 Fetch First Block of a Record-Part A ( ) Data Byte Definition 1/1 Record number (0 to 7) 1/2 Record number (0 to 7)-Duplicate 1/3 Record number (0 to 7)-Triplicate Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe5 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 45 2/1 Record number 2/2 Block number 2/3 Sample 0: Ia-1 (high byte) 3/1 Sample 0: Ia-1 (low byte) 3/2 Sample 0: Ib-1 (high byte) 3/3 Sample 0: Ib-1 (low byte) 4/1 Sample 0: Ic-1 (high byte) 4/2 Sample 0: Ic-1 (low byte) 4/3 Sample 0: In-1 (high byte) 5/1 Sample 0: In-1 (low byte) 5/2 Sample 0: Ia-2 (high byte) 5/3 Sample 0: Ia-2 (low byte) 6/1 Sample 0: Ib-2 (high byte) 6/2 Sample 0: Ib-2 (low byte) 6/3 Sample 0: Ic-2 (high byte) 7/1 Sample 0: Ic-2 (low byte) 7/2 Sample 0: Ig-2 (high byte) 7/3 Sample 0: Ig-2 (low byte) 8/1-13/1 Sample 1 data 13/2-18/2 Sample 2 data 18/3-23/3 Sample 3 data 24/1-29/1 Sample 4 data 29/2-34/2 Sample 5 data 34/3-39/3 Sample 6 data 40/1-45/1 Sample 7 data 45/2 Spare 45/3 Spare 14.6 Fetch Next Block of a Record-Part A ( ) Same message format as ( ) 14.7 Retransmit Last Block of a Record-Part A ( ) Same message format as ( ) 14.8 Fetch First Block of a Record-Part B ( ) Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe8 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 9 195

202 2/1 Record number 2/2 Block number 2/3 Phase scale Wdg 1 (high byte) 3/1 Phase scale Wdg 1 (low byte) 3/2 Neutral scale Wdg 1 (high byte) 3/3 Neutral scale Wdg 1 (low byte) 4/1 Phase scale Wdg 2 (high byte) 4/2 Phase scale Wdg 2 (low byte) 4/3 Ground scale Wdg 2 (high byte) 5/1 Ground scale Wdg 2 (low byte) 5/2 Input status (high byte) 5/3 Input status (low byte) 6/1 Output status (high byte) 6/2 Output status (low byte) Bit 0: Differential Trip Bit 1: Trip failure Bit 2: Through Fault Bit 3: 2nd Harmonic Restraint Bit 4: 5th Harmonic Restraint Bit 5: All Harmonic Restraint 6/3 Pickup status (High high byte) 7/1 Pickup status (High low byte) 7/2 Pickup status (Low high byte) Bit 0: 46-1 Bit 1: 51P-2 Bit 2: 51G-2 Bit 3: 50P-2 Bit 4: 50G-2 Bit 5: 150P-2 Bit 6: 150G-2 Bit 7: /3 Pickup status (Low low byte) Bit 0: 87T Bit 1: 87H Bit 2: 51P-1 Bit 3: 51N-1 Bit 4: 50P-1 Bit 5: 50N-1 Bit 6: 150P-1 Bit 7: 150N-1 8/1 Fault status (High high byte) 8/2 Fault status (High low byte) 8/3 Fault status (Low high byte) Bit 0: 46-1 Bit 1: 51P-2 Bit 2: 51G-2 Bit 3: 50P-2 Bit 4: 50G-2 Bit 5: 150P-2 Bit 6: 150G-2 Bit 7: /1 Fault status (Low low byte) Bit 0: 87T Bit 1: 87H Bit 2: 51P-1 Bit 3: 51N-1 Bit 4: 50P-1 Bit 5: 50N-1 Bit 6: 150P-1 196

203 Bit 7: 150N-1 9/2 Spare 9/3 Spare 14.9 Fetch Next Block of a Record-Part B ( ) Same message format as ( ) Retransmit Last Block of a Record-Part B ( ) Same message format as ( ) Fetch Acquisition Status ( ) Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xeb 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 2 2/1 Mode/Record Size bit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record 01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record 10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record 11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record bit 6: Single Shot Mode (0=Off, 1=On) bit 7: Append Record Mode (0=Off, 1=On) 2/2 Records Remaining (Single Shot Mode Only) 2/3 State of Accumulation (0=Running, 1=Stopped) 197

204 Appendix C - Revision History The following lists the DNP 3.0 history for the software history of each revision change. Software History: V2.3 - Base Version V2.4 - Provides capability for communications via the Aux Comm RS232 port using switched carrier (RTS/CTS), as needed for PECO system. - Corrected definition of User Logical Output (ULOx) points as Binary Outputs. These points now contain the status of the ULOx points not the last change-of-state message sent to the DPU. V2.6 - Corrected handling of spare points when performing DNP group scans. - Added address checking for 10-Byte protocol. Previously, units with DNP responded to any 10-Byte commands regardless of address. - Corrected problems with decoding global address (x FFFF ) when communicating with DNP master station. V2.8 - The thirty-two 16-bit User Definable (Modbus) Registers have been added as static analog points (97 to 128 on the DPU and 319 to 350 on the TPU). This provides user scaleable analog points to circumvent the 32-bit processing limitations of the Harris D20 RTU. These additional points are processed as signed analogs. - Numerous performance enhancements have reduced the worst case turnaround for DNP requests to approximately 350 msec on the DPU. Typical response for most requests is less than 200 msec. - The control logic was revised to detect busy conditions and support multiple concurrent operations. This fixes the problems with ULO3. - Collection of fault records by DNP is delayed until the fault distance calculation is completed. - The processing of spare points has been corrected. - The Application Layer Headers are now properly built when all the qualifier code requests all objects. V2.9 - Support added for new Auxiliary Communications Card (Type 8) with two RS485 ports. - Additional control point added for Reset all Seal Ins. - Additional class 3 digital event points added (see list at end of Binary Input Points). - Additional analog point for 3 phase volt-amps V3.0 - Corrected processing of control requests as per DNP Basic 4 Document Set. - Automatically reset seal-in points after they have been reported by DNP, depending on the status of Mode Parameter 5. - Added DNP support for Forced I/O points (Logical Inputs and Physical Inputs/Outputs) - Added event masking for Binary Input events. - Prevented accumulation of Class 2 or 3 changes for points not enabled via Scan Groups or the Binary Input Event Masking. - Performance enhancements added to reduce the turn-around time when requesting class 1, 2 or 3 data. V3.4 - Provided Binary Event (change) reporting for most Binary Input points as indicated in documentation. Binary changes for sealed-in points are now limited to current state reporting (i.e., a seal-in must be reset before another set event will be reported). - Added capability to configure the period for requesting a time synchronization from the master via Parameter 9. - Added performance improvements secondary rear port (non-dnp port) to enhance communications with ECP program. - Add support for running with the CPU clock stopped (required for final manufacturing tests). - Revise start-up processing to support revisions to Motorola processor used in Aux. Comm. boards. Removed support for Null (canceled) control requests. These are now treated as NOPs. Repeat counts (>1) are now only permitted for ULO points. Multiple controls to other points were meaningless and did not work properly. Fixed support for Data Link Acknowledge to allow data link layer confirms to work properly. Fixed problem with control point becoming permently active. Fixed internal RTS problem the caused failed control requests and errors when saving changed settings. Fixed problems with handling requests for multiple ranges of objects. Add support for running with the CPU clock stopped (required for final manufacturing tests). 198

205 Document History: V2.0 - Base Version V2.1-52A Closed event point changed from #80 to #11. V2.3 - Document changed to incorporate new features. Main change is definition of scan type for each DNP point. V2.8 - Document changed to include additional static analog points (97 to 128) and clarify and expand on descriptions of Parameter Settings. V2.9 - Updated to add new points as described above. V3.0 - Moved Revision History from Appendix B to Appendix C. - Inserted new Appendix B - Event Masking - Extended point list to allow for Forced I/O points, Binary Outputs Added points 128 and 129 to tables. - Changed status of bits used for Event Masking in Appendix B. - Added description for Mode Parameter 5. - Indicated points unique to DPU2000 or DPU2000R. - Added description of processing for sealed-in points. V3.4 - Added description for Parameter 9. - Revised description of Mode Parameter 1 based on changes to V3.4 DNP Software. - Revised description of Mode Parameter 5 based on changes to V3.4 DNP Software. - Expanded description of Forced I/O points (default assignments) and corrected these assignments for points 38 thru 71. Expanded description of control processing to include types of control request allowed. Added Binary Inputs for TPU2000R 3 winding Added Analog Inputs for TPU2000R 3 winding Updated point tables to properly indicate points that are unique to the TPU2000 and TPU2000R (2 and 3 winding versions). - Changed point tables to use DNP Type, ES-01-R, to indicate points that support both Binary Static and Binary Event reporting. - Revised Appendix B to update description of Event Masking. Changed formatting of document for laser printer. Added Binary Inputs for TPU2000R 3 winding - Added Analog Inputs for TPU2000R 3 winding. 199

206 Appendix D Modem Connectivity ABSTRACT: Advances in telephony switching systems and semiconductor technologies have made digital communication via analog public telephone systems an affordable reality. Advances from the initial Bell 202 modems operating at speeds of 300 baud to modern day V.90 modems which can theoretically operate at 56K have made fast data transfer within a substation a reality. This paper explains the theory of modern day modems and their use with ABB protective relays and configuration software. Although many manufacturer s of modem equipment are available, this application note covers the theory and application of 10 bit dial-up telephone modems. ABB does not specify specific modem vendors equipment, this application note is to be a guide to configuration of general vendor s telephony equipment with various ABB products. This application note is intended to present four examples of modem connectivity between ABB products and a personal computer. Modem Theory Early Modems In the beginning, telephony operated using analog signals. The legacy public telephone network required that the standard Bell Telephone. Signals placed upon the telephone network consisted of voice communication. The channels were limited (which led to the creation of the party- line) and communication consisted of much dead time in which no activity was occurring on the expensive phone connection. When digital computers were evolving, there came a need to interconnect the various sites for a limited period of time. Expensive digital data exchange networks were available for device interconnection. Installation of these systems for limited use was impractical due to installation costs but also for their operational costs. Some systems (such as ARPA net [precursor to the internet]) were available but only to the military and select universities. Another method had to be developed to allow general industries to communicate via a public medium. It was widely known that Analog signals have three distinct characteristics. a. Frequency (which may be varied and measured in communication systems). b. Amplitude (which may be increased decreased). c. Phase (which may be shifted with respect to a particular reference at any time). Engineers at Western Electric (the R&D arm of Bell Telephone) took advantage of these characteristics of an analog signal and created a device called a modem. MO MODULATOR : DEM DEMODULATOR. The public telephone network communication channel was able to carry signals from 300 Hz to 4,000 Hz. The modem translated the signal from a digital waveform to an analog waveform (modulator) and transferred it to a telephone line analog grade signal. Figure 1 illustrates this transformation. The receiving modem translated the analog signal to a digital signal (demodulator)thus the initial methods of communicating were developed to use the operating analog bandwidth of the telephone systems. The physical interface employed for the digital interface was a recently specified RS 232 interface. For a more in depth explanation of RS 232, please reference other application notes available from ABB s FAXBACK service or WEB Site Figure 1 - Frequency Shift Keying Modulation 200

207 The first Bell 202 modems used data transmission rates from 300 Baud to 1200 baud using Frequency Shift Keying. FSK modems used one of two methods of implementation. Half Duplex FSK and Full Duplex FSK. Half duplex FSK: One frequency band pair is used to transmit/receive data. The one modem transmitting data uses one frequency to denote a binary 1 and another to denote a binary 0. The other modem decodes the 1 s and 0 s for corresponding to the specific frequency. The signal is then translated from the analog encoding to the digital encoding. Turn around time is an issue when the modems switch from transmitting data to receiving data. Less of the telephone bandwidth range is used for communications, but communications are slower in that each modem must signify whether it is to transmit or receive data. One cannot transmit or receive data at the same time. Full duplex FSK: Two frequency bands are employed. One set of frequencies represent the transmit channel (frequencies allocated to the transmitted 1 s or 0 s). The other set of frequencies are allocated to the receive channel (frequencies allocated to the receivers 1 s or 0 s). This type of encoding has advantages in that no delay results for channel turnaround delay results and that full duplex communications is possible. The first Bell 202 modems were developed using FSK. With these limitations, FSK technologies are not used in modern modems. Next Developments However innovative these FSK methods were, there was still a limitation on the bandwidth of the telephone network. FSK used an entire phase in the frequency. The next innovation was to use analog to digital converters to send/receive more information at faster data rates than the maximum frequency of 4,000 Hz that a telephone system may allow. New A/D or D/A converters were able to convert signals dependent upon the phase shift of the signal. Using fast analog to digital (A/D) and digital to analog (D/A) converters made data transfer rates in excess of 4000 baud possible. Intermediate developments using the combination of phase and multiple bits could be encoded into a symbol. Four symbols could be represented by two bits. The transmission of the bits could be referenced with relation to the frequency and phase shift. For a brief time, a method using the analog signal phase shift, frequency allowed data to be transmitted/received in excess of 4000 Hz. The method was referred to as Quad Phase Shift Keying or Differential Phase Shift Keying. However, this method was short lived due to the fact that more efficient methods of data encoding were developed. The next development which elevated modem data transfer rates to those from 9600 to 33,600 baud. The method is referred to as Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM). Modern modems (such as those sold in electronics stores) use this technique in that the amplitude, phase, and frequency encode the digital bits into a symbol. A simplified explanation is provided. Figure 2 illustrates the possible combinations of data, which may be represented by two bits. Four possible symbols may be transmitted/received using this method (as was the case with QPSK methods). If, for example a sine wave is split into four quadrants each part of the phase could represent each of the two bit combinations in an analog fashion. Thus the phase from 0 90 degrees could represent the value 00, degrees could represent the value 01, degrees could represent the value 10, and logically could represent the value 11. A rapid A/D and D/A converter could determine the phase of the conversion area and determine the value depending upon the amplitude of the signal being converted. Thus, four symbols could be transferred in a single phase. 201

208 TWO BIT REPRESENTATION Bit Combinations DEGREES WAVEFORM BIT MAP ASSIGNMENT VERSUS FREQUENCY Figure 2 - QAM Analysis 4 Bit Analysis Expanding this concept, Figure 3 illustrates what could occur if a 16 symbols could be transferred using an extended sine wave interpretation. The proper designation for this encoding is 16-QAM. Thus 16 is the number of symbols which may be expressed in one waveform. Each ¼ cycle could represent a quadrature Each ¼ cycle could then be designated to two bit values depending upon the phase angle location upon the cycle. QAM modem manufacturers have a quadrature plot illustrating the phase/bit encoding which occurs in their design. This technology allows modems to transfer data at rates of 33,600 bits per second over telephone lines designed to carry voice at 4000 hz. This is pretty impressive in that the average cost of a 10 bit synchronous modem capable of operating at 56K bits per second (theoretically) is $100. FOUR BIT REPRESENTATION Bit Combinations QUAD QUAD DEGREES WAVEFORM 10 QUAD 11 QUAD BIT MAP ASSIGNMENT VERSUS FREQUENCY Figure 3 - QAM 16 Bit Encoding Another new technology used in modems is one called, Trellis Encoding Technology. One of the modems presented in this paper uses this technology which evaluates speed optimization and fast forward error detection/correction technology. Within the present V. standards, error detection/correction and line speed balancing improves with each technology. One modem shall be used in this paper which uses Trellis Encoding Technology. The Tricky Thing About Baud Rates Baud rate is defined as the amount of changes a signal can undergo in 1 second. With FSK modems in the initial days of the Bell 202 modem, 1 baud = 1 bit. Today, with the complexity of modem technology, one bit does not equal one baud. As illustrated in the descriptions of DPSK and QAM, one transition of signal may not equal one baud in that two bits may represent 4 combinations, 3 bits may represent 8 combinations, 4 bits may represent 16 combinations, 8 bits may represent 256 combinations, and 12 bits may represent 4,096 combinations. Thus operation over a standard frequency 300, 600, or 2400 hertz (audio) may yield (when signals are decoded into digital signals) baud rates of up to 33, 600 bits per second. 202

209 Standards Early modems were defined as per their operating baud rate. An international committee the ITU-T (International Telecommunications Union) developed standards defining the operation of modems. Today, the V. (VEE DOT) standard is recognized as the modem definition standard to which modems are designed. Some standards are listed below: V.29 BIS - 2,400 Baud : 9,600 Bits per second: 2 Wire Full Duplex, 4-DSPK, 16 QAM V.32 BIS - 2,400 Baud: 14,400 Bits per second: 2 Wire Full Duplex 64- QAM, V ,400 Baud: 33,600 Bits per second: 2 Wire Full Duplex 4,096 QAM. With the increasing complexity of modem technology, another innovation came about increasing the acceptance of telephone modem technology in circuits, Hayes AT command set. Hayes was one of the pre-eminent manufacturers of modem technology in the early 70 s. They developed a command set which allowed a modem to be placed in several operational modes. Modems could be configured on the fly to auto-answer, change transmission/reception speeds, enable data encoding modes, dial out phone numbers.. as well as other capabilities. With the introduction of the Hayes AT command set, integration of modems into more common acceptance within a variety of applications. Configuration could occur using a commonly supplied WINDOWS Terminal Emulator program. When the terminal connected with the modem the AT command could be sent to the modem with the appropriate command. Unfortunately over time there has been a deviation in the HAYES command set in that there is no such thing as a STANDARD HAYES AT COMMAND set. 10 Bit Versus 11 Bit Modems Commercially available dial-up modems, such as those generally sold through chain electronic stores may be used with many of the protocols offered in the ABB Protective relays. Modems such as those allowing telephone connectivity using 10 bit protocols are generally those available inexpensively. A 10 bit telephone modem is in the cost area of $100 (120 VAC operation) whereas 11 bit modems are in the area of cost of $1500 (120 VAC operation) [COSTS QUOTED ARE FOR YEAR 2000]. Modems using 125 VDC power sources are much more expensive than those quoted for 120 VAC operation. 10 BIT PROTOCOL START PARITY STOP With Parity Checking START STOP STOP Without Parity Checking Figure 4-10 Bit Protocol Packet START PARITY STOP With Parity Checking START STOP STOP Without Parity Checking Figure 5-11 Bit Protocol Packet 203

210 The difference in packet size is illustrated in Figures 4 and 5. An 10 bit protocol is comprised of 1 Stop Bit, 1 Stop Bit, 1 Parity Bit, and 7 Data Bits or in the case of no parity, a stop bit is inserted to complete the 10 bit packet. Thus the total of bits transferred is 10 bits. 10 bit protocols usually are those encoded in ASCII. The ASCII encoding is defined to be a code from 00 to 7E (7 bits of data per character). A modem must be able to anticipate the data packet size in order to transfer the protocol bytes. A 10 bit modem is only able to reliably transmit/receive such 10 bit data packets. An 11 Bit protocol is one in which a byte s worth of data may be transferred. An 11 bit protocol is comprised of 1 Stop Bit, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Start Bit, and 8 Data Bits or in the case of no parity an additional stop bit is substituted.. Thus byte data may be transferred using an 11 bit modem without any data encoding. This is why 11 bit data may not be transferred/received via a 10 bit modem. It is important to match the modem with the protocol being used. Modem Cabling Options Cabling is dependent upon the devices attached and modem control options enabled. Through the AT modem command set such capabilities as RTS/CTS control, CD, DTR enable is possible. However, if one requires that a standard modem setting shall not be changed from location to location, signal jumpering through the cable may be preferable. What follows are a few diagrams illustrating cable connection between some devices. If one is unsure as to the function or emulation of RS 232 please reference one of the many fine ABB application notes on the subject. The Modem is generally a DCE RS232 device. It is configured via a personal computer using a terminal emulator program such as: DOS OPERATING SYSTEM PROCOMM WINDOWS TERMINAL or a similar 16 bit application program commonly available. WINDOWS 95,98, or NT Hyperterminal or similar 32 bit application programs commonly available. Such programs are available to be configured for handshake control, no handshake, XON/XOFF control. A variety of cables are illustrated for connection of a device to the modem for AT terminal command configuration, or device operation connectivity. Knowledge of the RS 232 port design is important when interconnecting a modem and an IED. Also if configuration software is required to communicate and configure the device through the com port, knowledge of the software s requirement to control the RTS/CTS, CD, DSR, or DTR RS 232 lines must be known. Table 1 lists the variety of ABB products and the emulation of each of the ports and applicability of cable design. Table 1 - Product Cable Guidelines For Connection To A Modem PRODUCT RS 232 Port RS232 Emulation CTS/RTS DSR/DTR* Sup DPU 2000 (Front and Back Ports) 9 Pin Female DTE NO NO* DPU 2000R 9 Pin Female DTE NO (Front and Back Ports) NO* TPU Pin Female DTE NO (Front and Back Ports) NO* TPU 2000R 9 Pin Female DTE NO (Front and Back Ports) NO* GPU 2000R 9 Pin Female DTE NO (Front and Back Ports) NO* PONI R 9 Pin Male DTE YES NO* REL 512 Front Port 9 Pin Female DCE NO NO* NOTES FOR MODEM CONNECTION USE FIGURE 6 CABLE USE FIGURE 6 CABLE USE FIGURE 6 CABLE USE FIGURE 6 CABLE USE FIGURE 6 CABLE USE FIGURE 7 or 8 Cable dependent on handshake options. USE FIGURE 9 CABLE 204

211 REL 512 Rear Port (Serial Port 1) REL 512 Network Port (DNP 3.0 Card) RCP SOFTWARE ECP SOFTWARE OR WIN ECP SOFTWARE PONI M COMSET SOFTWARE 9 Pin Male DTE NO NO 9 Pin Female DTE YES** NO* IBM XT 25 Pin Female IBM COMPAT. 9 Pin Male IBM XT 25 Pin Female IBM COMPAT. 9 Pin Male IBM XT 25 Pin Female IBM COMPAT. 9 Pin Male USUALLY DTE Hardware Dependent USUALLY DTE Hardware Dependent USUALLY DTE Hardware Dependent NO NO* NO NO* YES NO* ** PONI R Card does not support DTR/DSR HANDSHAKE LINES USE FIGURE 12 CABLE (Modem Handshake options disabled). USE FIGURE 10 or 11 Cable dependent on handshake options. Sample cables are illustrated in FIGURES 12 and 13. Sample cables are illustrated in FIGURES 12 and 13. Sample cables are illustrated in FIGURES 12 and 13. Additionally, Figures 14 and 15 illustrate a communication cable configuration when a Modicon PLC is connected to a Modem (as is the case when it is using a Ladder Logic XMIT block allowing the port to operate as a host device). IED Cable Modem Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) RCD TXD RCD 2 TXD GND 5 DTE *OPTIONAL DEPENDENT ON MODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION 7 GND 8 CD * 4 RTS * 5 CTS * 6 DSR * 20 DTR * (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) DCE Figure 6 - Example Cable 1: GPU 2000R, TPU 2000, TPU 2000R, DPU 2000, DPU 2000R, MSOC, or DPU 1500R. It is recommended that DSR, CD, and CTS control be disabled via modem. If control is disabled, jumpers are optional as shown. PONI -R Female Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) RCD TXD RCD 2 TXD GND RTS CTS DTE *OPTIONAL DEPENDENT ON MODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION 7 GND 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR * 20 DTR * DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 7 - Example Cable 2: ABB PONI R (installed in a REL 301, 302, 350, 352, 356 or MDAR), using hardware handshaking configured in the modem. Install optional jumper if modem configured for supplying DSR signal. 205

212 PONI -R Female Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) RCD TXD RCD 2 TXD GND RTS CTS DTE *OPTIONAL DEPENDENT ON MODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION 7 GND 6 DSR * 20 DTR * DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 8 - Example Cable 3: ABB PONI R (installed in a REL 301, 302, 350, 352, 356 or MDAR), NOT using hardware handshaking configured in the modem. Install optional jumper if modem configured for supplying DSR signal. REL 512 Front Port Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) RCD TXD 2 3 Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) 2 TXD 3 RCD GND 5 DCE *OPTIONAL DEPENDENT ON MODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION 7 GND 8 CD * 4 RTS * 5 CTS * 6 DSR * 20 DTR * DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 9 - Example Cable 4: ABB REL 512 Connected To A Modem Through The RS 232 Front Port. It is recommended that RTS/CTS and DSR/DTR handshaking be disabled so optional jumpers need not be installed within the cable. REL 512 Network Port Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) RCD TXD CTS RTS GND DCE *OPTIONAL DEPENDENT ON MODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) 2 TXD 3 RCD 4 RTS 5 CTS 7 GND 6 DSR * 20 DTR * DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 10 -Example Cable 5: REL 512 Network Port Cable Connection To a MODEM. It is advisable that the DSR/DTR control be disabled in the modem so that the optional DSR/DTR jumpers not be inserted in the cable. 206

213 REL 512 Network Port Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) RCD TXD CTS RTS GND DCE *OPTIONAL DEPENDENT ON MODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) 2 TXD 3 RCD 4 RTS * 5 CTS * 7 GND 6 DSR * 20 DTR * DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 11 - Example Cable 5: ABB REL 512 Connected To A Modem Through The RS 232 Network Port With Handshaking From The REL 512 Disabled. It is recommended that RTS/CTS and DSR/DTR handshaking be disabled in the MODEM so optional jumpers need not be installed within the cable. IBM PC Female Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) RCD TXD DSR DTR GND RTS CTS NOTE: If Software does not support DSR/DTR - install hardware signal jumpers in the cable and disable the modem control for DSR/DTR. If RTS/CTS is not controlled via software Install RTS/CTS jumpers for each side of the cable. As an option, disable RTS/CTS handshaking on the modem. DTE 3 RCD 2 TXD 6 DSR 20 DTR 7 GND 4 RTS 5 CTS DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 12 - Cable 6: IBM PC 9 Pin Port Cable Connecting to a Modem With Handshaking Enabled. Please refer to the NOTE for optional jumpers and modem configuration options. IBM PC XT Cable Male Cable Gender ( 25 Pin Connector) Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR GND CD DTR DTE 2 TXD 3 RXD 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 7 GND 8 CD 20 DTR DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 13 - Cable 7: IBM PC 25 Pin Port Cable Connecting to a Modem With Handshaking Enabled. Please refer to the NOTE for optional jumpers and modem configuration options. NOTE CHECK SOFTWARE WITH RESPECT FOR SUPPORTED RS 232 PIN HANDSHAKING OPTIONS. 207

214 PLC Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) RCD TXD DSR DTR GND RTS CTS DTE 3 RCD 2 TXD 7 GND 4 RTS 5 CTS 6 DSR 20 DTR DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 14 - Cable 8: PLC Cable Connectivity To a Modicon PLC with Handshaking Enabled On The PLC And Modem Side. PLC Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector) Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector) RCD TXD DSR DTR GND RTS * CTS * DTE *OPTIONAL DEPENDENT ON MODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION 3 RCD 2 TXD 7 GND 4 RTS * 5 CTS * 6 DSR * 20 DTR * DCE (Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow) Figure 15 - Cable 8: PLC Cable Connectivity To a Modicon PLC with Handshaking Disabled On The PLC And Modem Side. At Command Set Within these examples, a Hayes Compatible external telephone modem from 3Com and ZOOM is used. The command sets and S Registers differ slightly based upon the chip set used. For example, the ZOOM modem uses a chipset from LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES. The description of the command set is available from the internet web-site The 3Com modem has their command set available on the Internet web-site : The AT & commands are usually the same for both manufacturers, However, the definition of the AT X (Where X may be a letter or a \ or && and a letter) commands vary widely between the manufacturers. Also the AT S (S register commands) register definitions vary widely between the two manufacturers. US Robotics (3COM) 56 K (V.90 or X2) Sportster Faxmodem The Sportster FAXMODEM is an external modem. This modem allows visualization of a variety of parameters allowing for visual troubleshooting in the event of trouble. The Sportster also has a set of dipswitches allowing for quick configuration without connection of a Terminal Emulator to configure the unit through AT commands. Please refer to the web-site documents for a more complete explanation of configuration strings. Prior to configuring the modem, attach the proper cable between the terminal emulator and the modem. One Should Type AT (without the quotation marks) and depress the enter key. The modem shall echo back an OK to acknowledge the communication. It is recommended that the dipswitches for this unit be set as follows: 1: Down Data Terminal Ready Overriden (EXCEPT IF USING THE BIRT) 2: Down Numeric Results Code Displayed 208

215 3: Down Display Results Code 4: UP Echo OFFLINE Commands 5: Dependent upon application AUTO ANSWER 6 Down- Carrier Detect Override (EXCEPT IF USING THE BIRT) 7: UP Load NVRAM DEFAULTS 8: Down Smart Mode Operation If the modem does not answer, please check the terminal emulator settings to be the following: 9600 Baud 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Even Parity Hardware or No Flow Control depending upon the cable selected and configuration of modem. VT 100 Terminal Emulation Inbound Communications : Carriage Return = Carriage Return and Line Feed If the modem does connect, then the following command may be sent to initialize the modem to parameterize the RS 232 com ports to the proper mode as explained below. AT=&F1 &F1 = Initialize the modem to Hardware Control Factory Defaults. AT = &A3 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0 &H1 &I0 &K1 &M4 &N0 &P0 &R2 &S0 &T5 &U0 &Y1 &A = Protocol Indicators Added (error control and data compression) (3 = Yes) &B = Serial Port Rate (0= Follows Connection Rate) &C = Carrier Detect Override (1 = Overridden) &D = Data Terminal Ready Control (0= Overridden) &G= Guard Tone (0 = USA & Canada) &H = Hardware Flow Control (1 = CTS Enabled, 0 = Disabled) & I = Software Flow Control (0 = Disabled) & K = Data Control Compression (Auto Enable Disabled =0) & M = Error Control (4 = Normal) & N = Sets Connect Speed (0 = Determined by remote modem). & P = Rotary Dial Ratio Pulse (0 = USA & Canada) & R = RD Hardware Flow Control (RTS) ( 2 = Received Data To Computer) & S = Data Set Ready Operation (0 = DSR Overridden Always ON) & T = Test Loop Enable (5 = Inhibits Test Mode) & U = Floor Connect Speed (Determined by &N Codes 0 = Best Possible Speed) & Y = Break Handling (1 = Expedited, Destructive) For this modem, Register S0 controls the Auto-answer feature. Autoanswer is controlled via the dip-switch position 5 and a combination of the value in register S0. To change the value of auto answer pickup (number of rings) send the command: ATS0= X, where X is the number of rings which the device shall sense for phone pickup. Note if the host is to dial out the number at all times, this parameter may be set to a 0 thereby disabling the auto answer feature. Once the commands are written to the modem, one must write them into the modem s non-volatile memory. The command should be sent as follows to the modem: AT=&W0 Or AT=&W1 The US ROBOTICS Sportster Modem offers two NVRAM profiles. W0 places the parameters in to Profile 1, whereas W1 places the parameters in Profile

216 Zoom 56Kx Dual Mode Faxmodem Configuration The ZOOM modem offers more LED s on their external modem than the US Robotics device. However, the ZOOM modem must be configured for each parameter via a TERMINAL EMULATOR program. The ZOOM modem does not offer a dipswitch for configuration of the different operation modes. AT \ commands and AT X (where X is a letter) performs the setup of the device. Prior to configuring the modem, attach the proper cable between the terminal emulator and the modem. One Should Type AT (without the quotation marks) and depress the enter key. If the modem does not answer, please check the terminal emulator settings to be the following: 9600 Baud 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Even Parity Hardware or No Flow Control depending upon the cable selected and configuration of modem. VT 100 Terminal Emulation Inbound Communications : Carriage Return = Carriage Return and Line Feed If the modem does connect, then the following command may be sent to initialize the modem to parameterize the RS 232 com ports to the proper mode as explained below. AT=&F0 &F0 = Initialize the modem to Hardware Control Factory Defaults. AT = &C1 &D0 &G0 &K3 &Q0 &S0 &C = Carrier Detect Override (1 = Overridden) &D = Data Terminal Ready Control (0= Overridden) &G= Guard Tone (0 = USA & Canada) & K = Local Flow Control (0 = Disabled, 3 = Hardware RTS/CTS, 4 = XON/XOFF) &Q = Asynchronous Communication Mode (0 = Asynchronous Mode Buffered) & S = Data Set Ready Operation (0 = DSR Overridden Always ON) For this modem, Register S0 controls the Auto-answer feature. Autoanswer is controlled via the dip-switch position 5 and a combination of the value in register S0. To change the value of auto answer pickup (number of rings) send the command: ATS0= X, where X is the number of rings which the device shall sense for phone pickup. Note if the host is to dial out the number at all times, this parameter may be set to a 0 thereby disabling the auto answer feature. To view the configuration, one may issue the following command: AT=&V &V = View Active Configuration and Stored Profile This can view the programmed profiles. To store this configuration, the command AT=&W0. Refer to the document at for an explanation of the AT L commands where L is the defined commands for dial-up, speaker control, and other modem functions. 210

217 Connectivity Example 1- TPU 2000R To WINECP Configuration Software Connectivity Example If one was to connect a TPU 2000R to a configuration program such as WIN ECP over a long distance, a method to accomplish this is via a telephone dialup modem. As illustrated in Figure 16, a personal computer with WIN ECP is at the headquarters attached to a Public Telephone Switched Network. A standard 10 bit telephone modem is providing connection of the digital signals to the analog telephone line. At a remote location is a TPU 2000R attached to a modem providing connectivity. At both ends, the modem must be configured for appropriate auto- answer capabilities and RS 232 port capabilities. The protocol used to connect is ABB s Standard 10 Byte protocol. This is a 10 bit protocol which may be transmitted asynchronously via a telephone dialup modem as those discussed via this application note. The Standard 10 byte protocol is a Master-Slave protocol. The device at the PC terminal end ( WIN ECP End) sends the command dial up string whereas the DPU 2000R modem end must be configured to AUTOANSWER capabilities. If a ZOOM Modem is placed at the Host end and a US Robotics modem is placed at the IED end, the following configuration must be configured for each. Personal Computer With WIN ECP Installed Example Cable 6 or 7 Figures 12 or 13. Example Cable 1- Figure Bit Dial Up MODEM 10 Bit Dial Up MODEM Auto- Answer Enabled EC Public Switched Telephone Network Address Baud Std 10 Byte Protocol TPU 2000R Figure 16 Application Topology Diagram PC TO TPU 2000R Point To Point. Figures 17 and 18 illustrate the WIN ECP screens required for connectivity to the device upon dial up. Upon execution of the ABB WIN ECP program, the initial screen shown in Figure 17 appears. One should select Remote Access which allows attachment to the remote modem if the proper AT command strings and numeric dial out instructions are given. 211

218 Figure 17- Initial ABB WIN ECP Access Screen If one depresses the OK button after selecting the WINDOWS RADIO button Selection for Remote Access, the screen as illustrated in Figure 18 appears. Figure 18 - Parameter Selection Screen For Remote Dial Up Access The COM PORT is that of the PC s modem port for attachment to the phone line. The Baud Rate is that for the remote modem and must match that of the Standard 10 Byte port which the modem is attached to the TPU 2000R. The Frame is that selected for the Remote TPU 2000R. The Unit Address is the unit address of the Remote TPU 2000R node. If Pulse Dial is selected, then the the Modem Command for sending the Pulse command is sent when dialing the number, otherwise, if Tone Dial is selected the command ATDT is sent to prefix the modem dial out string. In this case, the Tone Dial selection is activated. The dialup string is: ATDT,,,, (the substation number of the remote device) To hang up the device the WIN ECP program must be able to send the command: ATH0 212

219 Additionally, one must be sure that the appropriate modem configuration strings have been accepted by the modem for correct handshake control and remote auto answer configuration. Connectivity Example 2 REL 3XX TO RCP Configuration Software If one wished to connect an ABB transmission relay such as a REL 300 (MDAR), REL 301, REL 302, REL 350, REL 352 or REL 356 to its configuration software (RCP Remote Communication Program), using a dial up configuration as illustrated in Figure 19 is quite possible. The REL transmission relay uses a PONI R card for direct point to point communication via a cable or a modem. Please reference Instruction Leaflet titled RCP Communication Program Users GUIDE and Instruction Leaflet titled RS-PONI RS 232 Product Operated Network Interface User s Guide. Personal Computer With RCP Installed Example Cable 6 or 7 Figures 12 or 13. Example Cable 1- Figures 7 or Bit Dial Up MODEM 10 Bit Dial Up MODEM Auto- Answer Enabled ÄÅÅÄÅÅ ÅÅ Ä ÄÅÅ ÅÅ Ä Public Switched Telephone Network - ANALOG LINE 9600 Baud Std 10 Byte Protocol REL 350 Figure 19 - RCP TO REL 350 Communication Topology Example In this example, a REL 350 shall be connected together with two US ROBOTIC Model Sportster Modems as described previously in this application note. RCP software shall be configured to communicate to the REL 350 via the aforementioned modems. Several steps are to be completed in this example. 1. Configure the PONI R dipswitches to correspond to the appropriate baud rates of the modem and RCP software. 2. Attach the correct cables as to the relay devices as indicated in Figure 19. In this example however, we shall disable handshaking (RTS/CTS) in the modem, so a straight through DTE to DCE cable is necessary. 3. Configure the US ROBOTIC modems to enable/disable the appropriate features. 4. Configure the RCP software to connect to the modem and enable communications. 5. Execute the communication command sequence and establish communications. STEP 1 In this example, the communication baud rate selection shall be set for 9600 baud. The baud rate of the PONI R card is configured via dipswitches located at the rear of the card, consult the PONI R manual referenced in this document. Also configure the PONI R card for NO COMMAND ISSUED mode. If one is to view the dipswitches of the PONI R (installed in the REL 350) card, the four dipswitch positions (left to right) are upward, and the rightmost dipswitch is downward. This corresponds to dipswitch positions 1 through 5 being or ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF. The PONI R CARD is now configured. STEP 2 As per Figure 19, connect the cables as indicated for the personal computer to modem and the REL 350 PONI R to modem connection. In this example, the handshaking shall be disabled on the PONI R card modem. Thus even using standard off the shelf cables (9 to 25 pin cables with each pin run straight through) shall operate in this example. STEP 3 Now the modems shall be configured. Using the HYPERTERMINAL program supplied with Windows 95, 98, NT or 2000 can be used to configure the modems. Using hyperterminal as illustrated in Figure 20, one can issue the AT commands to configure the modem. 213

220 Figure 20 - Hyperterminal At Command Set Example Each modem must be configured in this method. The modem parameters and dipswitch settings shall be covered for each modem location. Dipswitch Settings For The Modem Local To RCP: Modem Dipswitch Position Position 1 UP Data Terminal Position 2 UP Verbal Results Codes Position 3 DOWN Display Results Codes Position 4 UP-Echo Offline Commands Position 5 DOWN Disable auto answer Position 6 DOWN Carrier Detect Override Position 7 UP Load NVRAM defaults Position 8 DOWN Smart Mode Dipswitch Settings For The Modem Local To The REL 350/ PONI R card: Modem Dipswitch Position Position 1 UP Data Terminal Position 2 UP Verbal Results Codes Position 3 DOWN Display Results Codes Position 4 UP-Echo Offline Commands Position 5 UP Auto Answer on the first ring, or higher if specified in NVRAM Position 6 DOWN Carrier Detect Override Position 7 UP Load NVRAM defaults Position 8 DOWN Smart Mode In setting the modems via the AT command set, it was determined that the modem closest to the computer executing the RCP program shall use the factory defaults of the modem right out of the box. If one was to view the USROBOTICS troubleshooting guide (available on the website) the factory defaults are listed in the downloadable files. For the modem attached to the RCP program, one must change a few parameters within the modem to ensure connectivity. Starting with the factory default settings with the modem right out of the box, one should issue the AT commands: 214

221 AT&H0&D0&K0&R1&S0 Which corresponds to the following definitions as designated in the USROBOTICS literature: &H0 = Flow Control Disabled &D0 = DTR Override (Default) &K0 = DATA COMPRESSION DISABLED &R1=MODEM IGNORES RTS &S0 = DSR OVERRIDE ALWAYS ON As stated previously, other commands could be issued to the modem to allow it to peacefully co-exist and operate with the PONI R card. It is highly recommended to write the settings to the EEPROM in the modem by issuing the AT&W 1 or AT&W2 command STEP 4 The RCP program must now be configured to operate with the modem and issue the commands. The steps to use this are as follows: One must start RCP and enter the standard start screen as illustrated in Figure 21. Figure 21 RCP Standard Setup Screen One must configure a substation file for the REL 350 connection. Depress the Alternate key and S simultaneously to enter the Substation menu and depress the down arrow once to select New Substation File menu selection as illustrated in Figure

222 Figure 22 New Substation Setup Screen A file must be configured for the REL 350 connection. Since a PONI R card is not addressable, it is considered a point to point device. As illustrated in Figure 23, one must pick an option for the configuration. In our example (as shown in the topology of Figure 19), although the REL 350 is networked through a modem, the connection is still point to point, one must select the selection 1 to allow correct connectivity. Figure 23 illustrates the screen queries and answers for this specific example. As illustrated in Figure 24, the operator must supply additional configuration data. Figure 24 lists the configuration responses for this example. Configuration data to be supplied is as such: RELAY TYPE in this case selection 5 (REL 350) is selected. DEVICE DESCRIPTION This field is used only for documentation purposes. LOGON SEQUENCE In this example, the ATDT command is used for a pulse tone telephone system. Also in this example, an analog system is used and an additional prefix of 9 must be dialed to access the external public telephone system, the comma, is used to insert a delay before dialing the telephone number of the remote location (where the REL 350 resides). In this instance, the substation is located in a telephone overlay area where the area code must be dialed with the main number. Additionally, since the remote modem is resident at an analog extension, several commas, are added to create a delay for the phone line to transfer to that extension and then synchronize with the remote modem. A query is generated to accept the configuration and a request for the file name to store the information is then requested (without the operating system file extension). Figure 23 Initial Substation Configuration Screen 216

223 Figure 24 Final Substation Configuration Screen Query One must then configure the RCP program to execute the dial up sequence and configure the personal computer communication port selected. One must depress the Alternate key and C key simultaneously to access the COMMUNICATE menu shown in Figure 25. Figure 25 Communicate Menu Selections One should depress the down arrow key once to select the settings menu to configure the port type, baud rate, and communication port selection as illustrated in Figure

224 Figure 26 RCP Settings Selection Screen For this example, one must configure the RCP program for the same parameters as the PONI R card, in her words, 9600 Baud. (Selection 9 in the Bit Rate Selection Submenu) shown in Figure 27. Figure 27 Communication Baud Rate Setting Screen Execute the same procedure to access the RS232/MODEM Selection submenu. The selection for modem must be selected. By using this selection, the query for ATDT dial out command screen will be issued when issuing the connect command prompt. Figure 28 illustrates the screen presented for the RS 232/ MODEM prompt. 218

225 Figure 28 MODEM/RS 232 Screen Prompt Selection Submenu The COM PORT Selection menu must be used to select the PC computer port though which RCP will issue commands. In the sample case, the PC used has only one com port port 1. The selections for the communication port parameters are shown on the bottom right hand side of the communication screen. One must now select the previously configured file for operation. Simultaneously depress the ALT and S keys on the keypad to select the Substation Screen as illustrated in Figure 22. Highlight the SELECT SUBSTATION selection. The screen as shown in Figure 29 will be presented. As illustrated, the file REL350md.sub is available for selection. Depress the right arrow key twice to select the file (highlighted as shown) and depress the enter key. Depress the enter key again to select the REL 350 description of the intended IED to be attached. Finally, one must initiate communications with the relay. Depress the alternate C keys simultaneously to view the menu as illustrated in Figure 25. Highlight the INITIATE selection and depress the enter key to display the dial out query shown in Figure 30. Notice that the dial out telephone number is visible. Depress the Y key on the keyboard to initiate communications. One should notice a black screen as illustrated in Figure 31 which follows. Once the modem connects end to end, one will be prompted to depress the enter key to return to the main screen as shown in Figure 21. One may then proceed to the RELAY COMMANDS menu to query the relay for information. The modem is configured to operate the speaker (there is a volume control on the left hand side of the modem as one faces the front of the modem) until connection occurs. 219

226 Figure 29 Substation File Selection Screen Figure 30 Dial Out Initiation Figure 31 Modem Command Mode Screen Upon Device Connection 220

227 At the conclusion of the communication session, one must remember to hang up the modem and disconnect the device. Depressing the Alternate key and the C key simultaneously will display the screen as illustrated in Figure 25. Use the down arrow to select the HANG UP selection. The program will issue the AT&H0 command. Example 3 Connection Of A REL 512 ASCII Front Port To Hyperterminal Software PREFACE - The REL 512 differs from the other two relays presented in EXAMPLE 2 and EXAMPLE 1 above. The communication port is a master/slave port design. The configuration port uses ASCII strings in that a dumb terminal interface is able to attach and display the device settings/metering parameters. The REL 512 sends out (via its RD line) a time/date ASCII string every minute for display on the attached device. This fact is very critical in that the modem or device attached must be able to tolerate this string. Additionally, the REL 3XX products or the TPU/DPU 2000R, GPU 2000R or DPU 1500R communication ports are slave only in their protocol design. The port only responds to requests. The REL 512 differs in that it sends out at time string without any prompting to the attached device. The REL 512 also uses a numeric character or alphabet character to move through its menus. The other devices discussed in the other examples use protocols and do not respond to the attached device strings. The REL 512 will respond to each character. As shown in this example, the attached device (in this case the modem) must be able to tolerate this operational characteristic. The REL 512 has settings capabilities configurable and viewable via its front com port (which is a DCE RS232 port) or its front panel interface. Any dumb terminal emulator is able to connect to the front port and synchronize with the unit to allow visualization of the REL 512 parameters. Within this example, two US ROBOTIC model (V.EVERYTHING modem using trellis technology encoding [which differs from the QAM encoding]). As illustrated in Figure 32, the modems are configured via a point to point connection. The REL 512 ASCII protocol is not addressable and therefore cannot be multi-dropped unless port switch devices are added to the system. The steps to establish communications are: 1. Connect the correct cable between the REL 512 front and the modem. 2. Connect the correct cable between the PC executing the HYPERTERMINAL program (in this case the operating system used is WINDOWS 95). 3. Parameterization of the REL 512 front port communication parameters. 4. Parameterization of the HYPERTERMINAL settings. 5. Parameterization of the USROBOTICS modems using its particular AT command set. 6. Execution of the connectivity procedure to establish communications. As illustrated in Figure 32, the topology of the REL 512 interconnection with the HYPERTERMINAL software is illustrated. Please note on the diagram, the appropriate cables used to connect the device. In this example, the communication handshaking cannot be used since RTS/CTS, DCD, DSR, DTR signals are not supported on the REL 512 front communication RS 232 port. 221

228 Personal Computer With An Operating System Offering a HYPERTERMINAL Utility Example Cable 6 or 7 Figures 12 or 13. Example Cable 4- Figure Bit Dial Up MODEM 10 Bit Dial Up MODEM LOCAL LOCATION Public Switched Telephone Network - ANALOG LINE Auto- Answer Enabled ÄÅÅÄÅÅ ÅÅ Ä ÄÅÅ ÅÅ Ä Baud REL512 MENU ASCII REL 512 REMOTE LOCATION Figure 32 Modem Connection Between A REL 512 Front Port And Hyperterminal Configuration Software Step 1 And Step 2: Attach the Correct Cables to the Devices Connect the cables as illustrated in Figure 32 above. Step 3: Configure the REL512 Communication Port Configure the front port interface of the REL 512 with the correct parameters. The standard configuration for the REL 512 is: 8 Data Bits No Parity 2Stop Bits 9600 Baud. Configure the font port with these parameters: 8 Data Bits No Parity 1Stop Bit Baud. The procedure to configure the front port interface is as follows: When connecting a device to the front port of the relay, the communication parameters for the port must be changed to reflect those of the device to which it is connecting. To change the parameters via the REL 512 front panel interface one could follow the procedure as follows: 1. From the screen of the Front Panel Interface viewing the meter readings, Depress the E key to get the menu : E Fault Records Device Info Edit Settings C Metering 2. Depress the Left Arrow Key to Display the Menu E Edit Settings Fault Records View Settings C Metering 222

229 3. Depress the E Key to display the menu E Password ******** C Edit Settings One must enter the CORRECT password to change the relay settings for this procedure. The default password for the REL 512 is ABB (without the quotation marks). If the password has been changed, please enter the correct password as follows: Depress the up arrow or down arrow to page through the numeric and alphabet selections for the password. Depress the left arrow or the right arrow to move through the different positions of the password. 4. Depress the E key to accept the password selection you have entered. If the password is accepted the following screen shall be visible. E Password Accepted C Edit Settings 5. Depress the left arrow key to accept the settings and proceed to the next menu which is shown E Sys Settings Act Settings C Edit Settings 6. Depress E so that the System Settings may be changed. The following menu item shall be displayed: E CHG ACTIVE GRP IDENTIFICATION C System Settings 7. Depress the right arrow key to display the following screen: E IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM PARAM DATE & TIME C Sys Settings 8. Depress the right arrow key to display the following screen: E SYSTEM PARAM COMM PORTS IDENTIFICATION C Sys Settings 9. Depress the right arrow key to display the following screen: E COMM PORTS DATA RECORDING SYSTEM PARAMS C Sys Settings 10. Depress the E key to display the following screen: E FRONT PORT REAR PORT MODBUS ID C COM PORTS Since this example is a guide to configuring the communication settings for the FRONT COM ASCII port, please refer to step 11 for FRONT PORT CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS. 11. Depress the E key to display the following screen: E FRNT BIT RATE FRNT DATA LGTH FRNT STOP BITS C FRONT PORT 223

230 12. Depress the E key to display the following screen: E ENTER System Group C FRNT BIT RATE By depressing the left arrow key, one can view the baud rate selections for the REL 512 front port interface. The available selections are: Select the desired baud rate by depressing the E key. 13. Depress the C key to display the following screen E FRNT BIT RATE FRNT DATA LGTH FRNT STOP BITS C FRONT PORT 14. One must then select the Front panel data length depress the to reveal the following screen. E FRNT DATA LNGTH FRNT PARITY FRNT BIT RATE C FRONT PORT 15. One must select the Front Port Data Length. Depressing the E key allows visualization of the following menu. E ENTER System Group 8 C FRNT DATA LNGTH Depressing the left arrow key allows the operator to select from the following data lengths: Depress E to accept the parameters and then depress the C to return to the menu: E FRNT DATA LNGTH FRNT PARITY FRNT BIT RATE C FRONT PORT 1. One must set the parity by depressing the left arrow key to display the following screen. E EDIT PARITY FRNT STOP BITS FRNT DATA LNGTH C FRONT PORT 2. Depress E to display the following screen E ENTER System Group NONE C FRNT PARITY By depressing the left arrow key the choices for parity are displayed. The choices for selection are: NONE ODD EVEN 19. Depress the C key to display the following screen E FRNT BIT RATE FRNT DATA LGTH 224

231 FRNT STOP BITS C FRONT PORT 20.Depress the left arrow key to select the Front Panel Stop Bit selections. The following Screen should be visible. E ENTER System Group 1 C FRNT STOP BITS The selections for Stop Bits are 1 or Depress the E key to accept the selections. 22.Depress the C key to back out of the relay and accept the settings when prompted by the front panel Interface. Step 4: Configure Hyperterminal Configuration of HYPERTERMINAL requires a few easy steps. The same configuration of hyperterminal may be used for two tasks: Configuration of the MODEMS with the AT command sets. Dial out and query of the REL 512 MENU ASCII SCREENS for device configuration and file retrieval. The REL 512 FRONT port as illustrated in TABLE 1 does not offer handshaking. Therefore, setup requires that no handshaking be used for HYPERTERMINAL. HYPERTERMINAL MUST BE SET UP WITH COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS WHICH MATCH THAT OF STEP 3 ABOVE, namely: 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity Baud The steps to accomplish this are as follows: 1. Select HYPERTERMINAL from the WINDOWS menu to reveal the following screen illustrated in Figure Select the icon labeled Hyperterminal.exe The screen illustrated in Figure 34 should be visible. The operator will be prompted for a name as illustrated. Figure 33 Hyperterminal Selection Screen 225

232 Figure 34 Hyperterminal Setup Screen 3. Once the OK icon has been depressed, the screen for port setup will be displayed. Note that the port setup menu is illustrated for display and COM 1 selection is highlighted for this example and selection. Notice that with the MODEM selection (for the built in computer internal modem) deselected, the some of the fields are greyed out. 4. The COM properties for the modem must be selected for this example to those selected for the REL 512. In this case the same settings configured for the REL 512 in STEP 3 are selected for the interface. Notice that the settings are selected in Figure 35 for those configured in STEP 3. Notice for this example, hardware handshaking is enabled for RTS/CTS configuration (since HYPERTERMINAL TO MODEM CONFIGURATION IS OCCURING NOTE: REL 512 DOES NOT HAVE HANDSHAKING AND THE MODEM WILL BE CONFIGURED AS SUCH). 5. Once the OK pushbutton is depressed, the screen depicted in Figure 37 is presented to the operator. AT commands can now be typed to configure the modem with the appropriate parameters for operation in this system. Figure 35 Com Port Configuration For Attachment Of Hyperterminal Session 226

233 Figure 36 Com Port Settings Configuration Screen The configuration process for this step is now complete. Step 5: Configuration Of The Modem Parameters For The Local And Remote Sites THE USROBOTICS modems used (Model V.Everything) have commands similar to those of the previous USROBOTIC modems. Several differences are apparent with respect to their S register configurations and auto configurability. Additional sessions may be set up to allow remote configuration. However, it is strongly advised that remote configuration and automation dial up capabilities not be used with the REL 512 since difficulties may result since handshaking is not available. Another word of caution should be issued in that the V.Everything modem may experience difficulties connecting with the REL 512 master/slave emulation of the port during dial-up sessions. IF the MODEM is undergoing the attachment process and the REL 512 happens to send out its time ASCII string to the MODEM simultaneously, the modem will disconnect and display the prompt NO CARRIER at the host site. This process will take a few minutes to occur and until this occurs, no communications will occur. If a command string is sensed via the SD line (remote modem LED will illumintate) during the dialing process, the remote modem will hang up (the remote modem OH [On Hook]) LED will extinguish. There is no way to overcome this limitation in operation with this model of modem. Some important words covering the configuration of the MODEM when used with the REL 512: DISABLE DTR (&D0) USE THE DEFAULT DISABLE OF SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (&I0) DSR ALWAYS ON (&S0) DISABLE CARRIER DETECT (&C0) Thus the command string should look like this: AT&D0&S0&I0&C0&W Note the &W writes the current setting to the Non-Volitile RAM. Additional tips are covered in the following tips for LOCAL modem configuration (that modem attached to the HYPERTERMINAL Personal Computer) and the REMOTE modem (that modem attached to the REL 512). Attach the cable from the PC to the modem undergoing the configuration process. It is advisable to label each modem location since the LOCAL modem will be configured slightly differently from the remote modem. 227

234 Local Modem Local Modem parameters are illustrated in Figure 37. To display the current list of parameters, the command string AT&I4 should be typed in the HYPERTERMINAL environment. A list of the parameters used is shown. The LOCAL modem also may be configured via the dipswitches located underneath the relay. Dipswitch Positions are: POSITION 1 UP = DTR Always ON POSITION 2 UP =VERBAL RESULTS CODE POSITION 3 DOWN = DISPLAY RESULTS CODE POSITION 4 UP =ECHO OFFLINE COMMANDS POSITION 5 DOWN =SUPPRESS AUTO ANSWER POSITION 6 DOWN = CARRIER DETECT OVERRIDE POSITION 7 UP =DISPLAY NORMAL RESULTS CODE POSITION 8 DOWN =ENABLE AT COMMAND SET POSITION 9 UP =NO DISCONNECT WITH +++ POSITION 10 UP =LOAD NVRAM DEFAULTS NOTE this local modem is only configured for DIAL OUT capability no auto answer. Additionally, all commands are echo ed back to the terminal for easy access and troubleshooting. Upon Power UP the NVRAM defaults are loaded into memory. It is also illustrates in Figure 33 that handshaking is enabled. No other parameters have been changed from the default settings. Remote Modem Figure 37 Local Modem Configuration Parameters The configuration requirements for the remote modem vary slightly from the local modem. The configured commands in the REMOTE modem are illustrated in Figure 38. The parameters configured in your remote modem may be accessable using the command AT&I4. It is important to connect the HYPERTERMINAL program to the modem being configured as REMOTE to accomplish this. It is also advisable to label the modem as being a REMOTE device for identification purposes only. The remote modem should have all its handshaking requirements turned off. Additionally, the COMMAND MODE ECHO and the ONLINE MODE ECHO must be disabled. Failure to disable these parameters will lockup the buffer of the modem and the REL 512 since the connect strings, REL 512 time ASCII strings (on a 1 minute basis) will be returned to the REL 512 for response. 228

235 The important command strings to configure are: DISABLE DTR (&D0) USE THE DEFAULT DISABLE OF SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (&I0) DSR ALWAYS ON (&S0) ONLINE ECHO OFF (E0) ONLINE LOCAL ECHO OFF (F1) DISABLE CARRIER DETECT (&C0) DISABLE TRANSMIT FLOW CONTROL (&H0) DISABLE RECEIVED DATA RTS CONTROL (&R1) The AT command set string should look like this: AT&D0&I0&S0E0F1&C0&H0&R1&W As with the previous example, the &W writes the command string to NVRAM. Since this modem is configured for AUTO ANSWER, certain S registers should be configured for optimal performance. In this example, sample S register values are given as an example. The user should engineer appropriate values for their application: ATS0=3 (3 Rings before Auto Answer) ATS41=10 ( 10 Attempts before disconnect of Auto Answer) ATS19 = 1 (1 Minute Inactivity causes hang up). The S register definitions are particular to this particular brand of modem. Refer to the website or CD ROM included with the modem to verify correctness. As explained previously, the command AT&W should be sent to the device to write the parameters into NVRAM. Figure 38 Remote Modem Settings As described in for the local modem, the following dipswitches could be configured for power-up autoconfiguration: Dipswitch Positions are: POSITION 1 UP = DTR Always ON POSITION 2 UP =VERBAL RESULTS CODE 229

236 POSITION 3 UP = SUPPRESS RESULTS CODE POSITION 4 DOWN =NO ECHO OFFLINE COMMANDS POSITION 5 UP = AUTO ANSWER ON RING POSITION 6 DOWN = CARRIER DETECT OVERRIDE POSITION 7 DOWN =INHIBIT DISPLAY NORMAL RESULTS CODE POSITION 8 DOWN =ENABLE AT COMMAND SET *** (see note that follows) POSITION 9 UP =NO DISCONNECT WITH +++ POSITION 10 UP =LOAD NVRAM DEFAULTS ***NOTE Once configuration is complete it may be advisable to place dipswitch 8 in the UP position to disable AT commands. In this way if an AT command string is contained within the modem upload or download file strings or ASCII command strings, the modem will not respond unpredictable or disrupt communications. Step 6: Connection And Execution Of Attachment Procedure Attach the modem to analog lines (local and remote). Use the ATDT command string to access the modem as illustrated in Figure 39 using HYPERTERMINAL. Since the command echo is not suppressed for the local modem, the example screen in Figure 39 shows the RING and CONNECT prompts returned upon successful communication. Figure 39 ATDT Sample String And Successful Connection Banner If the modem does not connect, then the REL 512 may have been sending its time string during the dial up procedure. If this is the case, redial or modify the reconnect tries in the S19 register. If the modem does connect, then depress the / key or Backspace key on the keyboard to reveal the REL 512 startup screen illustrated in Figure 40. To exit the session, depress the hang up icon located on the HYPERTERMINAL screen or the HANG UP submenu located on the TERMINAL screen. Also one may send the AT&H0 string for hang up. 230

237 Figure 40 - REL 512 Configuration Menu Screen Example 4 Connection Of A REL512 ASCII Serial Port 2 (Rear Port) To Hyperterminal Software The REL 512 has settings capabilities configurable and viewable via its rear com port (which is a DTE RS232 port). Any dumb terminal emulator is able to connect to the rear port and synchronize with the unit to allow visualization of the REL 512 parameters. Within this example, two USROBOTIC model (V.EVERYTHING modem using trellis technology encoding [which differs from the QAM encoding]). As illustrated in Figure 41, the modems are configured via a point to point connection. The REL 512 ASCII protocol is not addressable and therefore cannot be multi-dropped unless port switch devices are added to the system. The steps to establish communications are: 1. Connect the correct cable between the REL 512 SERIAL 2 port and the modem. 2. Connect the correct cable between the PC executing the HYPERTERMINAL program (in this case the operating system used is WINDOWS 95). 3. Parameterize the REL 512 rear port communication parameters. 4. Set the jumpers internal to the relay for correct RS 232 port configuration 5. Configure and set HYPERTERMINAL settings. 6. Parameterize each USROBOTICS modem using its particular AT command set. 7. Execute the connectivity procedure to establish communications. As illustrated in Figure 41, the topology of the REL 512 interconnection with the HYPERTERMINAL software is illustrated. Please note on the diagram, the appropriate cables used to connect the device. In this example, handshaking will be used to provide coordination between the modems. The USROBOTIC modems allow Carrier Loss Redial capability along with dial back security capability. Although these features will not be configured and examined in this rudimentary application note, the RS 232 handshaking features will be set up to its fullest capability to allow addition (and reliability in operation) of these capabilities at a later date. 231

238 Personal Computer With RCP Installed Example Cable 6 or 7 Figures 12 or 13. Example Cable 5- Figures Bit Dial Up MODEM 10 Bit Dial Up MODEM LOCAL LOCATION Public Switched Telephone Network - ANALOG LINE Auto- Answer Enabled ÄÅÅÄÅÅ ÅÅ Ä Baud REL Menu ASCII Protocol REL 512 REMOTE LOCATION ÄÅÅ ÅÅ Ä Figure 41 Modem Connection Between A REL 512 Serial Port 2 (Located At The Back Of The Relay) And Hyperterminal Configuration Software Step 1: Construct and attach the cable as illustrated in Figure 41 above for the REL 512 / modem connection. (REMOTE LOCATION). Step 2: Construct and attach the cable as illustrated in Figure 41 above for the personal computer to modem connection. (LOCAL LOCATION Step 3: Configure the rear port interface of the REL 512 with the correct parameters. The default parameters for all ports are 9600 baud, 8 data bits, No parity, 2 Stop bits. However, with the standard configuration, the port cannot be used with a 10 bit modem as previously explained. The Serial port 2 (located at the back side of the REL 512) must be configured following the attached procedure. Configure the font port with these parameters which are compatible for operation with a 10 bit modem: Baud 8 Data Bits No Parity 1 Stop Bit The procedure to configure the REAR port interface is as follows: When connecting a device to the front port of the relay, the communication parameters for the port must be changed to reflect those of the device to which it is connecting. To change the parameters via the REL 512 front panel interface one could follow the procedure as follows: 1. From the screen of the Front Panel Interface viewing the meter readings, Depress the E key to get the menu : E Fault Records Device Info Edit Settings C Metering 2. Depress the Left Arrow Key to Display the Menu E Edit Settings Fault Records View Settings C Metering 232

239 3. Depress the E Key to display the menu E Password ******** C Edit Settings One must enter the CORRECT password to change the relay settings for this procedure. The default password for the REL 512 is ABB (without the quotation marks). If the password has been changed, please enter the correct password as follows: Depress the up arrow or down arrow to page through the numeric and alphabet selections for the password. Depress the left arrow or the right arrow to move through the different positions of the password. 4. Depress the E key to accept the password selection you have entered. If the password is accepted the following screen shall be visible. E Password Accepted C Edit Settings 5. Depress the left arrow key to accept the settings and proceed to the next menu which is shown E Sys Settings Act Settings C Edit Settings 6. Depress E so that the System Settings may be changed. The following menu item shall be displayed: E CHG ACTIVE GRP IDENTIFICATION C System Settings 7. Depress the right arrow key to display the following screen: E IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM PARAM DATE & TIME C Sys Settings 8. Depress the right arrow key to display the following screen: E SYSTEM PARAM COMM PORTS IDENTIFICATION C Sys Settings 9. Depress the right arrow key to display the following screen: E COMM PORTS DATA RECORDING SYSTEM PARAMS C Sys Settings 10. Depress the E key to display the following screen: E FRONT PORT REAR PORT MODBUS ID C COM PORTS Since this example is a guide to configuring the communication settings for the FRONT COM ASCII port, please refer to step 11 for FRONT PORT CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS. 11. Depress the key to display the following screen: E REAR BIT RATE REAR DATA LGTH REAR STOP BITS C REAR PORT 233

240 12. Depress the E key to display the following screen: E ENTER System Group C REAR BIT RATE By depressing the left arrow key, one can view the baud rate selections for the REL 512 REAR port interface. The available selections are: Select the desired baud rate by depressing the E key. 13. Depress the C key to display the following screen E REAR BIT RATE REAR DATA LGTH REAR STOP BITS C REAR PORT 14. One must then select the Front panel data length depress the to reveal the following screen. E REAR DATA LNGTH REAR PARITY REAR BIT RATE C REAR PORT 15. One must select the Front Port Data Length. Depressing the E key allows visualization of the following menu. E ENTER System Group 8 C REAR DATA LNGTH Depressing the left arrow key allows the operator to select from the following data lengths: Depress E to accept the parameters and then depress the C to return to the menu: E REAR DATA LNGTH REAR PARITY REAR BIT RATE C REAR PORT 17. One must set the parity by depressing the left arrow key to display the following screen. E EDIT PARITY REAR STOP BITS REAR DATA LNGTH C REAR PORT 18. Depress E to display the following screen E ENTER System Group NONE C REAR PARITY By depressing the left arrow key the choices for parity are displayed. The choices for selection are: NONE ODD EVEN 234

241 19. Depress the C key to display the following screen E REAR BIT RATE REAR DATA LGTH REAR STOP BITS C REAR PORT 20. Depress the left arrow key to select the REAR Panel Stop Bit selections. The following Screen should be visible. E ENTER System Group 1 C REAR STOP BITS The selections for Stop Bits are 1 or Depress the E key to accept the selections. 22. Depress the C key to back out of the relay and accept the settings when prompted by the REAR panel interface. Step 4: The REL 512 Serial Port 2 is able to be configured for RS232 or RS 485 connectivity. The configuration procedure is achieved via jumpers located near the Serial Port 2 interface on the relay. The default configuration for the relay is RS232. However one should verify jumper settings via the following procedure: 1. The technician performing this operation should be wearing anti-static wrist straps and work on an anti-static environment to ensure that static electricitiy is not conducted between the operator and REL 512 internal components. 2. Rotate the knurled screws to the left and right of the REL 512, which secure the front panel interface to the housing of the unit. The knurled screws should be turned counterclockwise (or to the left) to loosen the screws. 3. Remove the blue and red ribbon cable interconnecting the electronic signals between the front panel interface and the REL 512 motherboard. The internal assembly of the unit should be visible. 4. While grasping the internal assembly ejectors, and cantilevering the ejectors towards you, remove the internal assembly board from the chassis. 5. As illustrated, 5 jumpers are located near the rear serial port connector. The jumper locations for RS 232 and RS 485 operation are listed in TABLE 2. Ensure that the jumpers placed in the locations corresponding to the RS232 positions listed in the table. 6. Place the board into the REL 512 housing pressing the assembly ejectors with even force to mate the connections within the assembly with the REL 512 motherboard. 7. Carefully reattach the blue and red ribbon cable interconnecting the electronic signals between the front panel interface and the REL 512 motherboard. 8. With the front panel interface in the correct position, secure the front panel interface with the housing by tightening the knurled screws on the left and right side of the panel. The screws should be rotated clockwise (or to the right). 235

242 Table 2 - Card Jumper Settings Jumper Pins 1,2 2,3 Mode Selection: JP1-4 RS-232 RS-485 RS-485 Configuration JP5 Half duplex Full duplex JP6 2 wire 4 wire JP7 2 wire 4 wire RS-485 Termination/Bias Resistors: Jp8 121 Ohms Open JP9 523 Ohms Open JP Ohms Open Step 5: The operator should configure the HYPERTERMINAL settings to match those of the configuration made for the REL 512. The procedure is as follows: 1. Select HYPERTERMINAL from the WINDOWS menu to reveal the following screen illustrated in Figure Select the icon labeled Hyperterminal.exe The screen illustrated in Figure 43 should be visible. The operator will be prompted for a name as illustrated. Figure 42 Hyperterminal Selection Screen 236

243 Figure 43 Hyperterminal Setup Screen 3. Once the OK icon has been depressed, the screen for port setup will be displayed. Note that the port setup menu is illustrated for display and COM 1 selection is highlighted for this example and selection. Notice that with the MODEM selection (for the built in computer internal modem) deselected, the some of the fields are greyed out. 4. The COM properties for the modem must be selected for this example to those selected for the REL 512. In this case the same settings configured for the REL 512 in STEP 3 are selected for the interface. Notice that the settings are selected in Figure 44 for those configured in STEP 3. Notice for this example, hardware handshaking is enabled for RTS/CTS configuration. 6. Once the OK pushbutton is depressed, the screen depicted in Figure 45 is presented to the operator. AT commands can now be typed to configure the modem with the appropriate parameters for operation in this system. Figure 44 Com Port Configuration For Attachment Of Hyperterminal Session 237

244 Figure 45 Com Port Settings Configuration Screen Figure 46 Hyperterminal Screen For Data Communication Entry. Steps 6 And 7: Configuration Of The Modem Parameters For The Local And Remote Sites THE USROBOTICS modems used (Model V.Everything) have commands similar to those of the previous USROBOTIC modems. Several differences are apparent with respect to their S register configurations and auto configurability. Additional sessions may be set up to allow remote configuration. However, it is strongly advised that remote configuration and automation dial up capabilities not be used with the REL 512 since difficulties may result since handshaking is not available. Another word of caution should be issued in that the V.Everything modem may experience difficulties connecting with the REL 512 master/slave emulation of the port during dial-up sessions. IF the MODEM is undergoing the attachment process and the REL 512 happens to send out its time ASCII string to the MODEM simultaneously, the modem will disconnect and display the prompt NO CARRIER at the host site. This process will take a few minutes to occur and until this occurs, no communications will occur. If a command string is sensed via the SD line (remote modem LED will illumintate) during the dialing process, the remote modem will hang up (he remote 238